Answers 1

47083816-2-Informatica-Developers-Handbook-Interfaces.
pdf
1 Background
1.1 Purpose
This document has been created to provide a more detailed understanding of the ETL
patterns and the usage of
Informatica as it related to Project OneUP. This document should be leveraged
during the technical design and build
phases of the development effort. This document is NOT static. As architecture
patterns evolve and new best practices
are introduced and implemented, the pages that follow will be updated to reflect
these changes.
1.2 Intended Audience
This documentation is geared towards Integration Solution Architects, Technical
Designers, and Informatica conversion
and interface developers. Integration Solution Architects will gain a deeper
knowledge of the technology being used to
extract and load data from one system to the next. With this knowledge, the ISAs
will be prepared to ask better
questions of the business process teams to gain additional insight to improve the
quality of data transfer as well as the
quality of the SID documentation. Technical designers will use this documentation
to understand when to utilize various
extract and load strategies, what types of data conversion database objects need to
be created, and how conversions
and interfaces differ as business processes as well as units of code. The code
developers will use this as a guideline for
standards, conventions, and best practices as well as a first resource for
answering questions relevant to development.
Page 3 of 34
2 Detailed ETL Procedures

2.1 Informatica ETL Interface Strategies
Within each of the patterns, a typical code design approach is outlined. In
addition to this brief outline, the section on
Workflow Development will also delineate the constructs of the process flow and
workflow details within Informatica.
2.1.1 Interface Patterns
Interfaces that are developed using Informatica as the middleware technology will
typically be point to point batch
routines that are scheduled for source and target. The AI interface pattern
document outlines each pattern identified for
Project One Up.
2.1.1.1 Detailed Logical Architecture
Integration Layer
Source
Extraction
Transform to
Target
Format
Begin Audit 3 5 Target Load
Log
End Audit
Log
Error
Handling
Target Application
Layer
Data Application
Format
Exception
Handling
Logging/
Sequencing Audit
EAI Common Services
XRef Batching/
De-Batching
1
4
Standard Batch Interface
7
6
LEGEND
MW Components
Common Components
Normal Processing
Optional Processing
Source Application
Layer
Data
Application Format
2a
8a
ETL Common Components
Transformation
Error Logging
Batch Data Store
2b
2b
8b
1. Audit log is triggered to denote middleware will be receiving data.
2. Source data is extracted via the specific source extract strategy defined for
the interface.
a. Source data is pulled directly from the source.
b. Data is staged within the middleware database to support multiple requirements
for the source data.
Page 4 of 34
3. Data is transformed via the ETL tool into the target-specific format(s).
4. Cross reference lookups are performed during the source-to-target mapping.
5. Data is marked for insert/update/delete to the target application.
6. Data is loaded to the target application based upon the format specified.
7. Audit log is triggered to denote middleware has processed the data.
8. Error handling will be triggered based upon the status of preceding steps.
a. All-or-nothing error handler
b. Record-by-record error handler
This interface pattern does not require use of the middleware database. The
middleware database (labeled “Batch Data
Store”) in Step 2 is utilized to accomplish any one of the following requirements
of the business process:
· Multiple passes through each received data set (for example, if source data is
sent only once and
multiple mappings will require this information, it is best to store the data
within a database to facilitate
one process to receive data and multiple process to load data)
· Audit trail for logging purposes
· SOX compliance requirements
· Error handling
2.2 Informatica Error Logging and Exception Handling
2.2.1 Informatica Standard Task Level Error Logging
When logging audit and exception data to CommonLE either task level or row level
error logging can be utilized. Task
level is required by all interfaces to track failure or success of all interface
sessions within a workflow. The standard
implementation is outlined in the Appendix for Audit Log and Error Messaging
(CommonLE).
2.2.2 Informatica Row Level Error Logging
Row level error logging is specified by business requirements and is either
implemented through one of the exception
patterns described in the Informatica Error Handling Design document or by using
informatica’s row level error logging
functionality (verbose logging).
As an alternative to the exception patterns, verbose logging within Infomatica can
be utilized. Keep in mind verbose
logging within the Informatica session can greatly reduce performance of the
session run. When configuring sessions, a
developer has multiple options for error handling, error logging, and traceability
levels. When an error occurs at the
transformation level (per row/record), the PowerCenter Server logs error
information that allows a support team to
determine the cause and source of the error. Row error logging may be captured
within a database format or using flat
file structures. For Project OneUP, a decision has been made to use the database
format option for row error logging
purposes. The relational database structure will allow the Application Integration
team to standardize the format and
content of the error logs and manage this portion of the application within one
central location.
Page 5 of 34
In addition to capturing error data based upon the row being processed within
transformations, the PowerCenter Server
may also be able to capture the source data associated with the row in a
transformation. However, Informatica will be
unable to create a link between the row level error in a transformation and the
source record within the source qualifier if
the error occurs after an active source. An active source within Informatica is
defined as an active transformation used to
generate rows. Here is a list of the following transformations that are classified
as active:
- Aggregator
- Application Source Qualifier
- Custom, configured as an active transformation (It has been assumed that SAP
custom transformations fall into this category as well)
- Joiner
- MQ Source Qualifier
- Normalizer (VSAM or pipeline)
- Rank
- Sorter
- Source Qualifier
- XML Source Qualifier
- Mapplet, if it contains any of the above active transformations
By default, the PowerCenter Server will log all transformation errors within the
session log file and all rejected target
records into the reject or bad file. When row error logging has been enabled, all
such information is now filtered to the
error log database/flat file structures. If the architecture landscape determines
that all errors should reside in the error
logging structures and the standard session log and reject/bad file, then the
configuration should include enabling
Verbose Data Tracing. All of this additional logging may negatively impact the
performance of sessions and workflows
being executed on the PowerCenter server, as data are being processed on a row-by-
row basis instead of a block of
records at once.
Page 6 of 34
3 Informatica Standards
3.1 Workflow Development
For each business object, it is possible that multiple workflows exist to perform
the full spectrum of interface activities
from legacy to SAP. A workflow is defined as a set of sessions and other tasks
(commands calling shell scripts, decision
and control points, e-mail notifications, etc.) organized in concurrent and/or
parallel processing streams. Each workflow
will execute a mapping or series of mappings that extract source data and load it
into target systems. Working with the
AI team, each Solution Integration Design will need to be modularized into
workflows that perform the required predefined
business functions. As a result, the interface programs built for a particular
business object within the Solution
Integration Design documentation could span multiple workflows and thus multiple
technical design documents (as each
technical design is at the workflow level).
3.2 Code Naming Standards
The following tables reflect the naming standards that have been outlined in
Pepsico’s ETL-Informatica-Design-Best-
Practices document.
3.2.1 Code Comments
Within the Informatica code base, mappings, sessions, and workflows have a high-
level description or comment field that
is displayed when editing any of these units of code. Within the mapping section,
be sure to add text that defines the
author, date of comment, description of the mapping/session/workflow, and a version
control section. Below is a sample
of the mapping description that should be inserted into each mapping built for
QTG1.
Author: Developer Name
Date: 01/01/2005
Description: This mapping performs the core functionality for the XYZ interface.
================
Revision History:
================
1.0 – 01/01/2005 - Initial development
In addition to this comment, each of the transformations within a mapping should
also have a brief explanation defining
its functionality within the mapping.
3.2.2 Transformation Naming Standards
Type of
Transform
Naming Convention Description/Example
Source Definition [table_name] or
[flat_file_name]
The source definition should carry the same name as the
Flat File or Relational Table that it was imported from. If the
source was created from a shortcut, that should be indicated
in the name.
Target Definition [table_name] or
[flat_file_name]_ACTION
The target definition should carry the same name as the
Relational Table it was imported from. If the target was
created from a shortcut, that should be indicated in the
name. Flat File targets should have _FF at the end of the
name. The ACTION will correspond to the DML being
Page 7 of 34
Type of
Transform
Naming Convention Description/Example
performed on the target – INS, UPD, DEL.
Source Qualifier sq_[source_name]
sqo_[source_name]
sq_name of Source or sqo_name of Source if SQL override
is used.
Expression exp_[RelevantDescriptor] exp_RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessBeingDone
Update Strategy upd_[target_name]_ACTION An update strategy should have a suffix
appended to it
corresponding with the particular action (INS, UPD, DEL)
Router rtr_[RelevantDescriptor] rtr_ RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Filter fltr_[RelevantDescriptor] fltr_ RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Aggregator agg_[RelevantDescriptor] agg_
RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Lookup lkp_[source_name] or
lkp_[RelevantDescriptor] or
lkpo_[RelevantDescriptor]
If one table: lkp_LookupTableName; If multiple tables are
joined to bring back a result: lkp_
RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone. If SQL
override is used lkpo_...
Sequence
Generator
seq_[RelevantDescriptor] Typically the description is based upon the target table
and
the primary key column that the sequence will be
populating.
Stored Procedure sp_StoredProcedureName This is used when executing stored
procedures from the
database.
External
Procedure
ext_ProcedureName Used for external procedures
Advanced
External
Procedure
aep_ProcedureName Used for advanced external procedures
Joiner jnr_SourceTable/FileName1_
SourceTable/FileName2
Used to join disparate source types: Oracle to Flat File for
example.
Normalizer Nrm_[RelevantDescriptor] Used to create multiple records from the one
record being
processed. For example: nrm_Create_Error_Messages
Rank rnk_[RelevantDescriptor] rnk_ RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Mapplet Mplt_[RelevantDescriptor] mplt_ RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Sorter
Transformation
srt_[RelevantDescriptor] srt_ RelevantDescriptionOfTheProcessionBeingDone
Transaction
Control
tc_[RelevantDescriptor] tc_RelevantDescriptionOfControl
Union un_[RelevantDescriptor] un_RelevantDescriptionOfUnion
XML Parser Xmp_[RelevantDescriptor] xmp_RelevantDescriptionOfXMLParser
XML Generator Xmg_[RelevantDescriptor] xmg_RelevantDescriptionOfGenerator
Custom
Transformation
ct_[RelevantDescriptor] ct_RelevantDescriptionOfCustomTransformation
IDoc Interpreter int_[RelevantDescriptor]
int_idoc_RelevantDescriptionOfCustomTransformation
* Wherever possible, transformations should include the $PMRootDir/<release>/Temp
and
$PMRootDir/<release>/Cache directories. Such transformations include but are not
limited to:
Page 8 of 34
Transformation
Name
Directory
Sorter $PMRootDir/<release>/Temp
Joiner $PMRootDir/<release>/Cache
Aggregator $PMRootDir/<release>/Cache
Lookup $PMRootDir/<release>/Cache
Rank $PMRootDir/<release>/Cache
3.2.3 Informatica Code Object Naming Standards
Code Object Naming Convention Description/Example
Mapping m_ <RICEF_TYPE> _
<PROCESS_AREA> _
<SOURCE> _ <TARGET> _
<Optional Information>
The mapping is the main unit of code for Informatica. It will
be important to include the RICEF type, typically it will be
CONV for Conversions. The target is required and the
source is typically used when trying to differentiate among
multiple mappings that affect the same target. Version
numbers will not be used for this implementation.
Session s_m_ <RICEF_TYPE> _
<PROCESS_AREA> _
<SOURCE> _ <TARGET> _
<Optional Information>
s_m_MappingName without the version number attached.
The session is the wrapper for the mapping containing all
connection information necessary to extract and load data.
Workflow Wf_ <RICEF_TYPE> _
<PROCESS_AREA > _
<SPECIFIC_DESCRIPTOR or
BUSINESS_OBJECT>_
<SRC>_<TGT>_<Optional
Information>
(ie:
wf_INTFC_ISCP_INVENT_INF
O_BW_I2)
The workflow is a job stream that strings all necessary
tasks together to create a data flow from source to target
systems.
Worklets Wklt_description. Worklets are objects that represent a set of workflow
tasks
that allow you to reuse a set of workflow logic in several
workflows.
Reusable Session rs_description This is a session that may be shared among several
workflow and may execute while another instance of the
same session is running.
Cntrl Task Cntrl_description You can use the Control takes to stop, abort, or fail
the toplevel
workflow or the parent workflow based on an input
link condition.
Event Task Evnt_description Event-Raise task represents a user-defined event. When
the Informatica Server executes the Event-Raise task, the
Event-Raise task triggers the event. Use the Event-Raise
task with the Event-Wait task to define events.
The Event-Wait task waits for an event to occur. Once the
event triggers, the Informatica Server continues executing
the rest of the workflow.
Decision Task Dcsn_description The Decision task allows you to enter a condition
that
determines the execution of the workflow, similar to a link
condition.
Page 9 of 34
Code Object Naming Convention Description/Example

Command Task Cmd_description The Command task allows you to specify one or more
shell
commands to run during the workflow. For example, you
can specify shell commands in the Command task to
delete reject files, copy a file, or archive target files.
Email Task eml_description The Workflow Manager provides an Email task that allows
you to send email during a workflow. You can create
reusable Email tasks in the Task Developer for any type of
email. Or, you can create non-reusable Email tasks in the
Workflow and Worklet Designer.
Assignment Task asmt_description The Assignment task allows you to assign a value
to a
user-defined workflow variable.
Timer Task tm_description The Timer task allows you to specify the period of time
to
wait before the Informatica Server executes the next task in
the workflow. You can choose to start the next task in the
workflow at an exact time and date. You can also choose
to wait a period of time after the start time of another task,
workflow, or worklet before starting the next task.
3.2.4 Port Variable Naming Standards
Port Type Naming Convention Description/Example
Variable v_ReleventName Used in expression transformations
Output o_RelevantName or
out_RelevantName (only set
this for new output ports
created in an expression
transformation)
Used in expression transformations to define the outgoing
port for use in subsequent transformations.
Input i_Relevant_Name or
in_RelevantName (only set
this for input ports into a
lookup)
Used in lookup and expression transformations to denote
ports that are used within the transformation and do not
carry forward.
Lookup lk_RelevantName (only set this
in transformations for ports that
originated in a lookup
transformation)
Used in expression transformations for unconnected
lookups.
Return r_RelevantName Return values are found in lookup transformations and are
typically the column from the source object being
referenced in the lookup code.
3.3 Connection Configuration Standards
Each session within the workflow is associated to a mapping. The mapping consists
of source, target and transformation
objects. Within each of the source and target objects are connection parameters
which are configured at the session
level in Workflow Manger. The connection strings are documented in the QTG2
Informatica Connections List.xls
spreadsheet. This document can be found under the following StarTeam directory: 1UP
- Informatica\QTG2\Supplement.
Page 10 of 34
3.4 General Best Practices

3.4.1 Log File Names
Log File Names – Validate that all file names for logs match the unit of code. When
workflow names are changed from
wf_INT_LOAD to wf_INTFC_LOAD for example, the log file will remain wf_INT_LOAD.log
until the developer changes
the log file name. This is true of sessions as well. Validate that all workflow and
session log names match the name of
the corresponding unit of code.
3.4.2 Session Development Standards
All session parameters need to be set in the Task developer at session level and
not overridden in the Workflow (in
Workflow manager)
3.4.3 Lookup Transformations
Lookups should be created to return a default value of -1 in case of a lookup
failure.
3.5 Informatica Middleware Environment Standards
3.5.1 Infromatica Directory Structures
QTG1
INF Dev - phgp0233: /etlapps/dev/71/qtg1/SrcFiles/
/etlapps/dev/71/qtg1/TgtFiles/
INF QA - phgp0232: /etlapps/fit/71/qtg1/SrcFiles/
/etlapps/fit/71/qtg1/TgtFiles/
QTG2
INF Dev - phgp0233: /etlapps/dev/81/qtg2/SrcFiles/
/etlapps/dev/81/qtg2/TgtFiles/
INF QA - phgp0232: /etlapps/fit/81/qtg2/SrcFiles/
/etlapps/fit/81/qtg2/TgtFiles/
3.5.2 FMS Directory Structure on Informatica Server
INF Dev - phgp0233: /etlapps/dev/81/p1up_shared/fms/
INF QA - phgp0232: /etlapps/dev/81/p1up_shared/fms/
3.5.3 FMS Control File Names
(By default Informatica does not use control files to send files via FMS).
All FMS Control Files should use the following naming standard:
FMS_<Process Area>_<Src\Tgt>_<Business_Object>_<File_Description>. Xml
* For mainframe systems substitute the “_” for “.”
Page 11 of 34
3.5.4 Informatica Flat File Naming Standard

All files brought into or sent from the middleware layer should adhere to the below
standard. (Note: This assumes that
FMS will be able to rename files from Source & to Target.)
<Process Area>_<Src\Tgt>_<Business_Object>_<File_Description>. yyyyMMddHHmmss.RDY
(timestamp will be an
optional field - to be used when multiple files will appear before being
processed.)
Example: The ItemSiteMaster file for the ISCP process area, business objects
Transportaion Lanes for I2RP would be as
follows:
ISCP_I2RP_TRNLANES_ITEMSITEMASTER.yyyyMMddHHmmss.RDY
3.5.5 Informatica Middleware Staging Table Naming Standards
All source and target staging tables will consist of a common set of columns not
including the data columns required for
each specific interface:
· Transaction ID – unique sequence number for each record per interface run.
· Timestamp – date\time stamp when the record was inserted into the staging table.
· Status – flag to indicate whether the record has been processed, completed
failed, etc…
· Transaction Name – name of interface
The STATUS field can consist of the following values. Depending on the interface
not all STATUS codes will be used.
· N – (New) flag indicating that the record has been successfully inserted into the
staging DB.
· P – (Processing) flag indicating that the middleware application is processing
the record.
· C – (Complete) flag indicating that the middleware application has successfully
processed the record.
· F – (Failed) flag indicting that the middleware application has failed to process
the record. (Assumption –
depending on interface business rules, failed records will remain in the staging
table until successfully
processed).
Table Design:
Name Type Null
TRANSACTION_ID VARCHAR2 No
CREATE_DTM DATE No
STATUS VARCHAR2 No
TRANSACTION_NAME VARCHAR2 No
Table naming standards for a source system loading data into middleware staging
are:
<Process Area>_SRC_<Src\Tgt>_<Business_Object>_<Table_Name>
Example: The ItemSiteMaster table for the ISCP process area, business objects
Transportaion Lanes from BW would be
as follows:
ISCP_SRC_BW_TRNLANES_ITEMSITEMASTER
The same applies to the middleware application needing to load data into the
middleware staging before sending to the
target system.
<Process Area>_TGT_<Src\Tgt>_<Business_Object>_<Table_Name>
Page 12 of 34
Example: The ItemSiteMaster table for the ISCP process area, business objects
Transportaion Lanes to I2RP would be
as follows:
ISCP_TGT_I2RP_TRNLANES_ITEMSITEMASTER
3.6 Control-M Execution of Workflows
Most, if not all, of the interfaces built within Informatica will be executed using
Pepsico’s global scheduling tool Control-M.
In most cases, Control-M will not only trigger Informatica workflows but also SAP
and Legacy specific jobs. Each
Control-M job will be linked to other jobs within the group pertaining to a
particular interface. These dependencies are
driven by the return codes of each of the individual jobs within the job group. To
manage the execution of the workflows
and return codes to Control-M, each interface built within Informatica will be
executed via a Unix shell script. Below is the
basic structure of the shell script:
#!/bin/sh
###############################################################################
## Variables used for commencement of the Project OneUP IDoc Listener Workflow
###############################################################################
###########################################
## Creating Variables for Execution ##
## USERNAME, PASSWORD, and INFORMAT_PORT ##
###########################################
. //schedapps/p1up/env_p1up_batch.sh
. //schedapps/p1up/env_p1up_batch_qtg2.sh – for QTG2 and PCNA1 interfaces
###############################################################################
##
## Used to start Project OneUP Informatica Workflow
##
###############################################################################
//schedapps/p1up/start_workflow.sh US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC
wf_INTFC_QTG1_SHARED_IDOC_LISTENER -wait
The yellow highlighted section of the script provides the proper initialization of
the environment variables for the
start_workflow.sh script. User name, password, and Informatica port number are set
within the env_p1up_batch.sh
script.
The core functionality of these scripts is highlighted in grey. There are two
versions of this line, start_workflow.sh and
stop_workflow.sh. In nearly all situations, the start_workflow.sh is used with a
wait condition. The only Informatica
component that uses the stop_workflow.sh is the IDoc Listener, which is started
without a wait condition.
There are three parameters that are supplied to the start_workflow.sh and
stop_workflow.sh scripts: folder name
(highlighted in blue text), workflow name (highlighted in green text), and the wait
condition (red text). The wait condition
should be used by most interfaces, as this will allow the workflow to complete
prior to sending a return code to Control-M.
This is important because the return code is responsible for communicating success
or failure to Control-M and Control-
M uses this return code to dictate execution of subsequent jobs in the group.
There will be a script implemented for each interface. The script name should
conform to the following standard:
Page 13 of 34
p1up_qtqg2_<interface name>
The parameter values for each script will be interface specific.
To manually start the Informatica workflow with out Control-M, run the
start_workflow.sh for that particular interface from
the /schedapps/p1up directory.
Page 14 of 34
4 Build and Unit Test Activities

During the development cycle, each developer should focus build and unit test
activities on the sessions that perform the
extract and load procedures for the interface. All unit test scripts should be
completed for these main components.
Upon successful completion of these unit test activities, a developer should work
with the development lead to
incorporate the CommonLE components into an existing workflow. After walking
through the following procedures with
the development leads, any developer working on multiple interfaces will have the
basic understanding of the constructs
and organization of the standard interface “wrapper” to develop and test the
wrapper for subsequent interfaces.
4.1 PowerCenter Designer Tasks
Each developer will need to create shortcuts to the following three SHARED mappings
from SHARED_US_CORP_1UP
folder:
· m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN
· m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END
· m_P1UP_SHARED_ERROR_MESSAGING
DO NOT DIRECTLY COPY THESE MAPPINGS INTO YOUR DEVELOPMENT FOLDER. Shortcuts are
required so
that each developer is referencing the latest version of the code. If the mapping
changes within the Shared folder, those
changes will be propagated into the developer’s folder as well. Changes may impact
the developer’s session and its
ability to execute, but this type of error should not be difficult to resolve with
either a Validation of the session or a slight
configuration change.
Screenshot 7.1.1.a
This demonstrates the creation of a SHORTCUT into a developer folder. Notice the
shortcut icon on each
mapping that was added.
4.2 PowerCenter Workflow Manager Tasks
After the mapping shortcuts have been created in the developer’s folder, the
associated sessions can now be copied as
well. The following four sessions will be copied:
· s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN_SAMPLE
· s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS_SAMPLE
· s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE_SAMPLE
Page 15 of 34
· s_m_P1UP_SHARED_ERROR_MESSAGING_SAMPLE
To copy these sessions, follow these instructions:
1.) Connect to and open the desired developer folder.
2.) Connect to but do NOT open SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
3.) Highlight all four sessions related to audit and error logging within this
folder. Use the Edit menu to select
Copy…
Screenshot 7.1.2.a
4.) Navigate to the developer’s folder that is currently open and Paste using the
Edit menu.
Screenshot 7.1.2.b
Page 16 of 34
5.) Step #4 will generate a new window to emerge called “Copy Wizard”. The Copy
Wizard is designed to help
eliminate any conflicts Workflow Manager detects when copying sessions or workflows
from one folder to the
next. This wizard should determine that there is a conflict with regards to the
session/mapping associations.
For each mapping/session combination, you will need to go through and select the
mapping shortcut you
previously created. Screenshot 6.1.2.d demonstrates the resolution of the conflict.
Screenshot 7.1.2.c – Copy Wizard
Screenshot 7.1.2.d – Resolution
Page 17 of 34
6.) Click Next>> and Finish to complete this wizard.

7.) You should now have created copies of those sessions. You should now rename
each of the sessions you
copied to align with the interface you are building. The following is the naming
convention you should follow for
each reusable session:
s_m_INTFC_[interface acronym]_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN
s_m_INTFC_[interface acronym]_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS
s_m_INTFC_[interface acronym]_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE
s_m_INTFC_[interface acronym]_ERROR_MESSAGING
8.) Lastly, each of these sessions will require parameter file entries within the
following text files on the Unix
servers:
//etlapps/[phase]/71/qtg1/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_begin_audit_parms.txt
//etlapps/[phase]/71/qtg1/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt
//etlapps/[phase]/71/qtg1/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_error_parms.txt
9.) Refer to Section 6.1.3 for sample entries into the parameter files.
4.3 Mapping Parameters for Sessions
This table represents all of the parameters used for the CommonLE audit and error
logging mappings and sessions. The
table specifies which units of code utilize the various parameters on the list. It
is the developer’s responsibility to
determine the values for their work units and communicate that information to the
development leads and the Informatica
architect so that all documentation and code can be kept up-to-date.
Parameter Name Default Value Error Audit Audi Description
Page 18 of 34
Messag
e
Begin t
End
$$INTERFACE_NAME DEFAULT_INTERFACE_NAM
E
X X X This value will correspond with the
value used to insert into
INFA_INTERFACE_LOG table.
$$APPLICATION_ID DEFAULT_APPLICATION_ID X X X This parameter identifies the
Application from a CommonLE
perspective.
$$SERVICE_NAME 0 X X X This parameter will correspond with
the numeric value of the Caliber ID
for the interface object.
$
$TRANSACTION_DOMAI
N
DEFAULT_BUSINESS_OBJE
CT
X X X This parameter will correspond with
the name of the interface object and
is directly related to the
SERVICE_NAME numeric value.
$
$APPLICATION_DOMAIN
DEFAULT_TARGET_SYSTE
M
X X X This parameter will correspond to the
acronym for the target system or
application.
$$SEVERITY_CODE 0 X The severity code will be managed
for the interface. Any error will be
assigned the severity code for the
entire interface.
$$WORKFLOW_NAME DEFAULT_WORKFLOW_NA
ME
X X X This matches the workflow name for
all sessions in the interface.
$$NEXT_SESSION DEFAULT_NEXT_SESSION X This parameter will be the name of
the subsequent session in the
workflow.
$$AUDIT_STATUS DEFAULT_AUDIT_STATUS X This parameter will be different for
sessions that end the workflow
successfully versus a session that
ends the workflow with a failure.
Usually two sessions, one for
success and one for failure, exist
after a decision task in the workflow
which analyzes the status of the
workflow based upon its tasks.
$$PREVIOUS_SESSION DEFAULT_PREVIOUS_SESSI
ON
X This parameter will be the name of
the previously executed session in
the workflow.
Below are samples from each of the parameter files.
Screenshot 7.1.3.a – US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_begin_audit_parms.txt
Page 19 of 34
Screenshot 7.1.3.b – US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt

Screenshot 7.1.3.c – US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_error_parms.txt
Page 20 of 34
4.4 Build Completion and Next Steps

4.4.1 String / Assembly Testing
For string and assembly testing, all code will need to be moved into the project
specific string/assembly test folder
(QTG1_INTFC). There are currently shortcuts for the shared mappings that exist in
these folders. Therefore, the
development lead will only be responsible for migrating the sessions and workflows
into the project folder. The
development lead will need to re-point each session to use the mapping shortcuts
already created within the project
folder. In addition, the parameter files must be changed to reflect the new folder
that all code is residing in. These
modifications should complete the migration into the project folders.
4.4.2 Migration to QA, UAT, and PROD
The parameter files and any scripts related to the interface workflows should be
migrated from PHGP0233 to PHGP0232
and PHGP0234 accordingly. Unless environment-specific details are referenced in
scripts, no additional modifications
would be necessary.
Page 21 of 34
Appendix A: Step-by-Step Application of Code Template to Core Processes
This following appendix will provide developers with a common architecture and code
template for building interfaces that
publish messages for posting into the CommonLE. This documentation will also
provide the development leads with a
sort of “checklist” to walk through each interface and determine if the code has
been modified according to the necessary
steps.
1) Create a copy of the following mappings from the SHARED_US_CORP_1UP folder into
your current folder:
i) m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN
ii) m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END
iii) m_P1UP_SHARED_SUMMARY_ERROR_MESSAGING
iv) m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_ERR_LOG_MESSAGING
v) m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_AUDIT_LOG_MESSAGING
2) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN. To save time,
create a copy of the
session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN_SAMPLE from folder SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
3) Rename the session to comply with the following standards for interfaces.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN
4) Double-click the session and click on the Properties tab. Change the session log
file name to
your_session_name.log.
5) Click on the Properties Tab of your session. Use the following value for the
parameter file setting:
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_begin_audit_parms.txt”.
6) Click on the Mapping Tab. For the target entitled
shortcut_to_INFA_INTERFACE_LOG, change the reject file name
to your_session_name.bad.
7) Log into Unix command line for the Informatica server. Modify the parameter file
for begin audit logs located in
the //etlapps/dev/71/qtg1/Scripts directory. The file name will be
US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_begin_audit_parms.txt. To add the applicable data, copy and
paste the following 8
lines into the parameter file and replace the parameter values with the values that
pertain to your session.
[US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC.s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_BEGIN_SAMPLE]
$$INTERFACE_NAME=SAMPLE_INTERFACE_NAME
$$APPLICATION_ID=1UP_QTG1_INF_DEV
$$SERVICE_NAME=12345 (Note: This is actually the caliber ID)
$$TRANSACTION_DOMAIN=BUSINESS_OBJECT_NAME
$$APPLICATION_DOMAIN=TARGET_APPLICATION
$$NEXT_SESSION=s_m_INTFC_NEXT_SESSION
$$WORKFLOW_NAME=wf_P1UP_SHARED_INTERFACE_SAMPLE
Please refer to Section 7.1.3 for mapping parameters and parameter files.
8) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE. To save
time, you can
copy session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE_SAMPLE from folder
SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE
10) Double-click the session and click on the Properties tab. Change the session
log file name to
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt”.
Page 22 of 34
12) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS. To save

time, you can
copy session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS_SAMPLE from folder
SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS
log file name to
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt”.
16) Log into Unix command line for the Informatica server. Modify the parameter
file for begin audit logs located in
the //etlapps/dev/71/qtg1/Scripts directory. The file name will be
US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt.
To add the applicable data, copy and paste the following 18 lines into the
parameter file and replace the parameter
values with the values that pertain to your session.
[US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC.s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS_SAMPLE]
$$INTERFACE_NAME=TECH_ARCH_TEAM
$$TRANSACTION_DOMAIN=TECH_ARCH_DOMAIN
$$APPLICATION_DOMAIN=TGT_TECH_ARCH
$$PREVIOUS_SESSION=s_m_P1UP_TECH_ARCH_SAMPLE
$$AUDIT_STATUS=PROCESSED
[US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC.s_m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_FAILURE_SAMPLE]
$$INTERFACE_NAME=TECH_ARCH_TEAM
$$TRANSACTION_DOMAIN=TECH_ARCH_DOMAIN
$$APPLICATION_DOMAIN=TGT_TECH_ARCH
$$PREVIOUS_SESSION=s_m_P1UP_TECH_ARCH_SAMPLE
$$AUDIT_STATUS=FAILED
17) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_SUMMARY_ERROR_MESSAGING. To
save time, create
a copy of the session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_SUMMARY_ERROR_MESSAGING_SAMPLE from folder
SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_SUMMARY_ERROR_MESSAGING
log file name to
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_error_parms.txt”.
21) Log into Unix command line for the Informatica server. Modify the parameter
file for exception logs located in the
//etlapps/dev/71/qtg1/Scripts directory. The file name will be
US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_error_parms.txt. To add
the applicable data, copy and paste the following 8 lines into the parameter file
and replace the parameter values
with the values that pertain to your session.
[US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC.s_m_P1UP_SHARED_ERROR_MESSAGING_SAMPLE]
Page 23 of 34

$$TRANSACTION_DOMAIN=BUSINESS_OBJECT_NAME
$$APPLICATION_DOMAIN=TARGET_APPLICATION
$$SEVERITY_CODE=3 (NOTE: This will be dependent upon the SID definition for the
interface)
22) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_ERR_LOG_MESSAGING. To
save time, create a
copy of the session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_ERR_LOG_MESSAGING_SAMPLE from folder
SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_INTFC_ERR_LOG_MESSAGING
log file name to
25) Click on the Mapping Tab. For the target entitled INFA_INTERFACE_ERR_LOG1,
change the reject file name to
your_session_name.bad.
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_error_parms.txt”. The same error
parameter file will be
leveraged throughout the record-level exception handling components. Copy the lines
used for the summary
exception messaging session and reference this new session. Keep these entries
close together in case a change
is required.
27) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_AUDIT_LOG_MESSAGING. To
save time, create
a copy of the session s_m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_AUDIT_LOG_MESSAGING_SAMPLE from folder
SHARED_US_CORP_1UP.
i) s_m_INTFC_[interface_abbreviation]_INTFC_AUDIT_LOG_MESSAGING
log file name to
30) Click on the Mapping Tab. For the target entitled INFA_INTERFACE_AUDIT_LOG,
change the reject file name to
your_session_name.bad.
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_begin_audit_parms.txt”. The same audit
begin parameters will
be leveraged throughout the record-level audit logging components for this session.
Copy the lines used for the
begin audit messaging session and reference this new session. Keep these entries
close together in case a change
is required.
32) Within the core processing sessions, add the following entries to the workflow
parameter file located at:
“$PMRootDir/ai/Scripts/US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_workflow_parms.txt”.
[US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC.s_m_P1UP_SHARED_INTFC_AUDIT_LOG_MESSAGING_SAMPLE]
Shortcut_to_mplt_Process_Audit_Logs.$$AUDIT_LOGGING_SWITCH=ON
Page 24 of 34
Appendix B: Accessing CommonLE Logs

The following steps outline the process to login to the CommonLE front-end
application to view Informatica log entries.
1) The logs and errors are viewed via a web browser, Use the following link for the
development environment:
http://wlsite4.corp.pep.pvt:7229/1UPPepsiCSD/gologin.do
2) Enter the User Name and Password and click ‘Submit’
Page 25 of 34
3) The Welcome screen appears. Click Logs & Errors

4) Click View Logs and choose Application. You may use the other fields to narrow
the search. Click the Submit button.
Page 26 of 34
5) To view the details of a specific log click the Application link.

Page 27 of 34
6) The details of that specific log will be displayed at the bottom of the page.
Page 28 of 34
1)
Page 29 of 34
Appendix C: Implementing Record-Level Exception Logging into Core Processes

Within the SID documentation associated with a given interface, an exception or
error pattern will be selected by the
Integration Solution Architect. These patterns identify how the business is
required to track the data through an
interface. Each pattern tracks exceptions at differing levels and completion alerts
will also vary across the patterns. For
those patterns that require record-level exception logging (Transmit with Workflow
Success & Report Exceptions,
Transmit with Workflow Failure & Report Exceptions, and Restrict with Workflow
Failure & Report Exceptions), each
developer will need to implement this mapplet into the core process of the
interface workflow. For a design of the
mapplet, please refer to the Informatica Error Handling Design documentation
located in the same StarTeam directory.
Identifying Possible Error Locations
One of the outputs from the SID process is the identification of the error pattern
for the interface and all potential
exceptions within the business logic of the code. Throughout the core mappings for
an interface, there will be several
instances where errors can be captured and logged. Most frequently these locations
will be directly after lookup
procedure transformations or just prior to a target instance. Errors prior to
target instances will contain target-specific
load requirements that must be proactively enforced. For example, if field 4 is NOT
NULLABLE in the target application,
an expression or router must avoid sending all records with no value in field 4 to
the target and instead send this
information as an alert to the CommonLE.
Add Evaluation Transformations
Within a mapping, routers will be the most frequent tool for evaluating record sets
and choosing success or exception
paths. Routers will contain the necessary groups to send appropriate data to the
successful target instances and other
groups to direct data to the mapplet for logging to the exception table in
middleware.
Implementing the Mapplet
When an exception is encountered within the code, the mapplet will be utilized to
insert that data into the exception table
(INFA_INTERFACE_ERR_LOG) in a standard format.
Mapplet Input Port Port Description Input Value from
Mapping
in_INTERFACE_NAME This is the name of the interface
currently being executed. This
parameter should be consistent
across all of the parameter files
for a given interface.
$$INTERFACE_NAME from
the workflow parameter file
in_MAPPING_NAME This parameter should be local to
the mapping itself and have the
full name of the mapping being
executed.
$$MAPPING_NAME from the
workflow parameter file
in_TRANSFORMATION_NAME This value will be defined as a
constant within a transformation in
the mapping and will correspond
to the name of the transformation
where the exception occurred.
Constant defined within the
mapplet-calling mapping
in_TRANSFORMATION_TYPE This value will be the
transformation type for the
location of the exception.
Constant defined within the
mapplet-calling mapping
in_TRANS_INPUT_DATA An expression should be used to
concatenate the input values for a
Concatenated value defined
within the mapplet-calling
Page 30 of 34
given failed transformation. This

is most useful/vital for lookup
procedures.
mapping
in_TRANS_OUTPUT_DATA All output values from a failed
transformation should be
concatenated and mapped to this
port of the mapplet.
mapping.
in_ERR_CODE This provides a standard
exception code for a given error in
an interface. The error message
is derived from this value.
Constant value matching the
exact type and case from the
table below
in_ERR_BUSINESS_ID This identifies each source record
as a unique occurrence. It is very
possible that more than one field
is required for a unique business
id. Each SID document should
articulate in detail the exact
business id for a given interface.
mapping
in_ERR_TIMESTAMP The time of occurrence for an
exception
SYSDATE defined within the
mapplet-calling mapping.
Error Codes
This section will contain a table of all of the acceptable error messages to be
logged into the
INFA_INTERFACE_ERR_LOG table. Emphasis must be placed upon using the proper
messages when logging to this
table.
Error Code Value Error Code Description Example Usage
LOOKUP_PROCEDURE_ERROR Whenever a cross reference
lookup procedure returns a default
value due to mismatch of
incoming values, this error should
be logged into the exception log
table within the middleware
SAPEAI database schema.
When
lkp_PAYMENT_TERMS
returns -1, log this error along
with the incoming data values
for the transformation.
DATA_VALIDATION_ERROR SID documentation may outline
business data validation
procedures. These validations
must be checked within mappings
and errors logged, processes
suspended, etc.
When
exp_CHECK_DEBIT_CREDI
T_MATCH detects a
difference between
AMT_DEBIT and
AMT_CREDIT, route this
information to the exception
mapplet.
COMPUTATION_ERROR This error message value should
be used when computation errors
are detected within expressions,
aggregators, etc.
When in_denominator = 0
then route record to exception
mapplet with a divide by zero
error using this message
value.
DATA_CONVERSION_ERROR This value will be used when
conversions or substitutions are
used within expressions and no
possible matches are found.
When in_oldValue is not in (1,
2, 3, 4, 5) then mark this as
an error.
RECORD_COUNT_ERROR This error message is reserved for When number of source
Page 31 of 34
source/target record count

analysis.
records does not equal the
number of target records, log
this value.
TARGET_LOAD_ERROR This error message is reserved for
target load errors.
When target load conditions
are not met, this error should
be sent to the CommonLE to
identify the record as not
being loaded into the target.
Where applicable, this error
can be used in conjunction
with another error code.
Page 32 of 34
Appendix D: Implementing Record-Level Audit Logging into Core Processes

Within the Solution Integration Design for a given interface, a Business ID or
unique identifier for a record in the source
system is documented. This Business ID subsequently becomes the unique identifier
for each record transmitted
through the interface code. This unique identifier will be logged to the Audit
Logging portion of the CommonLE as a
requirement of all QTG2 interfaces using Informatica. The components that perform
audit logging may be turned off by
production support personnel. This switching functionality is controlled at the
interface /workflow level; therefore large
interface volume can be removed by production support when it no longer is needed.
Creating the Business ID
Within the Solution Integration Design documentation, there is a section for the
creation of a Business ID for the
interface. This identifier will be either one field or the concatenation of
multiple fields that combine to create the natural
key for the incoming data record. This Business ID should be created within the
first one or two transformations
downstream of the source qualifier transformation. If a SQL Override is used within
the mapping, it may be advisable to
create the Business ID within the SQL statement. For example, if the source table
is DM_ACCOUNT and the Business
ID is ACCT_ID, your SQL statement could read: select ACCT_ID as INTFC_BUSINESS_ID,
ACCT_ID as ACCT_ID,
STRT_DT as START_DATE from DM_ACCOUNT. Because there are multiple ways of
processing data through a
mapping, the developer may choose to have only one ACCT_ID value returned by the
SQL statement and then connect
it to multiple transformation paths. When using SQL Overrides to meet other
requirements, the architecture team
recommends this strategy for implementation.
Inserting the Audit Logging Mapplet & Target
The majority of functionality for inserting into the interface audit log table
within the middleware database resides within a
reusable mapplet transformation in the shared Informatica folder. This mapplet,
mplt_Process_Audit_Logs, contains a
router transformation that controls the usage of audit logging within an interface.
The router’s main grouping evaluates
the value of the AUDIT_LOGGING_SWITCH parameter within the core workflow parameter
file on the Unix server. Each
developer will need to provide the following inputs to the mapplet transformation:
· INTERFACE_NAME
· MAPPING_NAME
· AUDIT_BUSINESS_ID
· AUDIT_TIMESTAMP
The outputs of this transformation will link directly to the target table,
INFA_INTERFACE_AUDIT_LOG. Using the
AutoLink feature of Informatica, the output from the mapplet transformation will
automatically link or port to the target
table’s columns. During session creation, assign SAPEAI as the connection for this
target table.
Setting Up Mapping Parameters and Parameter File
For interface core processes, there is one parameter file used across the various
interfaces for a given release. The
parameter file, US_CORP_1UP_AI_INTFC_workflow_parms.txt, will contain the specific
parameters used by core
process sessions. The most frequently used parameter, $$INTERFACE_NAME, should be
present in this parameter file
as it is present in all other parameter files. As a developer, please make certain
that the INTERFACE_NAME value
matches across all of these separate files. The common architecture components
require this synchronization.
Within each mapping, there are two main parameters that need to be defined: $
$INTERFACE_NAME set via the
parameter file and $$MAPPING_NAME that can be defaulted within the mapping itself.
There is no need to maintain this
value within the parameter file itself. In addition, the mapplet contains a
parameter that must be fed from the parameter
file for core processes. This parameter, $$AUDIT_LOGGING_SWITCH, will provide the
functionality of controlling audit
logging to the Common Services reporting components. When not configured to the
value of ‘ON’, the interface will not
log Business IDs to the INFA_INTERFACE_AUDIT_LOG table and subsequently no messages
will be delivered to the
AUDIT queue for Common Services.
For assembly testing purposes, audit logging should always be enabled. The general
rule for system test cycles should
be that the AUDIT_LOGGING_SWITCH is set to ‘ON’ unless performance becomes a major
issue for successful
completion of the testing phases. Performance of the common components should be
thoroughly investigated during
these test intervals. Application Integration architects will assist with any
performance issues that emerge from these
common mapplets, mappings, and sessions. Data volumes within the
INFA_INTERFACE_AUDIT_LOG table may
become the single largest contributor of performance issues for this reusable
component.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
138248237-Best-Informatica-Interview-Questions.pdf
Best Informatica Interview Questions & Answers

Deleting duplicate row using Informatica
Q1. Suppose we have Duplicate records in Source System and we want to load only the
unique records in
the Target System eliminating the duplicate rows. What will be the approach?
Ans.
Let us assume that the source system is a Relational Database . The source table is
having duplicate rows.
Now to eliminate duplicate records, we can check the Distinct option of the Source
Qualifier of the source
table and load the target accordingly.
Informatica Join Vs Database Join
Which is the fastest? Informatica or Oracle?
In our previous article, we tested the performance of ORDER BY operation in
Informatica and Oracle and
found that, in our test condition, Oracle performs sorting 14% speedier than
Informatica. This time we will
look into the JOIN operation, not only because JOIN is the single most important
data set operation but also
because performance of JOIN can give crucial data to a developer in order to
develop proper push down
optimization manually.
Informatica is one of the leading data integration tools in today’s world. More
than 4,000 enterprises
worldwide rely on Informatica to access, integrate and trust their information
assets with it. On the other
hand, Oracle database is arguably the most successful and powerful RDBMS system
that is trusted from
1980s in all sorts of business domain and across all major platforms. Both of these
systems are bests in the
technologies that they support. But when it comes to the application development,
developers often face
challenge to strike the right balance of operational load sharing between these
systems. This article will help
them to take the informed decision.
Which JOINs data faster? Oracle or Informatica?
As an application developer, you have the choice of either using joining syntaxes
in database level to join
your data or using JOINER TRANSFORMATION in Informatica to achieve the same
outcome. The question
is – which system performs this faster?
Test Preparation
We will perform the same test with 4 different data points (data volumes) and log
the results. We will start
with 1 million data in detail table and 0.1 million in master table. Subsequently
we will test with 2 million, 4
million and 6 million detail table data volumes and 0.2 million, 0.4 million and
0.6 million master table data
volumes. Here are the details of the setup we will use,
1. Oracle 10g database as relational source and target
2. Informatica PowerCentre 8.5 as ETL tool
3. Database and Informatica setup on different physical servers using HP UNIX
4. Source database table has no constraint, no index, no database statistics and no
partition
5. Source database table is not available in Oracle shared pool before the same is
read
6. There is no session level partition in Informatica PowerCentre
7. There is no parallel hint provided in extraction SQL query
8. Informatica JOINER has enough cache size
We have used two sets of Informatica PowerCentre mappings created in Informatica
PowerCentre designer.
The first mapping m_db_side_join will use an INNER JOIN clause in the source
qualifier to sort data in
database level. Second mapping m_Infa_side_join will use an Informatica JOINER to
JOIN data in
informatica level. We have executed these mappings with different data points and
logged the result.
Further to the above test we will execute m_db_side_join mapping once again, this
time with proper
database side indexes and statistics and log the results.
Result
The following graph shows the performance of Informatica and Database in terms of
time taken by each
system to sort data. The average time is plotted along vertical axis and data
points are plotted along
horizontal axis.
Data Points Master Table Record Count Detail Table Record Count
1 0.1 M 1 M
2 0.2 M 2 M
3 0.4 M 4 M
4 0.6 M 6 M
Verdict
In our test environment, Oracle 10g performs JOIN operation 24% faster than
Informatica Joiner Transformation while without Index and 42% faster
with Database Index
Assumption
1. Average server load remains same during all the experiments
2. Average network speed remains same during all the experiments
Note
1. This data can only be used for performance comparison but cannot be used for
performance
benchmarking.
2. This data is only indicative and may vary in different testing conditions.
In this "DWBI Concepts' Original article", we put Oracle database and Informatica
PowerCentre to lock horns
to prove which one of them handles data SORTing operation faster. This article
gives a crucial insight to
application developer in order to take informed decision regarding performance
tuning.
Comparing Performance of SORT operation (Order By) in
Informatica and Oracle
systems.
Think about a typical ETL operation often used in enterprise level data
integration. A lot of data processing
can be either redirected to the database or to the ETL tool. In general, both the
database and the ETL tool
are reasonably capable of doing such operations with almost same efficiency and
capability. But in order to
achieve the optimized performance, a developer must carefully consider and decide
which system s/he
should be trusting with for each individual processing task.
In this article, we will take a basic database operation – Sorting, and we will put
these two systems to test in
order to determine which does it faster than the other, if at all.
Which sorts data faster? Oracle or Informatica?
As an application developer, you have the choice of either using ORDER BY in
database level to sort your
data or using SORTER TRANSFORMATION in Informatica to achieve the same outcome. The
question is –
which system performs this faster?
Test Preparation
We will perform the same test with different data points (data volumes) and log the
results. We will start with
1 million records and we will be doubling the volume for each next data points.
Here are the details of the
setup we will use,
partition
read
8. The source table has 10 columns and first 8 columns will be used for sorting
9. Informatica sorter has enough cache size
The first mapping m_db_side_sort will use an ORDER BY clause in the source
database level. Second mapping m_Infa_side_sort will use an Informatica sorter to
sort data in informatica
level. We have executed these mappings with different data points and logged the
result.
Result
time taken by each
system to sort data. The time is plotted along vertical axis and data volume is
plotted along horizontal axis.
Verdict
The above experiment demonstrates that Oracle
database is faster in SORT operation than
Informatica by an average factor of 14%.
Assumption
Note
This data can only be used for performance comparison but cannot be used for
performance benchmarking.
To know the Informatica and Oracle performance comparison for JOIN operation,
please click here
In this yet another "DWBI Concepts' Original article", we test the performance of
Informatica PowerCentre
8.5 Joiner transformation versus Oracle 10g database join. This article gives a
crucial insight to application
developer in order to take informed decision regarding performance tuning.
In our previous article, we tested the performance of ORDER BY operation in
Informatica and Oracle and
found that, in our test condition, Oracle performs sorting 14% speedier than
Informatica. This time we will
look into the JOIN operation, not only because JOIN is the single most important
data set operation but also
because performance of JOIN can give crucial data to a developer in order to
develop proper push down
optimization manually.
systems. This article will help
them to take the informed decision.
Which JOINs data faster? Oracle or Informatica?
As an application developer, you have the choice of either using joining syntaxes
in database level to join
your data or using JOINER TRANSFORMATION in Informatica to achieve the same
outcome. The question
is – which system performs this faster?
Test Preparation
We will perform the same test with 4 different data points (data volumes) and log
the results. We will start
with 1 million data in detail table and 0.1 million in master table. Subsequently
we will test with 2 million, 4
million and 6 million detail table data volumes and 0.2 million, 0.4 million and
0.6 million master table data
volumes. Here are the details of the setup we will use,
partition
read
8. Informatica JOINER has enough cache size
The first mapping m_db_side_join will use an INNER JOIN clause in the source
database level. Second mapping m_Infa_side_join will use an Informatica JOINER to
JOIN data in
informatica level. We have executed these mappings with different data points and
logged the result.
Further to the above test we will execute m_db_side_join mapping once again, this
time with proper
database side indexes and statistics and log the results.
Result
time taken by each
system to sort data. The average time is plotted along vertical axis and data
points are plotted along
horizontal axis.
Data Points Master Table Record Count Detail Table Record Count
1 0.1 M 1 M
2 0.2 M 2 M
3 0.4 M 4 M
4 0.6 M 6 M
Verdict
In our test environment, Oracle 10g performs JOIN operation 24% faster than
Informatica Joiner Transformation while without Index and 42% faster
with Database Index
Assumption
Note
1. This data can only be used for performance comparison but cannot be used for
performance
benchmarking.
2. This data is only indicative and may vary in different testing conditions.
Informatica Reject File - How to Identify rejection reason
When we run a session, the integration service may create a reject file for each
target instance in the
mapping to store the target reject record. With the help of the Session Log and
Reject File we can identify
the cause of data rejection in the session. Eliminating the cause of rejection will
lead to rejection free loads
in the subsequent session runs. If theInformatica Writer or the Target Database
rejects data due to any valid
reason the integration service logs the rejected records into the reject file.
Every time we run the session the
integration service appends the rejected records to the reject file.
Working with Informatica Bad Files or Reject Files
By default the Integration service creates the reject files or bad files in the
$PMBadFileDir process variable
directory. It writes the entire reject record row in the bad file although the
problem may be in any one of the
Columns. The reject files have a default naming convention like
[target_instance_name].bad . If we open
the reject file in an editor we will see comma separated values having some tags/
indicator and some data
values. We will see two types of Indicators in the reject file. One is the Row
Indicator and the other is
the Column Indicator .
For reading the bad file the best method is to copy the contents of the bad file
and saving the same as a
CSV (Comma Sepatared Value) file. Opening the csv file will give an excel sheet
type look and feel. The
firstmost column in the reject file is the Row Indicator , that determines whether
the row was destined for
insert, update, delete or reject. It is basically a flag that determines the Update
Strategy for the data row.
When the Commit Type of the session is configured as User-defined the row indicator
indicates whether
the transaction was rolled back due to a non-fatal error, or if the committed
transaction was in a failed target
connection group.
List of Values of Row Indicators:
Row Indicator Indicator Significance Rejected By
0 Insert Writer or target
1 Update Writer or target
2 Delete Writer or target
3 Reject Writer
4 Rolled-back insert Writer
5 Rolled-back update Writer
6 Rolled-back delete Writer
7 Committed insert Writer
8 Committed update Writer
9 Committed delete Writer
Now comes the Column Data values followed by their Column Indicators, that
determines the data quality
of the corresponding Column.
List of Values of Column Indicators:
>
Column
Indicator
Type of data Writer Treats As
D
Valid data or
Good Data.
Writer passes it to the target database.
The target accepts it unless a database
error occurs, such as finding a duplicate
key while inserting.
O
Overflowed
Numeric Data.
Numeric data exceeded the specified
precision or scale for the column. Bad
data, if you configured the mapping target
to reject overflow or truncated data.
N Null Value.
The column contains a null value. Good
data. Writer passes it to the target, which
rejects it if the target database does not
accept null values.
T Truncated
String Data.
String data exceeded a specified precision
for the column, so the Integration Service
truncated it. Bad data, if you configured
the mapping target to reject overflow or
truncated data.
Also to be noted that the second column contains column indicator flag value 'D'
which signifies that the
Row Indicator is valid.
Now let us see how Data in a Bad File looks like:
Implementing Informatica Incremental Aggregation
Using incremental aggregation, we apply captured changes in the source data (CDC
part) to aggregate
calculations in a session. If the source changes incrementally and we can capture
the changes, then we can
configure the session to process those changes. This allows the Integration Service
to update the target
incrementally, rather than forcing it to delete previous loads data, process the
entire source data and
recalculate the same data each time you run the session.
Using Informatica Normalizer Transformation
Normalizer, a native transformation in Informatica, can ease many complex data
transformation requirement.
Learn how to effectively use normalizer here.
Using Noramalizer Transformation
A Normalizer is an Active transformation that returns multiple rows from a source
row, it returns duplicate
data for single-occurring source columns. The Normalizer transformation parses
multiple-occurring columns
from COBOL sources, relational tables, or other sources. Normalizer can be used to
transpose the data in
columns to rows.
Normalizer effectively does the opposite of what Aggregator does!
Example of Data Transpose using Normalizer
Think of a relational table that stores four quarters of sales by store and we need
to create a row for each
sales occurrence. We can configure a Normalizer transformation to return a separate
row for each quarter
like below..
The following source rows contain four quarters of sales by store:
Source Table
Store Quarter1 Quarter2 Quarter3 Quarter4
Store1 100 300 500 700
Store2 250 450 650 850
The Normalizer returns a row for each store and sales combination. It also returns
an index(GCID) that
identifies the quarter number:
Target Table
Store Sales Quarter
Store 1 100 1
Store 1 300 2
Store 1 500 3
Store 1 700 4
Store 2 250 1
Store 2 450 2
Store 2 650 3
Store 2 850 4
How Informatica Normalizer Works
Suppose we have the following data in source:
Name Month Transportation House Rent Food
Sam Jan 200 1500 500
John Jan 300 1200 300
Tom Jan 300 1350 350
Sam Feb 300 1550 450
John Feb 350 1200 290
Tom Feb 350 1400 350
and we need to transform the source data and populate this as below in the target
table:
Name Month Expense Type Expense
Sam Jan Transport 200
Sam Jan House rent 1500
Sam Jan Food 500
John Jan Transport 300
John Jan House rent 1200
John Jan Food 300
Tom Jan Transport 300
Tom Jan House rent 1350
Tom Jan Food 350
.. like this.
Now below is the screen-shot of a complete mapping which shows how to achieve this
result using
Informatica PowerCenter Designer. Image: Normalization Mapping Example 1
I will explain the mapping further below.
Setting Up Normalizer Transformation Property
First we need to set the number of occurences property of the Expense head as 3 in
the Normalizer tab of
the Normalizer transformation, since we have Food,Houserent and Transportation.
Which in turn will create the corresponding 3 input ports in the ports tab along
with the fields Individual and
Month
In the Ports tab of the Normalizer the ports will be created automatically as
configured in the Normalizer tab.
Interestingly we will observe two new columns namely,
· GK_EXPENSEHEAD
· GCID_EXPENSEHEAD
GK field generates sequence number starting from the value as defined in Sequence
field while GCID holds
the value of the occurence field i.e. the column no of the input Expense head.
Here 1 is for FOOD, 2 is for HOUSERENT and 3 is for TRANSPORTATION.
Now the GCID will give which expense corresponds to which field while converting
columns to rows.
Below is the screen-shot of the expression to handle this GCID efficiently:
Image: Expression to handle GCID
This is how we will accomplish our task!
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache
A LookUp cache does not change once built. But what if the underlying lookup table
changes the data after
the lookup cache is created? Is there a way so that the cache always remain up-to-
date even if the
underlying table changes?
Dynamic Lookup Cache
Let's think about this scenario. You are loading your target table through a
mapping. Inside the mapping you
have a Lookup and in the Lookup, you are actually looking up the same target table
you are loading. You
may ask me, "So? What's the big deal? We all do it quite often...". And yes you are
right. There is no "big
deal" because Informatica (generally) caches the lookup table in the very beginning
of the mapping, so
whatever record getting inserted to the target table through the mapping, will have
no effect on the Lookup
cache. The lookup will still hold the previously cached data, even if the
underlying target table is changing.
But what if you want your Lookup cache to get updated as and when the target table
is changing? What if
you want your lookup cache to always show the exact snapshot of the data in your
target table at that point
in time? Clearly this requirement will not be fullfilled in case you use a static
cache. You will need a dynamic
cache to handle this.
But why anyone will need a dynamic cache?
To understand this, let's first understand a static cache scenario.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - What is Static Cache
STATIC CACHE SCENARIO
Let's suppose you run a retail business and maintain all your customer information
in a customer master
table (RDBMS table). Every night, all the customers from your customer master table
is loaded in to a
Customer Dimension table in your data warehouse. Your source customer table is a
transaction system
table, probably in 3rd normal form, and does not store history. Meaning, if a
customer changes his address,
the old address is updated with the new address. But your data warehouse table
stores the history (may be
in the form of SCD Type-II). There is a map that loads your data warehouse table
from the source table.
Typically you do a Lookup on target (static cache) and check with your every
incoming customer record to
determine if the customer is already existing in target or not. If the customer is
not already existing in target,
you conclude the customer is new and INSERT the record whereas if the customer is
already existing, you
may want to update the target record with this new record (if the record is
updated). This is illustrated
below, You don't need dynamic Lookup cache for this
Image: A static Lookup Cache to determine if a source record is new or updatable
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - What is Dynamic Cache
DYNAMIC LOOKUP CACHE SCENARIO
Notice in the previous example I mentioned that your source table is an RDBMS
table. This ensures that
your source table does not have any duplicate record.
But, What if you had a flat file as source with many duplicate records?
Would the scenario be same? No, see the below illustration.
Image: A Scenario illustrating the use of dynamic lookup cache
Here are some more examples when you may consider using dynamic lookup,
· Updating a master customer table with both new and updated customer information
coming
together as shown above
· Loading data into a slowly changing dimension table and a fact table at the same
time. Remember,
you typically lookup the dimension while loading to fact. So you load dimension
table before loading fact
table. But using dynamic lookup, you can load both simultaneously.
· Loading data from a file with many duplicate records and to eliminate duplicate
records in target by
updating a duplicate row i.e. keeping the most recent row or the initial row
· Loading the same data from multiple sources using a single mapping. Just consider
the previous
Retail business example. If you have more than one shops and Linda has visited two
of your shops for the
first time, customer record Linda will come twice during the same load.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - How does dynamic cache
work
So, How does dynamic lookup work?
When the Integration Service reads a row from the source, it updates the lookup
cache by performing one of
the following actions:
· Inserts the row into the cache: If the incoming row is not in the cache, the
Integration Service
inserts the row in the cache based on input ports or generated Sequence-ID. The
Integration Service flags
the row as insert.
· Updates the row in the cache: If the row exists in the cache, the Integration
Service updates the
row in the cache based on the input ports. The Integration Service flags the row as
update.
· Makes no change to the cache: This happens when the row exists in the cache and
the lookup is
configured or specified To Insert New Rows only or, the row is not in the cache and
lookup is configured to
update existing rows only or, the row is in the cache, but based on the lookup
condition, nothing changes.
The Integration Service flags the row as unchanged.
Notice that Integration Service actually flags the rows based on the above three
conditions.
And that's a great thing, because, if you know the flag you can actually reroute
the row to achieve different
logic. This flag port is called
· NewLookupRow
Using the value of this port, the rows can be routed for insert, update or to do
nothing. You just need to use
a Router or Filter transformation followed by an Update Strategy.
Oh, forgot to tell you the actual values that you can expect in NewLookupRow port
are:
· 0 = Integration Service does not update or insert the row in the cache.
· 1 = Integration Service inserts the row into the cache.
· 2 = Integration Service updates the row in the cache.
When the Integration Service reads a row, it changes the lookup cache depending on
the results of the
lookup query and the Lookup transformation properties you define. It assigns the
value 0, 1, or 2 to the
NewLookupRow port to indicate if it inserts or updates the row in the cache, or
makes no change.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - Dynamic Lookup Mapping
Example
Example of Dynamic Lookup Implementation
Ok, I design a mapping for you to show Dynamic lookup implementation. I have given
a full screenshot of
the mapping. Since the screenshot is slightly bigger, so I link it below. Just
click to expand the image.
And here I provide you the screenshot of the lookup below. Lookup ports screen shot
first,
Image: Dynamic Lookup Ports Tab
And here is Dynamic Lookup Properties Tab
If you check the mapping screenshot, there I have used a router to reroute the
INSERT group and UPDATE
group. The router screenshot is also given below. New records are routed to the
INSERT group and existing
records are routed to the UPDATE group.
Router Transformation Groups Tab
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - Dynamic Lookup
Sequence ID
While using a dynamic lookup cache, we must associate each lookup/output port with
an input/output port or
a sequence ID. The Integration Service uses the data in the associated port to
insert or update rows in the
lookup cache. The Designer associates the input/output ports with the lookup/output
ports used in the
lookup condition.
When we select Sequence-ID in the Associated Port column, the Integration Service
generates a sequence
ID for each row it inserts into the lookup cache.
When the Integration Service creates the dynamic lookup cache, it tracks the range
of values in the cache
associated with any port using a sequence ID and it generates a key for the port by
incrementing the
greatest sequence ID existing value by one, when the inserting a new row of data
into the cache.
When the Integration Service reaches the maximum number for a generated sequence
ID, it starts over at
one and increments each sequence ID by one until it reaches the smallest existing
value minus one. If the
Integration Service runs out of unique sequence ID numbers, the session fails.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - Dynamic Lookup Ports
About the Dynamic Lookup Output Port
The lookup/output port output value depends on whether we choose to output old or
new values when the
Integration Service updates a row:
· Output old values on update: The Integration Service outputs the value that
existed in the cache
before it updated the row.
· Output new values on update: The Integration Service outputs the updated value
that it writes in
the cache. The lookup/output port value matches the input/output port value.
Note: We can configure to output old or new values using the Output Old Value On
Update transformation
property.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - NULL handling in LookUp
Handling NULL in dynamic LookUp
If the input value is NULL and we select the Ignore Null inputs for Update property
for the associated input
port, the input value does not equal the lookup value or the value out of the
input/output port. When you
select theIgnore Null property, the lookup cache and the target table might become
unsynchronized if you
pass null values to the target. You must verify that you do not pass null values to
the target.
When you update a dynamic lookup cache and target table, the source data might
contain some null values.
The Integration Service can handle the null values in the following ways:
· Insert null values: The Integration Service uses null values from the source and
updates the
lookup cache and target table using all values from the source.
· Ignore Null inputs for Update property : The Integration Service ignores the null
values in the
source and updates the lookup cache and target table using only the not null values
from the source.
If we know the source data contains null values, and we do not want the Integration
Service to update the
lookup cache or target with null values, then we need to check the Ignore Null
property for the corresponding
lookup/output port.
When we choose to ignore NULLs, we must verify that we output the same values to
the target that the
Integration Service writes to the lookup cache. We can Configure the mapping based
on the value we want
the Integration Service to output from the lookup/output ports when it updates a
row in the cache, so that
lookup cache and the target table might not become unsynchronized
· New values. Connect only lookup/output ports from the Lookup transformation to
the target.
· Old values. Add an Expression transformation after the Lookup transformation and
before the
Filter or Router transformation. Add output ports in the Expression transformation
for each port in the target
table and create expressions to ensure that we do not output null input values to
the target.
Informatica Dynamic Lookup Cache - Other Details
When we run a session that uses a dynamic lookup cache, the Integration Service
compares the values in
all lookup ports with the values in their associated input ports by default.
It compares the values to determine whether or not to update the row in the lookup
cache. When a value in
an input port differs from the value in the lookup port, the Integration Service
updates the row in the cache.
But what if we don't want to compare all ports? We can choose the ports we want the
Integration Service to
ignore when it compares ports. The Designer only enables this property for
lookup/output ports when the
port is not used in the lookup condition. We can improve performance by ignoring
some ports during
comparison.
We might want to do this when the source data includes a column that indicates
whether or not the row
contains data we need to update. Select the Ignore in Comparison property for all
lookup ports except
the port that indicates whether or not to update the row in the cache and target
table.
Note: We must configure the Lookup transformation to compare at least one port else
the Integration
Service fails the session when we ignore all ports.
Links
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica
Pushdown Optimization which is a new concept in Informatica PowerCentre, allows
developers to balance
data transformation load among servers. This article describes pushdown techniques.
What is Pushdown Optimization?
Pushdown optimization is a way of load-balancing among servers in order to achieve
optimal performance.
Veteran ETL developers often come across issues when they need to determine the
appropriate place to
perform ETL logic. Suppose an ETL logic needs to filter out data based on some
condition. One can either
do it in database by using WHERE condition in the SQL query or inside Informatica
by using Informatica
Filter transformation. Sometimes, we can even "push" some transformation logic to
the target database
instead of doing it in the source side (Especially in the case of EL-T rather than
ETL). Such optimization is
crucial for overall ETL performance.
How does Push-Down Optimization work?
One can push transformation logic to the source or target database using pushdown
optimization. The
Integration Service translates the transformation logic into SQL queries and sends
the SQL queries to the
source or the target database which executes the SQL queries to process the
transformations. The amount
of transformation logic one can push to the database depends on the database,
transformation logic, and
mapping and session configuration. The Integration Service analyzes the
transformation logic it can push to
the database and executes the SQL statement generated against the source or target
tables, and it
processes any transformation logic that it cannot push to the database.
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica - Using Pushdown
Optimization
Using Pushdown Optimization
Use the Pushdown Optimization Viewer to preview the SQL statements and mapping
logic that the
Integration Service can push to the source or target database. You can also use the
Pushdown Optimization
Viewer to view the messages related to pushdown optimization.
Let us take an example: Image: Pushdown Optimization Example 1
Filter Condition used in this mapping is: DEPTNO>40
Suppose a mapping contains a Filter transformation that filters out all employees
except those with a
DEPTNO greater than 40. The Integration Service can push the transformation logic
to the database. It
generates the following SQL statement to process the transformation logic:
INSERT INTO EMP_TGT(EMPNO, ENAME, SAL, COMM, DEPTNO)
SELECT
EMP_SRC.EMPNO,
EMP_SRC.ENAME,
EMP_SRC.SAL,
EMP_SRC.COMM,
EMP_SRC.DEPTNO
FROM EMP_SRC
WHERE (EMP_SRC.DEPTNO >40)
The Integration Service generates an INSERT SELECT statement and it filters the
data using a WHERE
clause. The Integration Service does not extract data from the database at this
time.
We can configure pushdown optimization in the following ways:
Using source-side pushdown optimization:
The Integration Service pushes as much transformation logic as possible to the
source database. The
Integration Service analyzes the mapping from the source to the target or until it
reaches a downstream
transformation it cannot push to the source database and executes the corresponding
SELECT statement.
Using target-side pushdown optimization:
The Integration Service pushes as much transformation logic as possible to the
target database. The
Integration Service analyzes the mapping from the target to the source or until it
reaches an upstream
transformation it cannot push to the target database. It generates an INSERT,
DELETE, or UPDATE
statement based on the transformation logic for each transformation it can push to
the database and
executes the DML.
Using full pushdown optimization:
The Integration Service pushes as much transformation logic as possible to both
source and target
databases. If you configure a session for full pushdown optimization, and the
Integration Service cannot
push all the transformation logic to the database, it performs source-side or
target-side pushdown
optimization instead. Also the source and target must be on the same database. The
Integration Service
analyzes the mapping starting with the source and analyzes each transformation in
the pipeline until it
analyzes the target. When it can push all transformation logic to the database, it
generates an INSERT
SELECT statement to run on the database. The statement incorporates transformation
logic from all the
transformations in the mapping. If the Integration Service can push only part of
the transformation logic to
the database, it does not fail the session, it pushes as much transformation logic
to the source and target
database as possible and then processes the remaining transformation logic.
For example, a mapping contains the following transformations:
SourceDefn -> SourceQualifier -> Aggregator -> Rank -> Expression -> TargetDefn
SUM(SAL), SUM(COMM) Group by DEPTNO
RANK PORT on SAL
TOTAL = SAL+COMM
Image: Pushdown Optimization Example 2
The Rank transformation cannot be pushed to the database. If the session is
configured for full pushdown
optimization, the Integration Service pushes the Source Qualifier transformation
and the Aggregator
transformation to the source, processes the Rank transformation, and pushes the
Expression transformation
and target to the target database.
When we use pushdown optimization, the Integration Service converts the expression
in the transformation
or in the workflow link by determining equivalent operators, variables, and
functions in the database. If there
is no equivalent operator, variable, or function, the Integration Service itself
processes the transformation
logic. The Integration Service logs a message in the workflow log and the Pushdown
Optimization Viewer
when it cannot push an expression to the database. Use the message to determine the
reason why it could
not push the expression to the database.
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica - Pushdown Optimization
in Integration Service
Page 3 of 6
How does Integration Service handle Push Down Optimization?
To push transformation logic to a database, the Integration Service might create
temporary objects in the
database. The Integration Service creates a temporary sequence object in the
database to push Sequence
Generator transformation logic to the database. The Integration Service creates
temporary views in the
database while pushing a Source Qualifier transformation or a Lookup transformation
with a SQL override to
the database, an unconnected relational lookup, filtered lookup.
1. To push Sequence Generator transformation logic to a database, we must configure
the session
for pushdown optimization with Sequence.
2. To enable the Integration Service to create the view objects in the database we
must configure the
session forpushdown optimization with View.
2. After the database transaction completes, the Integration Service drops sequence
and view objects
created for pushdown optimization.
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica - Configuring Pushdown
Optimization
Configuring Parameters for Pushdown Optimization
Depending on the database workload, we might want to use source-side, target-side,
or full pushdown
optimization at different times and for that we can use the $$PushdownConfig
mapping parameter. The
settings in the $$PushdownConfig parameter override the pushdown optimization
settings in the session
properties. Create $$PushdownConfig parameter in the Mapping Designer , in session
property for
Pushdown Optimization attribute select $$PushdownConfig and define the parameter in
the parameter file.
The possible values may be,
1. none i.e the integration service itself processes all the transformations,
2. Source [Seq View],
3. Target [Seq View],
4. Full [Seq View]
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica - Using Pushdown
Optimization Viewer
Pushdown Optimization Viewer
Use the Pushdown Optimization Viewer to examine the transformations that can be
pushed to the database.
Select a pushdown option or pushdown group in the Pushdown Optimization Viewer to
view the
corresponding SQL statement that is generated for the specified selections. When we
select a pushdown
option or pushdown group, we do not change the pushdown configuration. To change
the configuration, we
must update the pushdown option in the session properties.
Database that supports Informatica Pushdown Optimization
We can configure sessions for pushdown optimization having any of the databases
like Oracle, IBM DB2,
Teradata, Microsoft SQL Server, Sybase ASE or Databases that use ODBC drivers.
When we use native drivers, the Integration Service generates SQL statements using
native database SQL.
When we use ODBC drivers, the Integration Service generates SQL statements using
ANSI SQL. The
Integration Service can generate more functions when it generates SQL statements
using native language
instead of ANSI SQL.
Pushdown Optimization In Informatica - Pushdown Optimization
Error Handling
Handling Error when Pushdown Optimization is enabled
When the Integration Service pushes transformation logic to the database, it cannot
track errors that occur in
the database.
When the Integration Service runs a session configured for full pushdown
optimization and an error occurs,
the database handles the errors. When the database handles errors, the Integration
Service does not write
reject rows to the reject file.
If we configure a session for full pushdown optimization and the session fails, the
Integration Service cannot
perform incremental recovery because the database processes the transformations.
Instead, the database
rolls back the transactions. If the database server fails, it rolls back
transactions when it restarts. If the
Integration Service fails, the database server rolls back the transaction.
Links
Informatica Tuning - Step by Step Approach
This is the first of the number of articles on the series of Data Warehouse
Application performance tuning
scheduled to come every week. This one is on Informatica performance tuning.
Please note that this article is intended to be a quick guide. A more detail
Informatica performance tuning
guide can be found here: Informatica Performance Tuning Complete Guide
Source Query/ General Query Tuning
1.1 Calculate original query cost
1.2 Can the query be re-written to reduce cost?
- Can IN clause be changed with EXISTS?
- Can a UNION be replaced with UNION ALL if we are not using any DISTINCT cluase in
query?
- Is there a redundant table join that can be avoided?
- Can we include additional WHERE clause to further limit data volume?
- Is there a redundant column used in GROUP BY that can be removed?
- Is there a redundant column selected in the query but not used anywhere in
mapping?
1.3 Check if all the major joining columns are indexed
1.4 Check if all the major filter conditions (WHERE clause) are indexed
- Can a function-based index improve performance further?
1.5 Check if any exclusive query hint reduce query cost
- Check if parallel hint improves performance and reduce cost
1.6 Recalculate query cost
- If query cost is reduced, use the changed query
Tuning Informatica LookUp
1.1 Redundant Lookup transformation
- Is there a lookup which is no longer used in the mapping?
- If there are consecutive lookups, can those be replaced inside a single lookup
override?
1.2 LookUp conditions
- Are all the lookup conditions indexed in database? (Uncached lookup only)
- An unequal condition should always be mentioned after an equal condition
1.3 LookUp override query
- Should follow all guidelines from 1. Source Query part above
1.4 There is no unnecessary column selected in lookup (to reduce cache size)
1.5 Cached/Uncached
- Carefully consider whether the lookup should be cached or uncached
- General Guidelines
- Generally don't use cached lookup if lookup table size is > 300MB
- Generally don't use cached lookup if lookup table row count > 20,000,00
- Generally don't use cached lookup if driving table (source table) row count <
1000
1.6 Persistent Cache
- If found out that a same lookup is cached and used in different mappings,
Consider persistent cache
1.7 Lookup cache building
- Consider "Additional Concurrent Pipeline" in session property to build cache
concurrently
"Prebuild Lookup Cache" should be enabled, only if the lookup is surely called in
the mapping
Tuning Informatica Joiner
3.1 Unless unavoidable, join database tables in database only (homogeneous join)
and don't use joiner
3.2 If Informatica joiner is used, always use Sorter Rows and try to sort it in SQ
Query itself using Order By
(If Sorter
Transformation is used then make sure Sorter has enough cache to perform 1-pass
sort)
3.3 Smaller of two joining tables should be master
Tuning Informatica Aggregator
4.1 When possible, sort the input for aggregator from database end (Order By
Clause)
4.2 If Input is not already sorted, use SORTER. If possible use SQ query to Sort
the records.
Tuning Informatica Filter
5.1 Unless unavoidable, use filteration at source query in source qualifier
5.2 Use filter as much near to source as possible
Tuning Informatica Sequence Generator
6.1 Cache the sequence generator
Setting Correct Informatica Session Level Properties
7.1 Disable "High Precision" if not required (High Precision allows decimal upto 28
decimal points)
7.2 Use "Terse" mode for tracing level
7.3 Enable pipeline partitioning (Thumb Rule: Maximum No. of partitions = No. of
CPU/1.2)
(Also remember increasing partitions will multiply the cache memory requirement
accordingly)
Tuning Informatica Expression
8.1 Use Variable to reduce the redundant calculation
8.2 Remove Default value " ERROR('transformation error')" for Output Column.
8.3 Try to reduce the Code complexity like Nested If etc.
8.4 Try to reduce the Unneccessary Type Conversion in Calculation
Implementing Informatica Partitions
Why use Informatica Pipeline Partition?
Identification and elimination of performance bottlenecks will obviously optimize
session performance. After
tuning all the mapping bottlenecks, we can further optimize session performance by
increasing the number
of pipeline partitions in the session. Adding partitions can improve performance by
utilizing more of the
system hardware while processing the session.
PowerCenter Informatica Pipeline Partition
Different Types of Informatica Partitions
We can define the following partition types: Database partitioning, Hash auto-keys,
Hash user keys, Key
range, Pass-through, Round-robin.
Informatica Pipeline Partitioning Explained
Each mapping contains one or more pipelines. A pipeline consists of a source
qualifier, all the
transformations and the target. When the Integration Service runs the session, it
can achieve higher
performance by partitioning the pipeline and performing the extract,
transformation, and load for each
partition in parallel.
A partition is a pipeline stage that executes in a single reader, transformation,
or writer thread. The number
of partitions in any pipeline stage equals the number of threads in the stage. By
default, the Integration
Service creates one partition in every pipeline stage. If we have the Informatica
Partitioning option, we
can configure multiple partitions for a single pipeline stage.
Setting partition attributes includes partition points, the number of partitions,
and the partition types. In the
session properties we can add or edit partition points. When we change partition
points we can define the
partition type and add or delete partitions(number of partitions).
We can set the following attributes to partition a pipeline:
Partition point: Partition points mark thread boundaries and divide the pipeline
into stages. A stage is a
section of a pipeline between any two partition points. The Integration Service
redistributes rows of data at
partition points. When we add a partition point, we increase the number of pipeline
stages by one.
Increasing the number of partitions or partition points increases the number of
threads. We cannot create
partition points at Source instances or at Sequence Generator transformations.
Number of partitions: A partition is a pipeline stage that executes in a single
thread. If we purchase the
Partitioning option, we can set the number of partitions at any partition point.
When we add partitions, we
increase the number of processing threads, which can improve session performance.
We can define up to
64 partitions at any partition point in a pipeline. When we increase or decrease
the number of partitions at
any partition point, the Workflow Manager increases or decreases the number of
partitions at all partition
points in the pipeline. The number of partitions remains consistent throughout the
pipeline. The Integration
Service runs the partition threads concurrently.
Partition types: The Integration Service creates a default partition type at each
partition point. If we have
the Partitioning option, we can change the partition type. The partition type
controls how the Integration
Service distributes data among partitions at partition points. We can define the
following partition types:
Database partitioning, Hash auto-keys, Hash user keys, Key range, Pass-through,
Round-robin. Database
partitioning: The Integration Service queries the database system for table
partition information. It reads
partitioned data from the corresponding nodes in the database.
Pass-through: The Integration Service processes data without redistributing rows
among partitions. All
rows in a single partition stay in the partition after crossing a pass-through
partition point. Choose passthrough
partitioning when we want to create an additional pipeline stage to improve
performance, but do not
want to change the distribution of data across partitions.
Round-robin: The Integration Service distributes data evenly among all partitions.
Use round-robin
partitioning where we want each partition to process approximately the same numbers
of rows i.e. load
balancing.
Hash auto-keys: The Integration Service uses a hash function to group rows of data
among partitions. The
Integration Service groups the data based on a partition key. The Integration
Service uses all grouped or
sorted ports as a compound partition key. We may need to use hash auto-keys
partitioning at Rank, Sorter,
and unsorted Aggregator transformations.
Hash user keys: The Integration Service uses a hash function to group rows of data
among partitions. We
define the number of ports to generate the partition key.
Key range: The Integration Service distributes rows of data based on a port or set
of ports that we define as
the partition key. For each port, we define a range of values. The Integration
Service uses the key and
ranges to send rows to the appropriate partition. Use key range partitioning when
the sources or targets in
the pipeline are partitioned by key range.
We cannot create a partition key for hash auto-keys, round-robin, or pass-through
partitioning.
Add, delete, or edit partition points on the Partitions view on the Mapping tab of
session properties of a
session in Workflow Manager.
The PowerCenter® Partitioning Option increases the performance of PowerCenter
through parallel data
processing. This option provides a thread-based architecture and automatic data
partitioning that optimizes
parallel processing on multiprocessor and grid-based hardware environments.
Implementing Informatica Persistent Cache
You must have noticed that the "time" Informatica takes to build the lookup cache
can be too much
sometimes depending on the lookup table size/volume. Using Persistent Cache, you
may save lot of your
time. This article describes how to do it.
What is Persistent Cache?
Lookups are cached by default in Informatica. This means that Informatica by
default brings in the entire
data of the lookup table from database server to Informatica Server as a part of
lookup cache building
activity during session run. If the lookup table is too huge, this ought to take
quite some time. Now consider
this scenario - what if you are looking up to the same table different times using
different lookups in different
mappings? Do you want to spend the time of building the lookup cache again and
again for each lookup?
Off course not! Just use persistent cache option!
Yes, Lookup cache can be either non-persistent or persistent. The Integration
Service saves or deletes
lookup cache files after a successful session run based on whether the Lookup cache
is checked as
persistent or not.
Where and when we shall use persistent cache:
Suppose we have a lookup table with same lookup condition and return/output ports
and the lookup table is
used many times in multiple mappings. Let us say a Customer Dimension table is used
in many mappings to
populate the surrogate key in the fact tables based on their source system keys.
Now if we cache the same
Customer Dimension table multiple times in multiple mappings that would definitely
affect the SLA loading
timeline.
There can be some functional reasons also for selecting to use persistent cache.
Please read the
article Advantage and Disadvantage of Persistent Cache Lookup to know how
persistent cache can be used
to ensure data integrity in long running ETL sessions where underlying tables are
also changing.
So the solution is to use Named Persistent Cache.
In the first mapping we will create the Named Persistent Cache file by setting
three properties in the
Properties tab of Lookup transformation.
Lookup cache persistent: To be checked i.e. a Named Persistent Cache will be used.
Cache File Name Prefix: user_defined_cache_file_name i.e. the Named Persistent
cache file name that will
be used in all the other mappings using the same lookup table. Enter the prefix
name only. Do not enter .idx
or .dat
Re-cache from lookup source: To be checked i.e. the Named Persistent Cache file
will be rebuilt or
refreshed with the current data of the lookup table.
Next in all the mappings where we want to use the same already built Named
Persistent Cache we need to
set two properties in the Properties tab of Lookup transformation.
Lookup cache persistent: To be checked i.e. the lookup will be using a Named
Persistent Cache that is
already saved in Cache Directory and if the cache file is not there the session
will not fail it will just create
the cache file instead.
Cache File Name Prefix: user_defined_cache_file_name i.e. the Named Persistent
cache file name that
was defined in the mapping where the persistent cache file was created.
Note:
If there is any Lookup SQL Override then the SQL statement in all the lookups
should match exactly even
also an extra blank space will fail the session that is using the already built
persistent cache file.
So if the incoming source data volume is high, the lookup table’s data volume that
need to be cached is also
high, and the same lookup table is used in many mappings then the best way to
handle the situation is to
use one-time build, already created persistent named cache.
Aggregation with out Informatica Aggregator
Since Informatica process data row by row, it is generally possible to handle data
aggregation operation
even without an Aggregator Transformation. On certain cases, you may get huge
performance gain using
this technique!
General Idea of Aggregation without Aggregator
Transformation
Let us take an example: Suppose we want to find the SUM of SALARY for Each
Department of the
Employee Table. The SQL query for this would be:
SELECT DEPTNO,SUM(SALARY) FROM EMP_SRC GROUP BY DEPTNO;
If we need to implement this in Informatica, it would be very easy as we would
obviously go for an
Aggregator Transformation. By taking the DEPTNO port as GROUP BY and one output
port as
SUM(SALARY the problem can be solved easily.
Now the trick is to use only Expression to achieve the functionality of Aggregator
expression. We would use
the very funda of the expression transformation of holding the value of an
attribute of the previous tuple over
here.
But wait... why would we do this? Aren't we complicating the thing here?
Yes, we are. But as it appears, in many cases, it might have an performance benefit
(especially if the input is
already sorted or when you know input data will not violate the order, like you are
loading daily data and
want to sort it by day). Remember Informatica holds all the rows in Aggregator
cache for aggregation
operation. This needs time and cache space and this also voids the normal row by
row processing in
Informatica. By removing the Aggregator with an Expression, we reduce cache space
requirement and ease
out row by row processing. The mapping below will show how to do this
Image: Aggregation with Expression and Sorter 1
Sorter (SRT_SAL) Ports Tab
Now I am showing a sorter here just illustrate the concept. If you already have
sorted data from the source,
you need not use this thereby increasing the performance benefit.
Expression (EXP_SAL) Ports Tab
Image: Expression Ports Tab Properties
Sorter (SRT_SAL1) Ports Tab
Expression (EXP_SAL2) Ports Tab
Filter (FIL_SAL) Properties Tab
This is how we can implement aggregation without using Informatica aggregator
transformation. Hope you
liked it!
What are the differences between Connected and Unconnected Lookup?
Connected Lookup Unconnected Lookup
Connected lookup participates in dataflow and
receives input directly from the pipeline
Unconnected lookup receives input values from
the result of a LKP: expression in another
transformation
Connected lookup can use both dynamic and
static cache
Unconnected Lookup cache can NOT be dynamic
Connected lookup can return more than one
column value ( output port )
Unconnected Lookup can return only one column
value i.e. output port
Connected lookup caches all lookup columns Unconnected lookup caches only the
lookup
output ports in the lookup conditions and the
return port
Supports user-defined default values (i.e. value
to return when lookup conditions are not
satisfied)
Does not support user defined default values
What is the difference between Router and Filter?
Router Filter
Router transformation divides the incoming
records into multiple groups based on some
condition. Such groups can be mutually inclusive
(Different groups may contain same record)
Filter transformation restricts or blocks the
incoming record set based on one given
condition.
Router transformation itself does not block any
record. If a certain record does not match any of
the routing conditions, the record is routed to
default group
Filter transformation does not have a default
group. If one record does not match filter
condition, the record is blocked
Router acts like CASE.. WHEN statement in SQL
(Or Switch().. Case statement in C)
Filter acts like WHERE condition is SQL.
What can we do to improve the performance of Informatica Aggregator
Transformation?
Aggregator performance improves dramatically if records are sorted before passing
to the aggregator and
"sorted input" option under aggregator properties is checked. The record set should
be sorted on those
columns that are used in Group By operation.
It is often a good idea to sort the record set in database level (why?) e.g. inside
a source qualifier
transformation, unless there is a chance that already sorted records from source
qualifier can again become
unsorted before reaching aggregator
What are the different lookup cache?
Lookups can be cached or uncached (No cache). Cached lookup can be either static or
dynamic. A static
cache is one which does not modify the cache once it is built and it remains same
during the session run.
On the other hand, Adynamic cache is refreshed during the session run by inserting
or updating the
records in cache based on the incoming source data.
A lookup cache can also be divided as persistent or non-persistent based on whether
Informatica retains
the cache even after session run is complete or not respectively
How can we update a record in target table without using Update strategy?
A target table can be updated without using 'Update Strategy'. For this, we need to
define the key in the
target table in Informatica level and then we need to connect the key and the field
we want to update in the
mapping Target. In the session level, we should set the target property as "Update
as Update" and check
the "Update" check-box.
Let's assume we have a target table "Customer" with fields as "Customer ID",
"Customer Name" and
"Customer Address". Suppose we want to update "Customer Address" without an Update
Strategy. Then we
have to define "Customer ID" as primary key in Informatica level and we will have
to connect Customer ID
and Customer Address fields in the mapping. If the session properties are set
correctly as described above,
then the mapping will only update the customer address field for all matching
customer IDs.
Deleting duplicate row using Informatica
Q1. Suppose we have Duplicate records in Source System and we want to load only the
unique records in
the Target System eliminating the duplicate rows. What will be the approach?
Ans.
Let us assume that the source system is a Relational Database . The source table is
having duplicate rows.
Now to eliminate duplicate records, we can check the Distinct option of the Source
Qualifier of the source
table and load the target accordingly.
Source Qualifier Transformation DISTINCT clause
But what if the source is a flat file? How can we remove the duplicates from
flat file source?
To know the answer of this question and similar high frequency Informatica
questions, please continue to,
-----------------------------------------------------------------
50255729-Informatica-Question-Repository.pdf
1. Some Important Question

Warehousing:
1. Degenarated Dim
2. Snowflax Schema.
3. Oracle Stored Procedure ka basics.
4. Junk Dimentions.
5. Tyeps of Facts.
6. Top down and bottom up approack
7. Diff b/w wh inmon def and Kimble defn.
Informatica:
1. Cache, Workflow, Schedulers Transformations realted.
2. Distincd in flat file
3. Performance improvement.
4 Delta Strategy.
5. Variable and Parameters difference and all.
Oracle:
1. analytical fiunction.
2. Memory allocations of cursores...extended cursors.
3, compressed cursor.(Types of Cursor)
2. Which is faster a Delete of Truncate
Ans: Truncate is faster than delete bcoz truncate is a ddl command so it does not
produce any rollback information and the storage
space is released while the delete command is a dml command and it produces
rollback information too and space is not deallocated
using delete command..
3. Type of Normal form of Data Warehouse?
4. What is the difference between $ & $$ in mapping or parameter file? In which
cases they are generally used?
Ans: $ Prefixes are used to denote session Parameter and variables and $$ prefixes
are used to denote mapping parameters and
variables.
5. Degenerated Dimension?
Ans: Degenerated dimension is data that is dimensional in nature but stored in a
fact table, these are some date elements in the
operational system which are neither fact nor strictly dimension attributes. These
are useful for some kind of analysis. These are kept
as attributes in fact table called degenerated dimension.
OR
When a Fact table has dimension value stored it is called degenerated dimension.
6. Junk Dimension?
Ans: A junk dimension is a convenient grouping of flags and indicators.
OR
A "junk" dimension is a collection of random transactional codes, flags and/or text
attributes that are unrelated to
any particular dimension.
OR
A number of very small dimensions might be lumped together to form a single
dimension, a junk dimension - the attributes are not
closely related.
7. Difference b/w informatica7 and 8
Features
Ans: Robust,
Scalable,
Grid based architecture (integration server, node) or 24X7,
Recovery,
Failover,
Resilience
Pushdown optimizer—Not sure
Flat file/ Parameter / Partitioning Enhancement
Auto Cache
It has new advanced transformations: over 20 New
Java Transformations --Allows having java APIs to incorporate in informatica
1
SQL Transformation --Allows Power Center developers to execute SQL statements

midstream in a mapping
More advanced user defined transformations,
Compression,
Encryption
Custom Functions
Dynamic Target Creation
8. What are the components of Informatica? And what is the purpose of each?
Ans: Informatica Designer, Server Manager & Repository Manager. Designer for
Creating Source & Target definitions, Creating
Mapplets and Mappings etc. Server Manager for creating sessions & batches,
Scheduling the sessions & batches, Monitoring the
triggered sessions and batches, giving post and pre session commands, creating
database connections to various instances etc.
Repository Manage for Creating and Adding repositories, Creating & editing folders
within a repository, Establishing users, groups,
privileges & folder permissions, Copy, delete, backup a repository, Viewing the
history of sessions, Viewing the locks on various
objects and removing those locks etc.
9. What is a repository? And how to add it in an informatica client?
Ans: It’s a location where all the mappings and sessions related information is
stored. Basically it’s a database where the metadata
resides. We can add a repository through the Repository manager.
10. Name at least 5 different types of transformations used in mapping design and
state the use of each.
Ans: Source Qualifier – Source Qualifier represents all data queries from the
source, Expression – Expression performs simple
calculations,
Filter – Filter serves as a conditional filter,
Lookup – Lookup looks up values and passes to other objects,
Aggregator - Aggregator performs aggregate calculations.
11. How can a transformation be made reusable?
Ans: In the edit properties of any transformation there is a check box to make it
reusable, by checking that it becomes reusable. You
can even create reusable transformations in Transformation developer.
12. How are the sources and targets definitions imported in informatica designer?
How to create Target definition for flat
files?
Ans: When you are in source analyzer there is a option in main menu to Import the
source from Database, Flat File, Cobol File & XML
file, by selecting any one of them you can import a source definition. When you it
from sources you can select any one of these.
There is no way to import target definition as file in Informatica designer. So
while creating the target definition for a file in the
warehouse designer it is created considering it as a table, and then in the session
properties of that mapping it is specified as file.
13. Explain what is sql override for a source table in a mapping.
Ans: The Source Qualifier provides the SQL Query option to override the default
query. You can enter any SQL statement supported
by your source database. You might enter your own SELECT statement, or have the
database perform aggregate calculations, or call
a stored procedure or stored function to read the data and perform some tasks.
14. What is lookup override?
Ans: This feature is similar to entering a custom query in a Source Qualifier
transformation. When entering a Lookup SQL Override,
you can enter the entire override, or generate and edit the default SQL statement.
The lookup query override can include WHERE clause.
15. What are mapplets? How is it different from a Reusable Transformation?
Ans: A mapplet is a reusable object that represents a set of transformations. It
allows you to reuse transformation logic and can
contain as many transformations as you need. You create mapplets in the Mapplet
Designer.
It’s different than a reusable transformation as it may contain a set of
transformations, while a reusable transformation is a single one.
16. How to use an oracle sequence generator in a mapping?
Ans: We have to write a stored procedure, which can take the sequence name as input
and dynamically generates a nextval from that
sequence. Then in the mapping we can use that stored procedure through a procedure
transformation.
2
17. What is a session and how to create it?

Ans: A session is a set of instructions that tells the Informatica Server how and
when to move data from sources to targets. You create
and maintain sessions in the Server Manager.
18. How to create the source and target database connections in server manager?
Ans: In the main menu of server manager there is menu “Server Configuration”, in
that there is the menu “Database connections”.
From here you can create the Source and Target database connections.
19. Where are the source flat files kept before running the session?
Ans: The source flat files can be kept in some folder on the Informatica server or
any other machine, which is in its domain.
20. What are the oracle DML commands possible through an update strategy?
Ans: dd_insert, dd_update, dd_delete & dd_reject.
21. How to update or delete the rows in a target, which do not have key fields?
Ans: To Update a table that does not have any Keys we can do a SQL Override of the
Target Transformation by specifying the
WHERE conditions explicitly. Delete cannot be done this way. In this case you have
to specifically mention the Key for Target table
definition on the Target transformation in the Warehouse Designer and delete the
row using the Update Strategy transformation.
22. What is option by which we can run all the sessions in a batch simultaneously?
Ans: In the batch edit box there is an option called concurrent. By checking that
all the sessions in that Batch will run concurrently.
23. Informatica settings are available in which file?
Ans: Informatica settings are available in a file pmdesign.ini in Windows folder.
24. How can we join the records from two heterogeneous sources in a mapping?
Ans: By using a joiner.
25. Difference between Connected & Unconnected look-up.
Ans: An unconnected Lookup transformation exists separate from the pipeline in the
mapping. You write an expression using the :LKP
reference qualifier to call the lookup within another transformation. While the
connected lookup forms a part of the whole flow of
mapping.
26. Difference between Lookup Transformation & Unconnected Stored Procedure
Transformation – Which one is faster ?
27. Compare Router Vs Filter & Source Qualifier Vs Joiner.
Ans: A Router transformation has input ports and output ports. Input ports reside
in the input group, and output ports reside in the
output groups. Here you can test data based on one or more group filter conditions.
But in filter you can filter data based on one or more conditions before writing it
to targets.
A source qualifier can join data coming from same source database. While a joiner
is used to combine data from heterogeneous
sources. It can even join data from two tables from same database.
A source qualifier can join more than two sources. But a joiner can join only two
sources.
28. How to Join 2 tables connected to a Source Qualifier w/o having any
relationship defined?
Ans: By writing an sql override.
29. In a mapping there are 2 targets to load header and detail, how to ensure that
header loads first then detail table.
Ans: Constraint Based Loading (if no relationship at oracle level) OR Target Load
Plan (if only 1 source qualifier for both tables) OR
select first the header target table and then the detail table while dragging them
in mapping.
30. A mapping just take 10 seconds to run, it takes a source file and insert into
target, but before that there is a Stored
Procedure transformation which takes around 5 minutes to run and gives output ‘Y’
or ‘N’. If Y then continue feed or else
stop the feed. (Hint: since SP transformation takes more time compared to the
mapping, it shouldn’t run row wise).
Ans: There is an option to run the stored procedure before starting to load the
rows.
3
Data warehousing concepts

1. What is difference between view and materialized view?
Views contains query whenever execute views it has read from base table
Where as M views loading or replicated takes place only once, which gives you
better query performance
Refresh m views 1.on commit and 2. on demand
(Complete, never, fast, force)
2. What is bitmap index why it’s used for DWH?
A bitmap for each key value replaces a list of rowids. Bitmap index more efficient
for data warehousing because low cardinality, low
updates, very efficient for where class
3. What is star schema? And what is snowflake schema?
The center of the star consists of a large fact table and the points of the star
are the dimension tables.
Snowflake schemas normalized dimension tables to eliminate redundancy. That is, the
Dimension data has been grouped into multiple tables instead of one large table.
Star schema contains demoralized dimension tables and fact table, each primary key
values in dimension table associated with foreign
key of fact tables.
Here a fact table contains all business measures (normally numeric data) and
foreign key values, and dimension tables has details
about the subject area.
Snowflake schema basically a normalized dimension tables to reduce redundancy in
the dimension tables
4. Why need staging area database for DWH?
Staging area needs to clean operational data before loading into data warehouse.
Cleaning in the sense your merging data which comes from different source
5. What are the steps to create a database in manually?
Create os service and create init file and start data base no mount stage then give
create data base command.
6. Difference between OLTP and DWH?
OLTP system is basically application orientation (eg, purchase order it is
functionality of an application)
Where as in DWH concern is subject orient (subject in the sense custorer, product,
item, time)
OLTP
· Application Oriented
· Used to run business
· Detailed data
· Current up to date
· Isolated Data
· Repetitive access
· Clerical User
· Performance Sensitive
· Few Records accessed at a time (tens)
· Read/Update Access
· No data redundancy
· Database Size 100MB-100 GB
DWH
· Subject Oriented
· Used to analyze business
· Summarized and refined
· Snapshot data
· Integrated Data
· Ad-hoc access
· Knowledge User
· Performance relaxed
· Large volumes accessed at a time(millions)
· Mostly Read (Batch Update)
· Redundancy present
· Database Size 100 GB - few terabytes
4
7. Why need data warehouse?

A single, complete and consistent store of data obtained from a variety of
different sources made available to end users in a what they
can understand and use in a business context.
A process of transforming data into information and making it available to users in
a timely enough manner to make a difference
Information
Technique for assembling and managing data from various sources for the purpose of
answering business questions. Thus making
decisions that were not previous possible
8. What is difference between data mart and data warehouse?
A data mart designed for a particular line of business, such as sales, marketing,
or finance.
Where as data warehouse is enterprise-wide/organizational
The data flow of data warehouse depending on the approach
9. What is the significance of surrogate key?
Surrogate key used in slowly changing dimension table to track old and new values
and it’s derived from primary key.
10. What is slowly changing dimension. What kind of scd used in your project?
Dimension attribute values may change constantly over the time. (Say for example
customer dimension has customer_id,name, and
address) customer address may change over time.
How will you handle this situation?
There are 3 types, one is we can overwrite the existing record, second one is
create additional new record at the time of change with
the new attribute values.
Third one is create new field to keep new values in the original dimension table.
11. What is difference between primary key and unique key constraints?
Primary key maintains uniqueness and not null values
Where as unique constrains maintain unique values and null values
12. What are the types of index? And is the type of index used in your project?
Bitmap index, B-tree index, Function based index, reverse key and composite index.
We used Bitmap index in our project for better performance.
13. How is your DWH data modeling (Details about star schema)?
14. A table has 3 partitions but I want to update in 3rd partitions how will you
do?
Specify partition name in the update statement. Say for example
Update employee partition (name) a, set a.empno=10 where ename=’Ashok’
15. When you give an update statement how memory flow will happen and how oracles
allocate memory for that?
Oracle first checks in Shared sql area whether same Sql statement is available if
it is there it uses. Otherwise allocate memory in
shared sql area and then create run time memory in Private sql area to create parse
tree and execution plan. Once it completed stored
in the shared sql area wherein previously allocated memory
16. Write a query to find out 5th max salary? In Oracle, DB2, SQL Server
Select (list the columns you want) from (select salary from employee order by
salary)
Where rownum<5
17. When you give an update statement how undo/rollback segment will work/what are
the steps?
Oracle keep old values in undo segment and new values in redo entries. When you say
rollback it replace old values from undo
segment. When you say commit erase the undo segment values and keep new vales in
permanent.
5
Informatica Administration
18. What is DTM? How will you configure it?
DTM transform data received from reader buffer and its moves transformation to
transformation on row by row basis and it uses
transformation caches when necessary.
19. You transfer 100000 rows to target but some rows get discard how will you trace
them? And where its get loaded?
Rejected records are loaded into bad files. It has record indicator and column
indicator.
Record indicator identified by (0-insert,1-update,2-delete,3-reject) and column
indicator identified by (D-valid,O-overflow,N-null,Ttruncated).
Normally data may get rejected in different reason due to transformation logic
20. What are the different uses of a repository manager?
Repository manager used to create repository which contains metadata the
Informatica uses to transform data from source to
target. And also it use to create informatica user’s and folders and copy, backup
and restore the repository
21. How do you take care of security using a repository manager?
Using repository privileges, folder permission and locking.
Repository privileges (Session operator, Use designer, Browse repository, Create
session and batches, Administer repository,
administer server, super user)
Folder permission (owner, groups, users)
Locking (Read, Write, Execute, Fetch, Save)
22. What is a folder?
Folder contains repository objects such as sources, targets, mappings,
transformation which are helps logically organize our data
warehouse.
23. Can you create a folder within designer?
Not possible
24. What are shortcuts? Where it can be used? What are the advantages?
There are 2 shortcuts(Local and global) Local used in local repository and global
used in global repository. The advantage is reuse an
object without creating multiple objects. Say for example a source definition want
to use in 10 mappings in 10 different folder without
creating 10 multiple source you create 10 shotcuts.
25. How do you increase the performance of mappings?
Use single pass read(use one source qualifier instead of multiple SQ for same
table)
Minimize data type conversion (Integer to Decimal again back to Integer)
Optimize transformation(when you use Lookup, aggregator, filter, rank and joiner)
Use caches for lookup
Aggregator use presorted port, increase cache size, minimize input/out port as much
as possible
Use Filter wherever possible to avoid unnecessary data flow
26. Explain Informatica Architecture?
Informatica consist of client and server. Client tools such as Repository manager,
Designer, Server manager. Repository data
base contains metadata it read by informatica server used read data from source,
transforming and loading into target.
27. How will you do sessions partitions?
It’s not available in power part 4.7
Transformation
6
28. What are the constants used in update strategy?

DD_INSERT, DD_UPDATE, DD_DELETE, DD_REJECT
29.What is difference between connected and unconnected lookup transformation?
Connected lookup return multiple values to other transformation
Where as unconnected lookup return one values
If lookup condition matches Connected lookup return user defined default values
Where as unconnected lookup return null values
Connected supports dynamic caches where as unconnected supports static
30. What you will do in session level for update strategy transformation?
In session property sheet set Treat rows as “Data Driven”
31. What are the port available for update strategy , sequence generator, Lookup,
stored procedure transformation?
Transformations Port
Update strategy Input, Output
Sequence Generator Output only
Lookup Input, Output, Lookup, Return
Stored Procedure Input, Output
32. Why did you used connected stored procedure why don’t use unconnected stored
procedure?
33. What is active and passive transformations?
Active transformation change the no. of records when passing to targe(example
filter)
where as passive transformation will not change the transformation(example
expression)
34. What are the tracing level?
Normal – It contains only session initialization details and transformation details
no. records rejected, applied
Terse - Only initialization details will be there
Verbose Initialization – Normal setting information plus detailed information about
the transformation.
Verbose data – Verbose init. Settings and all information about the session
35. How will you make records in groups?
Using group by port in aggregator
36. Need to store value like 145 into target when you use aggregator, how will you
do that?
Use Round() function
37. How will you move mappings from development to production database?
Copy all the mapping from development repository and paste production repository
while paste it will promt whether you want
replace/rename. If say replace informatica replace all the source tables with
repository database.
38. What is difference between aggregator and expression?
Aggregator is active transformation and expression is passive transformation
Aggregator transformation used to perform aggregate calculation on group of records
really
Where as expression used perform calculation with single record
39. Can you use mapping without source qualifier?
Not possible, If source RDBMS/DBMS/Flat file use SQ or use normalizer if the source
cobol feed
40. When do you use a normalizer?
Normalized can be used in Relational to denormilize data.
41. What are stored procedure transformations. Purpose of sp transformation. How
did you go about using your project?
7
Connected and unconnected stored procudure.

Unconnected stored procedure used for data base level activities such as pre and
post load
Connected stored procedure used in informatica level for example passing one
parameter as input and capturing return value from
the stored procedure.
Normal - row wise check
Pre-Load Source - (Capture source incremental data for incremental aggregation)
Post-Load Source - (Delete Temporary tables)
Pre-Load Target - (Check disk space available)
Post-Load Target – (Drop and recreate index)
42. What is lookup and difference between types of lookup? What exactly happens
when a lookup is cached? How does a
dynamic lookup cache work?
Lookup transformation used for check values in the source and target tables(primary
key values).
There are 2 type connected and unconnected transformation
Connected lookup returns multiple values if condition true
Where as unconnected return a single values through return port.
Connected lookup return default user value if the condition does not mach
Where as unconnected return null values
Lookup cache does:
Read the source/target table and stored in the lookup cache
43.What is a joiner transformation?
Used for heterogeneous sources (A relational source and a flat file)
Type of joins:
Assume 2 tables has values (Master - 1, 2, 3 and Detail - 1, 3, 4)
Normal (If the condition mach both master and detail tables then the records will
be displaced. Result set 1, 3)
Master Outer (It takes all the rows from detail table and maching rows from master
table. Result set 1, 3, 4)
Detail Outer (It takes all the values from master source and maching values from
detail table. Result set 1, 2, 3)
Full Outer (It takes all values from both tables)
44. What is aggregator transformation how will you use in your project?
Used perform aggregate calculation on group of records and we can use conditional
clause to filter data
45. Can you use one mapping to populate two tables in different schemas?
Yes we can use
46. Explain lookup cache, various caches?
key values).
Various Caches:
Persistent cache (we can save the lookup cache files and reuse them the next time
process the lookup transformation)
Re-cache from database (If the persistent cache not synchronized with lookup table
you can configure the lookup transformation
to rebuild the lookup cache)
Static cache (When the lookup condition is true, Informatica server return a value
from lookup cache and it’s does not update the
cache while it processes the lookup transformation)
Dynamic cache (Informatica server dynamically inserts new rows or update existing
rows in the cache and the target. Suppose if
we want lookup a target table we can use dynamic cache)
Shared cache (we can share lookup transformation between multiple transformations
in a mapping. 2 lookup in a mapping can
share single lookup cache)
47.Which path will the cache be created?
User specified directory. If we say c:\ all the cache files created in this
directory.
48.Where do you specify all the parameters for lookup caches?
Lookup property sheet/tab.
8
49. How do you remove the cache files after the transformation?
After session complete, DTM remove cache memory and deletes caches files.
In case using persistent cache and Incremental aggregation then caches files will
be saved.
50. What is the use of aggregator transformation?
To perform Aggregate calculation
Use conditional clause to filter data in the expression Sum(commission, Commission
>2000)
Use non-aggregate function iif (max (quantity) > 0, Max (quantitiy), 0))
51. What are the contents of index and cache files?
Index caches files hold unique group values as determined by group by port in the
transformation.
Data caches files hold row data until it performs necessary calculation.
52. How do you call a store procedure within a transformation?
In the expression transformation create new out port in the expression write
:sp.stored procedure name(arguments)
53. Is there any performance issue in connected & unconnected lookup? If yes, How?
Yes
Unconnected lookup much more faster than connected lookup why because in
unconnected not connected to any other
transformation we are calling it from other transformation so it minimize lookup
cache value
Where as connected transformation connected to other transformation so it keeps
values in the lookup cache.
54. What is dynamic lookup?
When we use target lookup table, Informatica server dynamically insert new values
or it updates if the values exist and passes to
target table.
55. How Informatica read data if source have one relational and flat file?
Use joiner transformation after source qualifier before other transformation.
56. How you will load unique record into target flat file from source flat files
has duplicate data?
There are 2 we can do this either we can use Rank transformation or oracle external
table
In rank transformation using group by port (Group the records) and then set no. of
rank 1. Rank transformation return one value from
the group. That the values will be a unique one.
57.Can you use flat file for repository?
No, We cant
58. Can you use flat file for lookup table?
No, We cant
59. Without Source Qualifier and joiner how will you join tables?
In session level we have option user defined join. Where we can write join
condition.
60 .Update strategy set DD_Update but in session level have insert. What will
happen?
Insert take place. Because this option override the mapping level option
Sessions and batches
61. What are the commit intervals?
Source based commit
9
(Based on the no. of active source records (Source qualifier) reads Commit interval
set 10000 rows and source qualifier reads 10000
but due to transformation logic 3000 rows get rejected when 7000 reach target
commit will fire, so writer buffer does not rows held the
buffer)
Target based commit (Based on the rows in the buffer and commit interval. Target
based commit set 10000 but writer buffer fills
every 7500, next time buffer fills 15000 now commit statement will fire then 22500
like go on.)
62. When we use router transformation?
When we want perform multiple conditions to filter out data then we go for router.
(Say for example source records 50 filter
condition mach 10 records remaining 40 records get filter out but still we want
perform few more filter condition to filter remaining 40
records.)
63. How did you schedule sessions in your project?
Run once (set 2 parameter date and time when session should start)
Run Every (Informatica server run session at regular interval as we configured,
parameter Days, hour, minutes, end on, end after,
forever)
Customized repeat (Repeat every 2 days, daily frequency hr, min, every week, every
month)
Run only on demand (Manually run) this not session scheduling.
64. How do you use the pre-sessions and post-sessions in sessions wizard, what for
they used?
Post-session used for email option when the session success/failure send email. For
that we should configure
Step1. Should have a informatica startup account and create outlook profile for
that user
Step2. Configure Microsoft exchange server in mail box applet(control panel)
Step3. Configure informatica server miscellaneous tab have one option called MS
exchange profile where we have specify the
outlook profile name.
Pre-session used for even scheduling (Say for example we don’t know whether source
file available or not in particular directory.
For that we write one DOS command to move file directory to destination and set
event based scheduling option in session property
sheet Indicator file wait for).
65. What are different types of batches. What are the advantages and dis-advantages
of a concurrent batch?
Sequential(Run the sessions one by one)
Concurrent (Run the sessions simultaneously)
Advantage of concurrent batch:
It’s takes informatica server resource and reduce time it takes run session
separately.
Use this feature when we have multiple sources that process large amount of data in
one session. Split sessions and put into one
concurrent batches to complete quickly.
Disadvantage
Require more shared memory otherwise session may get failed
66. How do you handle a session if some of the records fail. How do you stop the
session in case of errors. Can it be
achieved in mapping level or session level?
It can be achieved in session level only. In session property sheet, log files tab
one option is the error handling Stop on ------ errors.
Based on the error we set informatica server stop the session.
67. How you do improve the performance of session.
If we use Aggregator transformation use sorted port, Increase aggregate cache size,
Use filter before aggregation so that it
minimize unnecessary aggregation.
Lookup transformation use lookup caches
Increase DTM shared memory allocation
Eliminating transformation errors using lower tracing level(Say for example a
mapping has 50 transformation when transformation
error occur informatica server has to write in session log file it affect session
performance)
10
68. Explain incremental aggregation. Will that increase the performance? How?
Incremental aggregation capture whatever changes made in source used for aggregate
calculation in a session, rather than
processing the entire source and recalculating the same calculation each time
session run. Therefore it improve session performance.
Only use incremental aggregation following situation:
Mapping have aggregate calculation
Source table changes incrementally
Filtering source incremental data by time stamp
Before Aggregation have to do following steps:
Use filter transformation to remove pre-existing records
Reinitialize aggregate cache when source table completely changes for example
incremental changes happing daily and complete
changes happenings monthly once. So when the source table completely change we have
reinitialize the aggregate cache and
truncate target table use new source table. Choose Reinitialize cache in the
aggregation behavior in transformation tab
69. Concurrent batches have 3 sessions and set each session run if previous
complete but 2nd fail then what will happen the
batch?
Batch will fail
General Project
70. How many mapping, dimension tables, Fact tables and any complex mapping you
did? And what is your database size,
how frequently loading to DWH?
I did 22 Mapping, 4 dimension table and one fact table. One complex mapping I did
for slowly changing dimension table. Database
size is 9GB. Loading data every day
71. What are the different transformations used in your project?
Aggregator, Expression, Filter, Sequence generator, Update Strategy, Lookup, Stored
Procedure, Joiner, Rank, Source Qualifier.
72. How did you populate the dimensions tables?
73. What are the sources you worked on?
Oracle
74. How many mappings have you developed on your whole dwh project?
45 mappings
75. What is OS used your project?
Windows NT
76. Explain your project (Fact table, dimensions, and database size)
Fact table contains all business measures (numeric values) and foreign key values,
Dimension table contains details about subject
area like customer, product
77.What is difference between Informatica power mart and power center?
Using power center we can create global repository
Power mart used to create local repository
Global repository configure multiple server to balance session load
Local repository configure only single server
78. Have you done any complex mapping?
Developed one mapping to handle slowly changing dimension table.
79. Explain details about DTM?
11
Once we session start, load manager start DTM and it allocate session shared memory
and contains reader and writer. Reader will
read source data from source qualifier using SQL statement and move data to DTM
then DTM transform data to transformation to
transformation and row by row basis finally move data to writer then writer write
data into target using SQL statement.
I-Flex Interview (14 th May 2003)
80. What are the key you used other than primary key and foreign key?
Used surrogate key to maintain uniqueness to overcome duplicate value in the
primary key.
81. Data flow of your Data warehouse (Architecture)
DWH is a basic architecture (OLTP to Data warehouse from DWH OLAP analytical and
report building.
82. Difference between Power part and power center?
83. What are the batches and it’s details?
Sequential (Run the sessions one by one)
separately.
one session. Split sessions and put into one
concurrent batches to complete quickly.
Disadvantage
84. What is external table in oracle. How oracle read the flat file.
Used for read flat file. Oracle internally write SQL loader script with control
file.
85. What are the index you used? Bitmap join index?
Bitmap index used in data warehouse environment to increase query response time,
since DWH has low cardinality, low updates, very
efficient for where clause.
Bitmap join index used to join dimension and fact table instead reading 2 different
index.
86. What are the partitions in 8i/9i? Where you will use hash partition?
In oracle8i there are 3 partition (Range, Hash, Composite)
In Oracle9i List partition is additional one
Range (Used for Dates values for example in DWH ( Date values are Quarter 1,
Quarter 2, Quarter 3, Quater4)
Hash (Used for unpredictable values say for example we cant able predict which
value to allocate which partition then we go for hash
partition. If we set partition 5 for a column oracle allocate values into 5
partition accordingly).
List (Used for literal values say for example a country have 24 states create 24
partition for 24 states each)
Composite (Combination of range and hash)
91. What is main difference mapplets and mapping?
Reuse the transformation in several mappings, where as mapping not like that.
If any changes made in mapplets it automatically inherited in all other instance
mapplets.
12
92. What is difference between the source qualifier filter and filter
transformation?
Source qualifier filter only used for relation source where as Filter used any kind
of source.
Source qualifier filter data while reading where as filter before loading into
target.
93. What is the maximum no. of return value when we use unconnected transformation?
Only one.
94. What are the environments in which informatica server can run on?
Informatica client runs on Windows 95 / 98 / NT, Unix Solaris, Unix AIX(IBM)
Informatica Server runs on Windows NT / Unix
Minimum Hardware requirements
Informatica Client Hard disk 40MB, RAM 64MB
Informatica Server Hard Disk 60MB, RAM 64MB
95. Can unconnected lookup do everything a connected lookup transformation can do?
No, We cant call connected lookup in other transformation. Rest of things it’s
possible
96. In 5.x can we copy part of mapping and paste it in other mapping?
I think its possible
97. What option do you select for a sessions in batch, so that the sessions run one
after the other?
We have select an option called “Run if previous completed”
98. How do you really know that paging to disk is happening while you are using a
lookup transformation? Assume you
have access to server?
We have collect performance data first then see the counters parameter
lookup_readtodisk if it’s greater than 0 then it’s read from disk
Step1. Choose the option “Collect Performance data” in the general tab session
property
sheet.
Step2. Monitor server then click server-request  session performance details
Step3. Locate the performance details file named called session_name.perf file in
the session
log file directory
Step4. Find out counter parameter lookup_readtodisk if it’s greater than 0 then
informatica
read lookup table values from the disk. Find out how many rows in the cache see
Lookup_rowsincache
99. List three option available in informatica to tune aggregator transformation?
Use Sorted Input to sort data before aggregation
Use Filter transformation before aggregator
Increase Aggregator cache size
100. Assume there is text file as source having a binary field to, to source
qualifier What native data type informatica will
convert this binary field to in source qualifier?
Binary data type for relational source for flat file ?
101.Variable v1 has values set as 5 in designer(default), 10 in parameter file, 15
in
repository. While running session which value informatica will read?
Informatica read value 15 from repository
102. Joiner transformation is joining two tables s1 and s2. s1 has 10,000 rows and
s2 has 1000 rows . Which table you will set
master for better performance of joiner
transformation? Why?
13
Set table S2 as Master table because informatica server has to keep master table in
the cache so if it is 1000 in cache will get
performance instead of having 10000 rows in cache
103. Source table has 5 rows. Rank in rank transformation is set to 10. How many
rows the rank transformation will output?
5 Rank
104. How to capture performance statistics of individual transformation in the
mapping and explain some important statistics
that can be captured?
Use tracing level Verbose data
105. Give a way in which you can implement a real time scenario where data in a
table is changing and you need to look up
data from it. How will you configure the lookup transformation for this purpose?
In slowly changing dimension table use type 2 and model 1
106. What is DTM process? How many threads it creates to process data, explain each
thread in brief?
DTM receive data from reader and move data to transformation to transformation on
row by row basis. It’s create 2 thread one is
reader and another one is writer
107. Suppose session is configured with commit interval of 10,000 rows and source
has 50,000 rows explain the commit
points for source based commit & target based commit. Assume appropriate value
wherever required?
Target Based commit (First time Buffer size full 7500 next time 15000)
Commit Every 15000, 22500, 30000, 40000, 50000
Source Based commit (Does not affect rows held in buffer)
Commit Every 10000, 20000, 30000, 40000, 50000
108.What does first column of bad file (rejected rows) indicates?
First Column - Row indicator (0, 1, 2, 3)
Second Column – Column Indicator (D, O, N, T)
109. What is the formula for calculation rank data caches? And also Aggregator,
data, index caches?
Index cache size = Total no. of rows * size of the column in the lookup condition
(50 * 4)
Aggregator/Rank transformation Data Cache size = (Total no. of rows * size of the
column in the lookup condition) + (Total no. of rows
* size of the connected output ports)
110. Can unconnected lookup return more than 1 value? No
INFORMATICA TRANSFORMATIONS
· Aggregator
· Expression
· External Procedure
· Advanced External Procedure
· Filter
· Joiner
· Lookup
· Normalizer
· Rank
· Router
· Sequence Generator
· Stored Procedure
· Source Qualifier
· Update Strategy
· XML source qualifier
14
Expression Transformation
- You can use ET to calculate values in a single row before you write to the target
- You can use ET, to perform any non-aggregate calculation
- To perform calculations involving multiple rows, such as sums of averages, use
the Aggregator. Unlike ET the Aggregator
Transformation allow you to group and sort data
Calculation
To use the Expression Transformation to calculate values for a single row, you must
include the following ports.
- Input port for each value used in the calculation
- Output port for the expression
NOTE
You can enter multiple expressions in a single ET. As long as you enter only one
expression for each port, you can create any number of
output ports in the Expression Transformation. In this way, you can use one
expression transformation rather than creating separate
transformations for each calculation that requires the same set of data.
Sequence Generator Transformation
- Create keys
- Replace missing values
- This contains two output ports that you can connect to one or more
transformations. The server generates a value each time
a row enters a connected transformation, even if that value is not used.
- There are two parameters NEXTVAL, CURRVAL
- The SGT can be reusable
- You can not edit any default ports (NEXTVAL, CURRVAL)
SGT Properties
- Start value
- Increment By
- End value
- Current value
- Cycle (If selected, server cycles through sequence range. Otherwise,
Stops with configured end value)
- Reset
- No of cached values
NOTE
- Reset is disabled for Reusable SGT
- Unlike other transformations, you cannot override SGT properties at session
level. This protects the integrity of sequence
values generated.
Aggregator Transformation
Difference between Aggregator and Expression Transformation
We can use Aggregator to perform calculations on groups. Where as the Expression
transformation permits you to calculations on
row-by-row basis only.
The server performs aggregate calculations as it reads and stores necessary data
group and row data in an aggregator cache.
When Incremental aggregation occurs, the server passes new source data through the
mapping and uses historical cache data to perform
new calculation incrementally.
Components
- Aggregate Expression
- Group by port
- Aggregate cache
When a session is being run using aggregator transformation, the server creates
Index and data caches in memory to process the
transformation. If the server requires more space, it stores overflow values in
cache files.
NOTE
The performance of aggregator transformation can be improved by using “Sorted Input
option”. When this is selected, the server assumes
all data is sorted by group.
15
Incremental Aggregation
- Using this, you apply captured changes in the source to aggregate calculation in
a session. If the source changes only
incrementally and you can capture changes, you can configure the session to process
only those changes
- This allows the sever to update the target incrementally, rather than forcing it
to process the entire source and recalculate the
same calculations each time you run the session.
Steps:
- The first time you run a session with incremental aggregation enabled, the server
process the entire source.
- At the end of the session, the server stores aggregate data from that session ran
in two files, the index file and data file. The
server creates the file in local directory.
- The second time you run the session, use only changes in the source as source
data for the session. The server then
performs the following actions:
(1) For each input record, the session checks the historical information in the
index file for a corresponding group, then:
If it finds a corresponding group –
The server performs the aggregate operation incrementally, using the aggregate data
for that group, and saves
the incremental changes.
Else
Server create a new group and saves the record data
(2) When writing to the target, the server applies the changes to the existing
target.
o Updates modified aggregate groups in the target
o Inserts new aggregate data
o Delete removed aggregate data
o Ignores unchanged aggregate data
o Saves modified aggregate data in Index/Data files to be used as historical data
the next time you run the session.
Each Subsequent time you run the session with incremental aggregation, you use only
the incremental source changes in the session.
If the source changes significantly, and you want the server to continue saving the
aggregate data for the future incremental changes,
configure the server to overwrite existing aggregate data with new aggregate data.
Use Incremental Aggregator Transformation Only IF:
- Mapping includes an aggregate function
- Source changes only incrementally
- You can capture incremental changes. You might do this by filtering source data
by timestamp.
External Procedure Transformation
- When Informatica’s transformation does not provide the exact functionality we
need, we can develop complex functions with
in a dynamic link library or Unix shared library.
- To obtain this kind of extensibility, we can use Transformation Exchange (TX)
dynamic invocation interface built into Power
mart/Power Center.
- Using TX, you can create an External Procedure Transformation and bind it to an
External Procedure that you have
developed.
- Two types of External Procedures are available
COM External Procedure (Only for WIN NT/2000)
Informatica External Procedure ( available for WINNT, Solaris, HPUX etc)
Components of TX:
(a) External Procedure
This exists separately from Informatica Server. It consists of C++, VB code written
by developer. The code is compiled and linked
to a DLL or Shared memory, which is loaded by the Informatica Server at runtime.
(b) External Procedure Transformation
This is created in Designer and it is an object that resides in the Informatica
Repository. This serves in many ways
o This contains metadata describing External procedure
16
o This allows an External procedure to be references in a mappingby adding an

instance of an External Procedure
transformation.
All External Procedure Transformations must be defined as reusable transformations.
Therefore you cannot create External Procedure transformation in designer. You can
create only with in the transformation developer
of designer and add instances of the transformation to mapping.
Difference Between Advanced External Procedure And External Procedure
Transformation
Advanced External Procedure Transformation
- The Input and Output functions occur separately
- The output function is a separate callback function provided by Informatica that
can be called from Advanced External
Procedure Library.
- The Output callback function is used to pass all the output port values from the
Advanced External Procedure library to the
informatica Server.
- Multiple Outputs (Multiple row Input and Multiple rows output)
- Supports Informatica procedure only
- Active Transformation
- Connected only
- In the External Procedure Transformation, an External Procedure function does
both input and output, and it’s parameters
consists of all the ports of the transformation.
- Single return value ( One row input and one row output )
- Supports COM and Informatica Procedures
- Passive transformation
- Connected or Unconnected
By Default, The Advanced External Procedure Transformation is an active
transformation. However, we can configure this to be a
passive by clearing “IS ACTIVE” option on the properties tab
LOOKUP Transformation
- We are using this for lookup data in a related table, view or synonym
- You can use multiple lookup transformations in a mapping
- The server queries the Lookup table based in the Lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares lookup port values to
lookup table column values, bases on lookup condition.
Types:
(a) Connected (or) unconnected.
(b) Cached (or) uncached .
If you cache the lkp table , you can choose to use a dynamic or static cache . by
default ,the LKP cache remains static and
doesn’t change during the session .with dynamic cache ,the server inserts rows into
the cache during the session ,information
recommends that you cache the target table as Lookup .this enables you to lookup
values in the target and insert them if they don’t exist..
You can configure a connected LKP to receive input directly from the mapping
pipeline .(or) you can configure an unconnected
LKP to receive input from the result of an expression in another transformation.
Differences Between Connected and Unconnected Lookup:
connected
o Receives input values directly from the pipeline.
o uses Dynamic or static cache
o Returns multiple values
o supports user defined default values.
Unconnected
o Recieves input values from the result of LKP expression in another transformation
17
o Use static cache only.

o Returns only one value.
o Doesn’t supports user-defined default values.
NOTES
o Common use of unconnected LKP is to update slowly changing dimension tables.
o Lookup components are
(a) Lookup table. B) Ports c) Properties d) condition.
Lookup tables: This can be a single table, or you can join multiple tables in the
same Database using a Lookup query override.You can
improve Lookup initialization time by adding an index to the Lookup table.
Lookup ports: There are 3 ports in connected LKP transformation (I/P,O/P,LKP) and 4
ports unconnected LKP(I/P,O/P,LKP and return
ports).
o if you’ve certain that a mapping doesn’t use a Lookup ,port ,you delete it from
the transformation. This reduces the
amount of memory.
Lookup Properties: you can configure properties such as SQL override .for the
Lookup,the Lookup table name ,and tracing level for the
transformation.
Lookup condition: you can enter the conditions ,you want the server to use to
determine whether input data qualifies values in the Lookup
or cache .
when you configure a LKP condition for the transformation, you compare
transformation input values with values in the Lookup
table or cache ,which represented by LKP ports .when you run session ,the server
queries the LKP table or cache for all incoming values
based on the condition.
NOTE
- If you configure a LKP to use static cache ,you can following operators
=,>,<,>=,<=,!=.
but if you use an dynamic cache only =can be used .
- when you don’t configure the LKP for caching ,the server queries the LKP table
for each input row .the result will be same,
regardless of using cache
However using a Lookup cache can increase session performance, by Lookup table,
when the source table is large.
Performance tips:
- Add an index to the columns used in a Lookup condition.
- Place conditions with an equality opertor (=) first.
- Cache small Lookup tables .
- Don’t use an ORDER BY clause in SQL override.
- Call unconnected Lookups with :LKP reference qualifier.
Normalizer Transformation
Normalization is the process of organizing data.
In database terms ,this includes creating normalized tables and establishing
relationships between those tables. According to rules
designed to both protect the data, and make the database more flexible by
eliminating redundancy and inconsistent dependencies.
NT normalizes records from COBOL and relational sources ,allowing you to organizet
the data according to you own needs.
A NT can appear anywhere is a data flow when you normalize a relational source.
Use a normalizer transformation, instead of source qualifier transformation when
you normalize a COBOL source.
The occurs statement is a COBOL file nests multiple records of information in a
single record.
Using the NT ,you breakout repeated data with in a record is to separate record
into separate records.For each new record it creates, the
NT generates an unique identifier. You can use this key value to join the
normalized records.
18
Stored Procedure Transformation

- DBA creates stored procedures to automate time consuming tasks that are too
complicated for standard SQL statements.
- A stored procedure is a precompiled collection of transact SQL statements and
optional flow control statements, similar to an
executable script.
- Stored procedures are stored and run with in the database. You can run a stored
procedure with EXECUTE SQL statement in
a database client tool, just as SQL statements. But unlike standard procedures
allow user defined variables, conditional
statements and programming features.
Usages of Stored Procedure
- Drop and recreate indexes.
- Check the status of target database before moving records into it.
- Determine database space.
- Perform a specialized calculation.
NOTE
- The Stored Procedure must exist in the database before creating a Stored
Procedure Transformation, and the Stored
procedure can exist in a source, target or any database with a valid connection to
the server.
TYPES
- Connected Stored Procedure Transformation (Connected directly to the mapping)
- Unconnected Stored Procedure Transformation (Not connected directly to the flow
of the mapping. Can be called from an
Expression Transformation or other transformations)
Running a Stored Procedure
The options for running a Stored Procedure Transformation:
- Normal , Pre load of the source, Post load of the source, Pre load of the target,
Post load of the target
You can run several stored procedure transformation in different modes in the same
mapping.
Stored Procedure Transformations are created as normal type by default, which means
that they run during the mapping, not before or
after the session. They are also not created as reusable transformations.
If you want to: Use below mode
Run a SP before/after the session Unconnected
Run a SP once during a session Unconnected
Run a SP for each row in data flow Unconnected/Connected
Pass parameters to SP and receive a single return value Connected
A normal connected SP will have an I/P and O/P port and return port also an output
port, which is marked as ‘R’.
Error Handling
- This can be configured in server manager (Log & Error handling)
- By default, the server stops the session
19
Rank Transformation
- This allows you to select only the top or bottom rank of data. You can get
returned the largest or smallest numeric value in a
port or group.
- You can also use Rank Transformation to return the strings at the top or the
bottom of a session sort order. During the
session, the server caches input data until it can perform the rank calculations.
- Rank Transformation differs from MAX and MIN functions, where they allows to
select a group of top/bottom values, not just
one value.
- As an active transformation, Rank transformation might change the number of rows
passed through it.
Rank Transformation Properties
- Cache directory
- Top or Bottom rank
- Input/Output ports that contain values used to determine the rank.
Different ports in Rank Transformation
I - Input
O - Output
V - Variable
R - Rank
Rank Index
The designer automatically creates a RANKINDEX port for each rank transformation.
The server uses this Index port to store the
ranking position for each row in a group.
The RANKINDEX is an output port only. You can pass the RANKINDEX to another
transformation in the mapping or directly to a
target.
20
Filter Transformation
- As an active transformation, the Filter Transformation may change the no of rows
passed through it.
- A filter condition returns TRUE/FALSE for each row that passes through the
transformation, depending on whether a row
meets the specified condition.
- Only rows that return TRUE pass through this filter and discarded rows do not
appear in the session log/reject files.
- To maximize the session performance, include the Filter Transformation as close
to the source in the mapping as possible.
- The filter transformation does not allow setting output default values.
- To filter out row with NULL values, use the ISNULL and IS_SPACES functions.
Joiner Transformation
Source Qualifier: can join data origination from a common source database
Joiner Transformation: Join tow related heterogeneous sources residing in different
locations or File systems.
To join more than two sources, we can add additional joiner transformations.
SESSION LOGS
Information that reside in a session log:
- Allocation of system shared memory
- Execution of Pre-session commands/ Post-session commands
- Session Initialization
- Creation of SQL commands for reader/writer threads
- Start/End timings for target loading
- Error encountered during session
- Load summary of Reader/Writer/ DTM statistics
Other Information
- By default, the server generates log files based on the server code page.
Thread Identifier
Ex: CMN_1039
Reader and Writer thread codes have 3 digit and Transformation codes have 4 digits.
The number following a thread name indicate the following:
(a) Target load order group number
(b) Source pipeline number
(c) Partition number
(d) Aggregate/ Rank boundary number
Log File Codes
Error Codes Description
BR - Related to reader process, including ERP, relational and flat file.
CMN - Related to database, memory allocation
DBGR - Related to debugger
EP- External Procedure
LM - Load Manager
TM - DTM
REP - Repository
WRT - Writer
Load Summary
21
(a) Inserted
(b) Updated
(c) Deleted
(d) Rejected
Statistics details
(a) Requested rows shows the no of rows the writer actually received for the
specified operation
(b) Applied rows shows the number of rows the writer successfully applied to the
target (Without Error)
(c) Rejected rows show the no of rows the writer could not apply to the target
(d) Affected rows shows the no of rows affected by the specified operation
Detailed transformation statistics
The server reports the following details for each transformation in the mapping
(a) Name of Transformation
(b) No of I/P rows and name of the Input source
(c) No of O/P rows and name of the output target
(d) No of rows dropped
Tracing Levels
Normal - Initialization and status information, Errors encountered, Transformation
errors, rows skipped, summarize
session details (Not at the level of individual rows)
Terse - Initialization information as well as error messages, and notification of
rejected data
Verbose Init - Addition to normal tracing, Names of Index, Data files used and
detailed transformation statistics.
Verbose Data - Addition to Verbose Init, Each row that passes in to mapping
detailed transformation statistics.
NOTE
When you enter tracing level in the session property sheet, you override tracing
levels configured for transformations in the mapping.
22
MULTIPLE SERVERS
With Power Center, we can register and run multiple servers against a local or
global repository. Hence you can distribute the repository
session load across available servers to improve overall performance. (You can use
only one Power Mart server in a local repository)
Issues in Server Organization
- Moving target database into the appropriate server machine may improve efficiency
- All Sessions/Batches using data from other sessions/batches need to use the same
server and be incorporated into the same
batch.
- Server with different speed/sizes can be used for handling most complicated
sessions.
Session/Batch Behavior
- By default, every session/batch run on its associated Informatica server. That is
selected in property sheet.
- In batches, that contain sessions with various servers, the property goes to the
servers, that’s of outer most batch.
Session Failures and Recovering Sessions
Two types of errors occurs in the server
- Non-Fatal
- Fatal
(a) Non-Fatal Errors
It is an error that does not force the session to stop on its first occurrence.
Establish the error threshold in the session property
sheet with the stop on option. When you enable this option, the server counts Non-
Fatal errors that occur in the reader, writer and
transformations.
Reader errors can include alignment errors while running a session in Unicode mode.
Writer errors can include key constraint violations, loading NULL into the NOT-NULL
field and database errors.
Transformation errors can include conversion errors and any condition set up as an
ERROR,. Such as NULL Input.
(b) Fatal Errors
This occurs when the server can not access the source, target or repository. This
can include loss of connection or target
database errors, such as lack of database space to load data.
If the session uses normalizer (or) sequence generator transformations, the server
can not update the sequence values in the
repository, and a fatal error occurs.
© Others
Usages of ABORT function in mapping logic, to abort a session when the server
encounters a transformation error.
Stopping the server using pmcmd (or) Server Manager
Performing Recovery
- When the server starts a recovery session, it reads the OPB_SRVR_RECOVERY table
and notes the rowid of the last row
commited to the target database. The server then reads all sources again and starts
processing from the next rowid.
- By default, perform recovery is disabled in setup. Hence it won’t make entries in
OPB_SRVR_RECOVERY table.
- The recovery session moves through the states of normal session schedule, waiting
to run, Initializing, running, completed
and failed. If the initial recovery fails, you can run recovery as many times.
- The normal reject loading process can also be done in session recovery process.
- The performance of recovery might be low, if
o Mapping contain mapping variables
o Commit interval is high
Un recoverable Sessions
Under certain circumstances, when a session does not complete, you need to truncate
the target and run the session from the
beginning.
Commit Intervals
A commit interval is the interval at which the server commits data to relational
targets during a session.
(a) Target based commi t
23
- Server commits data based on the no of target rows and the key constraints on the
target table. The commit point also
depends on the buffer block size and the commit pinterval.
- During a session, the server continues to fill the writer buffer, after it
reaches the commit interval. When the buffer block is full,
the Informatica server issues a commit command. As a result, the amount of data
committed at the commit point generally
exceeds the commit interval.
- The server commits data to each target based on primary –foreign key constraints.
(b) Source based commi t
- Server commits data based on the number of source rows. The commit point is the
commit interval you configure in the
session properties.
- During a session, the server commits data to the target based on the number of
rows from an active source in a single
pipeline. The rows are referred to as source rows.
- A pipeline consists of a source qualifier and all the transformations and targets
that receive data from source qualifier.
- Although the Filter, Router and Update Strategy transformations are active
transformations, the server does not use them as
active sources in a source based commit session.
- When a server runs a session, it identifies the active source for each pipeline
in the mapping. The server generates a commit
row from the active source at every commit interval.
- When each target in the pipeline receives the commit rows the server performs the
commit.
Reject Loading
During a session, the server creates a reject file for each target instance in the
mapping. If the writer of the target rejects data, the
server writers the rejected row into the reject file.
You can correct those rejected data and re-load them to relational targets, using
the reject loading utility. (You cannot load rejected
data into a flat file target)
Each time, you run a session, the server appends a rejected data to the reject
file.
Locating the BadFiles
$PMBadFileDir
Filename.bad
When you run a partitioned session, the server creates a separate reject file for
each partition.
Reading Rejected data
Ex: 3,D,1,D,D,0,D,1094345609,D,0,0.00
To help us in finding the reason for rejecting, there are two main things.
(a) Row indicator
Row indicator tells the writer, what to do with the row of wrong data.
Row indicator Meaning Rejected By
3 Reject Writer
If a row indicator is 3, the writer rejected the row because an update strategy
expression marked it for reject.
(b) Column indicator
Column indicator is followed by the first column of data, and another column
indicator. They appears after every column of data
and define the type of data preceding it
Column Indicator Meaning Writer Treats as
D Valid Data Good Data. The target accepts
it unless a database error
occurs, such as finding
duplicate key.
O Overflow Bad Data.
24
N Null Bad Data.

T Truncated Bad Data
NOTE
NULL columns appear in the reject file with commas marking their column.
Correcting Reject File
Use the reject file and the session log to determine the cause for rejected data.
Keep in mind that correcting the reject file does not necessarily correct the
source of the reject.
Correct the mapping and target database to eliminate some of the rejected data when
you run the session again.
Trying to correct target rejected rows before correcting writer rejected rows is
not recommended since they may contain misleading
column indicator.
For example, a series of “N” indicator might lead you to believe the target
database does not accept NULL values, so you decide to
change those NULL values to Zero.
However, if those rows also had a 3 in row indicator. Column, the row was rejected
b the writer because of an update strategy
expression, not because of a target database restriction.
If you try to load the corrected file to target, the writer will again reject those
rows, and they will contain inaccurate 0 values, in place of
NULL values.
Why writer can reject ?
- Data overflowed column constraints
- An update strategy expression
Why target database can Reject ?
- Data contains a NULL column
- Database errors, such as key violations
Steps for loading reject file:
- After correcting the rejected data, rename the rejected file to reject_file.in
- The rejloader used the data movement mode configured for the server. It also used
the code page of server/OS. Hence do
not change the above, in middle of the reject loading
- Use the reject loader utility
Pmrejldr pmserver.cfg [folder name] [session name]
Other points
25
The server does not perform the following option, when using reject loader
(a) Source base commit
(b) Constraint based loading
(c) Truncated target table
(d) FTP targets
(e) External Loading
Multiple reject loaders
You can run the session several times and correct rejected data from the several
session at once. You can correct and load all of the
reject files at once, or work on one or two reject files, load then and work on the
other at a later time.
External Loading
You can configure a session to use Sybase IQ, Teradata and Oracle external loaders
to load session target files into the respective
databases.
The External Loader option can increase session performance since these databases
can load information directly from files faster
than they can the SQL commands to insert the same data into the database.
Method:
When a session used External loader, the session creates a control file and target
flat file. The control file contains information about
the target flat file, such as data format and loading instruction for the External
Loader. The control file has an extension of “*.ctl “ and
you can view the file in $PmtargetFilesDir.
For using an External Loader:
The following must be done:
- configure an external loader connection in the server manager
- Configure the session to write to a target flat file local to the server.
- Choose an external loader connection for each target file in session property
sheet.
Issues with External Loader:
- Disable constraints
- Performance issues
o Increase commit intervals
o Turn off database logging
- Code page requirements
- The server can use multiple External Loader within one session (Ex: you are
having a session with the two target files. One
with Oracle External Loader and another with Sybase External Loader)
Other Information:
- The External Loader performance depends upon the platform of the server
- The server loads data at different stages of the session
- The serve writes External Loader initialization and completing messaging in the
session log. However, details about EL
performance, it is generated at EL log, which is getting stored as same target
directory.
- If the session contains errors, the server continues the EL process. If the
session fails, the server loads partial target data
using EL.
- The EL creates a reject file for data rejected by the database. The reject file
has an extension of “*.ldr” reject.
- The EL saves the reject file in the target file directory
- You can load corrected data from the file, using database reject loader, and not
through Informatica reject load utility (For EL
reject file only)
Configuring EL in session
- In the server manager, open the session property sheet
- Select File target, and then click flat file options
Caches
26
- server creates index and data caches in memory for aggregator ,rank ,joiner and
Lookup transformation in a mapping.
- Server stores key values in index caches and output values in data caches : if
the server requires more memory ,it stores
overflow values in cache files .
- When the session completes, the server releases caches memory, and in most
circumstances, it deletes the caches files .
- Caches Storage overflow :
- releases caches memory, and in most circumstances, it deletes the caches files .
Caches Storage overflow :
Transformation index cache data cache
Aggregator stores group values stores calculations
As configured in the based on Group-by ports
Group-by ports.
Rank stores group values as stores ranking information
Configured in the Group-by based on Group-by ports .
Joiner stores index values for stores master source rows .
The master source table
As configured in Joiner condition.
Lookup stores Lookup condition stores lookup data that’s
Information. Not stored in the index cache.
Determining cache requirements
To calculate the cache size, you need to consider column and row requirements as
well as processing overhead.
- server requires processing overhead to cache data and index information.
Column overhead includes a null indicator, and row overhead can include row to key
information.
Steps:
- first, add the total column size in the cache to the row overhead.
- Multiply the result by the no of groups (or) rows in the cache this gives the
minimum cache requirements .
- For maximum requirements, multiply min requirements by 2.
Location:
-by default , the server stores the index and data files in the directory
$PMCacheDir.
-the server names the index files PMAGG*.idx and data files PMAGG*.dat. if the size
exceeds 2GB,you may find multiple index and
data files in the directory .The server appends a number to the end of
filename(PMAGG*.id*1,id*2,etc).
Aggregator Caches
- when server runs a session with an aggregator transformation, it stores data in
memory until it completes the aggregation.
- when you partition a source, the server creates one memory cache and one disk
cache and one and disk cache for each
partition .It routes data from one partition to another based on group key values
of the transformation.
- server uses memory to process an aggregator transformation with sort ports. It
doesn’t use cache memory .you don’t need to
configure the cache memory, that use sorted ports.
Index cache:
#Groups ((å column size) + 7)
Aggregate data cache:
Rank Cache
- when the server runs a session with a Rank transformation, it compares an input
row with rows with rows in data cache. If
the input row out-ranks a stored row,the Informatica server replaces the stored row
with the input row.
- If the rank transformation is configured to rank across multiple groups, the
server ranks incrementally for each group it finds .
Index Cache :
27

Rank Data Cache:
#Group [(#Ranks * (å column size + 10)) + 20]
Joiner Cache:
- When server runs a session with joiner transformation, it reads all rows from the
master source and builds memory caches
based on the master rows.
- After building these caches, the server reads rows from the detail source and
performs the joins
- Server creates the Index cache as it reads the master source into the data cache.
The server uses the Index cache to test the
join condition. When it finds a match, it retrieves rows values from the data
cache.
- To improve joiner performance, the server aligns all data for joiner cache or an
eight byte boundary.
Index Cache :
#Master rows [(å column size) + 16)
Joiner Data Cache:
#Master row [(å column size) + 8]
Lookup cache:
- When server runs a lookup transformation, the server builds a cache in memory,
when it process the first row of data in the
transformation.
- Server builds the cache and queries it for the each row that enters the
transformation.
- If you partition the source pipeline, the server allocates the configured amount
of memory for each partition. If two lookup
transformations share the cache, the server does not allocate additional memory for
the second lookup transformation.
- The server creates index and data cache files in the lookup cache drectory and
used the server code page to create the files.
Index Cache :
#Rows in lookup table [(å column size) + 16)
Lookup Data Cache:
#Rows in lookup table [(å column size) + 8]
28
Transformations
A transformation is a repository object that generates, modifies or passes data.
(a) Active Transformation :
a. Can change the number of rows, that passes through it (Filter, Normalizer,
Rank ..)
(b) Passive Transformation :
a. Does not change the no of rows that passes through it (Expression, lookup ..)
NOTE:
- Transformations can be connected to the data flow or they can be unconnected
- An unconnected transformation is not connected to other transformation in the
mapping. It is called with in another
transformation and returns a value to that transformation
Reusable Transformations:
When you are using reusable transformation to a mapping, the definition of
transformation exists outside the mapping while an
instance appears with mapping.
All the changes you are making in transformation will immediately reflect in
instances.
You can create reusable transformation by two methods:
(a) Designing in transformation developer
(b) Promoting a standard transformation
Change that reflects in mappings are like expressions. If port name etc. are
changes they won’t reflect.
Handling High-Precision Data:
- Server process decimal values as doubles or decimals.
- When you create a session, you choose to enable the decimal data type or let the
server process the data as double
(Precision of 15)
Example:
- You may have a mapping with decimal (20,0) that passes through. The value may be
40012030304957666903.
If you enable decimal arithmetic, the server passes the number as it is. If you do
not enable decimal arithmetic, the server
passes 4.00120303049577 X 1019.
If you want to process a decimal value with a precision greater than 28 digits, the
server automatically treats as a double
value.
29
Mapplets
When the server runs a session using a mapplets, it expands the mapplets. The
server then runs the session as it would any other
sessions, passing data through each transformation in the mapplet.
If you use a reusable transformation in a mapplet, changes to these can invalidate
the mapplet and every mapping using the mapplet.
You can create a non-reusable instance of a reusable transformation.
Mapplet Objects:
(a) Input transformation
(b) Source qualifier
(c) Transformations, as you need
(d) Output transformation
Mapplet Won’t Support:
- Joiner
- Normalizer
- Pre/Post session stored procedure
- Target definitions
- XML source definitions
Types of Mapplets:
(a) Active Mapplets - Contains one or more active transformations
(b) Passive Mapplets - Contains only passive transformation
Copied mapplets are not an instance of original mapplets. If you make changes to
the original, the copy does not inherit your changes
You can use a single mapplet, even more than once on a mapping.
Ports
Default value for I/P port - NULL
Default value for O/P port - ERROR
Default value for variables - Does not support default values
Session Parameters
This parameter represent values you might want to change between sessions, such as
DB Connection or source file.
We can use session parameter in a session property sheet, then define the
parameters in a session parameter file.
The user defined session parameters are:
(a) DB Connection
(b) Source File directory
(c) Target file directory
(d) Reject file directory
Description:
Use session parameter to make sessions more flexible. For example, you have the
same type of transactional data written to two different
databases, and you use the database connections TransDB1 and TransDB2 to connect to
the databases. You want to use the same
mapping for both tables.
Instead of creating two sessions for the same mapping, you can create a database
connection parameter, like $DBConnectionSource, and
use it as the source database connection for the session.
When you create a parameter file for the session, you set $DBConnectionSource to
TransDB1 and run the session. After it completes set
the value to TransDB2 and run the session again.
NOTE:
You can use several parameter together to make session management easier.
Session parameters do not have default value, when the server can not find a value
for a session parameter, it fails to initialize the session.
Session Parameter File
30
- A parameter file is created by text editor.

- In that, we can specify the folder and session name, then list the parameters and
variables used in the session and assign
each value.
- Save the parameter file in any directory, load to the server
- We can define following values in a parameter
o Mapping parameter
o Mapping variables
o Session parameters
- You can include parameter and variable information for more than one session in a
single parameter file by creating separate
sections, for each session with in the parameter file.
- You can override the parameter file for sessions contained in a batch by using a
batch parameter file. A batch parameter file
has the same format as a session parameter file
Locale
Informatica server can transform character data in two modes
(a) ASCII
a. Default one
b. Passes 7 byte, US-ASCII character data
(b) UNICODE
a. Passes 8 bytes, multi byte character data
b. It uses 2 bytes for each character to move data and performs additional checks
at session level, to ensure data integrity.
Code pages contains the encoding to specify characters in a set of one or more
languages. We can select a code page, based on the type
of character data in the mappings.
Compatibility between code pages is essential for accurate data movement.
The various code page components are
- Operating system Locale settings
- Operating system code page
- Informatica server data movement mode
- Informatica server code page
- Informatica repository code page
Locale
(a) System Locale - System Default
(b) User locale - setting for date, time, display
© Input locale
Mapping Parameter and Variables
These represent values in mappings/mapplets.
If we declare mapping parameters and variables in a mapping, you can reuse a
mapping by altering the parameter and variable values
of the mappings in the session.
This can reduce the overhead of creating multiple mappings when only certain
attributes of mapping needs to be changed.
When you want to use the same value for a mapping parameter each time you run the
session.
Unlike a mapping parameter, a mapping variable represent a value that can change
through the session. The server saves the value
of a mapping variable to the repository at the end of each successful run and used
that value the next time you run the session.
Mapping objects:
Source, Target, Transformation, Cubes, Dimension
Debugger
We can run the Debugger in two situations
31
(a) Before Session: After saving mapping, we can run some initial tests.
(b) After Session: real Debugging process
MEadata Reporter:
- Web based application that allows to run reports against repository metadata
- Reports including executed sessions, lookup table dependencies, mappings and
source/target schemas.
Repository
Types of Repository
(a) Global Repository
a. This is the hub of the domain use the GR to store common objects that multiple
developers can use through shortcuts.
These may include operational or application source definitions, reusable
transformations, mapplets and mappings
(b) Local Repository
a. A Local Repository is with in a domain that is not the global repository. Use4
the Local Repository for development.
© Standard Repository
a. A repository that functions individually, unrelated and unconnected to other
repository
NOTE:
- Once you create a global repository, you can not change it to a local repository
- However, you can promote the local to global repository
Batches
- Provide a way to group sessions for either serial or parallel execution by server
- Batches
o Sequential (Runs session one after another)
o Concurrent (Runs sessions at same time)
Nesting Batches
Each batch can contain any number of session/batches. We can nest batches several
levels deep, defining batches within batches
Nested batches are useful when you want to control a complex series of sessions
that must run sequentially or concurrently
Scheduling
When you place sessions in a batch, the batch schedule override that session
schedule by default. However, we can configure a
batched session to run on its own schedule by selecting the “Use Absolute Time
Session” Option.
Server Behavior
Server configured to run a batch overrides the server configuration to run sessions
within the batch. If you have multiple servers, all
sessions within a batch run on the Informatica server that runs the batch.
The server marks a batch as failed if one of its sessions is configured to run if
“Previous completes” and that previous session fails.
Sequential Batch
If you have sessions with dependent source/target relationship, you can place them
in a sequential batch, so that Informatica server
can run them is consecutive order.
They are two ways of running sessions, under this category
(a) Run the session, only if the previous completes successfully
(b) Always run the session (this is default)
Concurrent Batch
In this mode, the server starts all of the sessions within the batch, at same time
Concurrent batches take advantage of the resource of the Informatica server,
reducing the time it takes to run the session separately
or in a sequential batch.
Concurrent batch in a Sequential batch
If you have concurrent batches with source-target dependencies that benefit from
running those batches in a particular order, just like
sessions, place them into a sequential batch.
32
33
Server Concepts
The Informatica server used three system resources
(a) CPU
(b) Shared Memory
(c) Buffer Memory
Informatica server uses shared memory, buffer memory and cache memory for session
information and to move data between session
threads.
LM Shared Memory
Load Manager uses both process and shared memory. The LM keeps the information
server list of sessions and batches, and the
schedule queue in process memory.
Once a session starts, the LM uses shared memory to store session details for the
duration of the session run or session schedule.
This shared memory appears as the configurable parameter (LMSharedMemory) and the
server allots 2,000,000 bytes as default.
This allows you to schedule or run approximately 10 sessions at one time.
DTM Buffer Memory
The DTM process allocates buffer memory to the session based on the DTM buffer poll
size settings, in session properties. By default,
it allocates 12,000,000 bytes of memory to the session.
DTM divides memory into buffer blocks as configured in the buffer block size
settings. (Default: 64,000 bytes per block)
Running a Session
The following tasks are being done during a session
1. LM locks the session and read session properties
2. LM reads parameter file
3. LM expands server/session variables and parameters
4. LM verifies permission and privileges
5. LM validates source and target code page
6. LM creates session log file
7. LM creates DTM process
8. DTM process allocates DTM process memory
9. DTM initializes the session and fetches mapping
10. DTM executes pre-session commands and procedures
11. DTM creates reader, writer, transformation threads for each pipeline
12. DTM executes post-session commands and procedures
13. DTM writes historical incremental aggregation/lookup to repository
14. LM sends post-session emails
34
Stopping and aborting a session

- If the session you want to stop is a part of batch, you must stop the batch
- If the batch is part of nested batch, stop the outermost batch
- When you issue the stop command, the server stops reading data. It continues
processing and writing data and committing
data to targets
- If the server cannot finish processing and committing data, you can issue the
ABORT command. It is similar to stop
command, except it has a 60 second timeout. If the server cannot finish processing
and committing data within 60 seconds, it
kills the DTM process and terminates the session.
Recovery:
- After a session being stopped/aborted, the session results can be recovered. When
the recovery is performed, the session
continues from the point at which it stopped.
- If you do not recover the session, the server runs the entire session the next
time.
- Hence, after stopping/aborting, you may need to manually delete targets before
the session runs again.
NOTE:
ABORT command and ABORT function, both are different.
When can a Session Fail
- Server cannot allocate enough system resources
- Session exceeds the maximum no of sessions the server can run concurrently
- Server cannot obtain an execute lock for the session (the session is already
locked)
- Server unable to execute post-session shell commands or post-load stored
procedures
- Server encounters database errors
- Server encounter Transformation row errors (Ex: NULL value in non-null fields)
- Network related errors
When Pre/Post Shell Commands are useful
- To delete a reject file
- To archive target files before session begins
Session Performance
- Minimum log (Terse)
- Partitioning source data.
- Performing ETL for each partition, in parallel. (For this, multiple CPUs are
needed)
- Adding indexes.
- Changing commit Level.
- Using Filter trans to remove unwanted data movement.
- Increasing buffer memory, when large volume of data.
- Multiple lookups can reduce the performance. Verify the largest lookup table and
tune the expressions.
- In session level, the causes are small cache size, low buffer memory and small
commit interval.
- At system level,
o WIN NT/2000-U the task manager.
o UNIX: VMSTART, IOSTART.
Hierarchy of optimization
- Target.
- Source.
- Mapping
- Session.
- System.
35
Optimizing Target Databases:

- Drop indexes /constraints
- Increase checkpoint intervals.
- Use bulk loading /external loading.
- Turn off recovery.
- Increase database network packet size.
Source level
- Optimize the query (using group by, group by).
- Use conditional filters.
- Connect to RDBMS using IPC protocol.
Mapping
- Optimize data type conversions.
- Eliminate transformation errors.
- Optimize transformations/ expressions.
Session:
- concurrent batches.
- Partition sessions.
- Reduce error tracing.
- Remove staging area.
- Tune session parameters.
System:
- improve network speed.
- Use multiple preservers on separate systems.
- Reduce paging.
Session Process
Info server uses both process memory and system shared memory to perform ETL
process.
It runs as a daemon on UNIX and as a service on WIN NT.
The following processes are used to run a session:
(a) LOAD manager process: - starts a session
· Creates DTM process, which creates the session.
(b) DTM process: - creates threads to initialize the session
- read, write and transform data.
- handle pre/post session opertions.
Load manager processes:
- manages session/batch scheduling.
- Locks session.
- Reads parameter file.
- Expands server/session variables, parameters .
- Verifies permissions/privileges.
- Creates session log file.
DTM process:
The primary purpose of the DTM is to create and manage threads that carry out the
session tasks.
36
The DTM allocates process memory for the session and divides it into buffers. This
is known as buffer memory. The default
memory allocation is 12,000,000 bytes .it creates the main thread, which is called
master thread .this manages all other threads.
Various threads functions
Master thread- handles stop and abort requests from load manager.
Mapping thread- one thread for each session.
Fetches session and mapping information.
Compiles mapping.
Cleans up after execution.
Reader thread- one thread for each partition.
Relational sources uses relational threads and
Flat files use file threads.
Writer thread- one thread for each partition writes to target.
Transformation thread- One or more transformation for each partition.
Note:
When you run a session, the threads for a partitioned source execute concurrently.
The threads use buffers to
move/transform data.
1. Explain about your projects
- Architecture
- Dimension and Fact tables
- Sources and Targets
- Transformations used
- Frequency of populating data
- Database size
2. What is dimension modeling?
Unlike ER model the dimensional model is very asymmetric
with one large central table called as fact table connected to multiple
dimension tables .It is also called star schema.
3. What are mapplets?
Mapplets are reusable objects that represents collection of transformations
Transformations not to be included in mapplets are
Cobol source definitions
Joiner transformations
Normalizer Transformations
Non-reusable sequence generator transformations
Pre or post session procedures
Target definitions
XML Source definitions
IBM MQ source definitions
Power mart 3.5 style Lookup functions
4. What are the transformations that use cache for performance?
Aggregator, Lookups, Joiner and Ranker
5. What the active and passive transformations?
An active transformation changes the number of rows that pass through the
mapping.
1. Source Qualifier
2. Filter transformation
3. Router transformation
4. Ranker
5. Update strategy
6. Aggregator
7. Advanced External procedure
8. Normalizer
9. Joiner
Passive transformations do not change the number of rows that pass through
the mapping.
1. Expressions
37
2. Lookup
3. Stored procedure
4. External procedure
5. Sequence generator
6. XML Source qualifier
6. What is a lookup transformation?
Used to look up data in a relational table, views, or synonym, The
informatica server queries the lookup table based on the lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares lookup transformation port values to lookup
table column values based on the lookup condition. The result is passed to
other transformations and the target.
Used to :
Get related value
Perform a calculation
Update slowly changing dimension tables.
Diff between connected and unconnected lookups. Which is better?
Connected :
Received input values directly from the pipeline
Can use Dynamic or static cache.
Cache includes all lookup columns used in the mapping
Can return multiple columns from the same row
If there is no match , can return default values
Default values can be specified.
Un connected :
Receive input values from the result of a LKP expression in another
transformation.
Only static cache can be used.
Cache includes all lookup/output ports in the lookup condition and lookup or
return port.
Can return only one column from each row.
If there is no match it returns null.
Default values cannot be specified.
Explain various caches:
Static:
Caches the lookup table before executing the transformation.
Rows are not added dynamically.
Dynamic:
Caches the rows as and when it is passed.
Unshared:
Within the mapping if the lookup table is used in more than
one transformation then the cache built for the first lookup can be used for
the others. It cannot be used across mappings.
Shared:
If the lookup table is used in more than one
transformation/mapping then the cache built for the first lookup can be used
for the others. It can be used across mappings.
Persistent :
If the cache generated for a Lookup needs to be preserved
for subsequent use then persistent cache is used. It will not delete the
index and data files. It is useful only if the lookup table remains
constant.
What are the uses of index and data caches?
The conditions are stored in index cache and records from
the lookup are stored in data cache
7. Explain aggregate transformation?
The aggregate transformation allows you to perform aggregate calculations,
such as averages, sum, max, min etc. The aggregate transformation is unlike
the Expression transformation, in that you can use the aggregator
transformation to perform calculations in groups. The expression
transformation permits you to perform calculations on a row-by-row basis
only.
38
Performance issues ?
The Informatica server performs calculations as it reads and stores
necessary data group and row data in an aggregate cache.
Create Sorted input ports and pass the input records to aggregator in
sorted forms by groups then by port
Incremental aggregation?
In the Session property tag there is an option for
performing incremental aggregation. When the Informatica server performs
incremental aggregation , it passes new source data through the mapping and
uses historical cache (index and data cache) data to perform new aggregation
calculations incrementally.
What are the uses of index and data cache?
The group data is stored in index files and Row data stored
in data files.
8. Explain update strategy?
Update strategy defines the sources to be flagged for insert, update,
delete, and reject at the targets.
What are update strategy constants?
DD_INSERT,0 DD_UPDATE,1 DD_DELETE,2
DD_REJECT,3
If DD_UPDATE is defined in update strategy and Treat source
rows as INSERT in Session . What happens?
Hints: If in Session anything other than DATA DRIVEN is
mentions then Update strategy in the mapping is ignored.
What are the three areas where the rows can be flagged for
particular treatment?
In mapping, In Session treat Source Rows and In Session
Target Options.
What is the use of Forward/Reject rows in Mapping?
9. Explain the expression transformation ?
Expression transformation is used to calculate values in a single row before
writing to the target.
What are the default values for variables?
Hints: Straing = Null, Number = 0, Date = 1/1/1753
10. Difference between Router and filter transformation?
In filter transformation the records are filtered based on the condition and
rejected rows are discarded. In Router the multiple conditions are placed
and the rejected rows can be assigned to a port.
How many ways you can filter the records?
1. Source Qualifier
4. Ranker
5. Update strategy
.
11. How do you call stored procedure and external procedure
transformation ?
External Procedure can be called in the Pre-session and post session tag in
the Session property sheet.
Store procedures are to be called in the mapping designer by three methods
1. Select the icon and add a Stored procedure transformation
2. Select transformation - Import Stored Procedure
3. Select Transformation - Create and then select stored procedure.
12. Explain Joiner transformation and where it is used?
While a Source qualifier transformation can join data originating from a
common source database, the joiner transformation joins two related
heterogeneous sources residing in different locations or file systems.
Two relational tables existing in separate databases
Two flat files in different file systems.
39
Two different ODBC sources

In one transformation how many sources can be coupled?
Two sources can be couples. If more than two is to be couples add another
Joiner in the hierarchy.
What are join options?
Normal (Default)
Master Outer
Detail Outer
Full Outer
13. Explain Normalizer transformation?
The normaliser transformation normalises records from COBOL and relational
sources, allowing you to organise the data according to your own needs. A
Normaliser transformation can appear anywhere in a data flow when you
normalize a relational source. Use a Normaliser transformation instead of
the Source Qualifier transformation when you normalize COBOL source. When
you drag a COBOL source into the Mapping Designer Workspace, the Normaliser
transformation appears, creating input and output ports for every columns in
the source.
14. What is Source qualifier transformation?
When you add relational or flat file source definition to a mapping , you
need to connect to a source Qualifier transformation. The source qualifier
represents the records that the informatica server reads when it runs a
session.
Join Data originating from the same source database.
Filter records when the Informatica server reads the source data.
Specify an outer join rather than the default inner join.
Specify sorted ports
Select only distinct values from the source
Create a custom query to issue a special SELECT statement for the
Informatica server to read the source data.
15. What is Ranker transformation?
Filters the required number of records from the top or from the bottom.
16. What is target load option?
It defines the order in which informatica server loads the data into the
targets.
This is to avoid integrity constraint violations
17. How do you identify the bottlenecks in Mappings?
Bottlenecks can occur in
1. Targets
The most common performance bottleneck occurs when the
informatica server writes to a target
database. You can identify target bottleneck by
configuring the session to write to a flat file target.
If the session performance increases significantly when
you write to a flat file, you have a target
bottleneck.
Solution :
Drop or Disable index or constraints
Perform bulk load (Ignores Database log)
Increase commit interval (Recovery is compromised)
Tune the database for RBS, Dynamic Extension etc.,
2. Sources
Set a filter transformation after each SQ and see the
records are not through.
If the time taken is same then there is a problem.
You can also identify the Source problem by
Read Test Session - where we copy the mapping with
sources, SQ and remove all transformations
and connect to file target. If the performance is same
then there is a Source bottleneck.
40
Using database query - Copy the read query directly from

the log. Execute the query against the
source database with a query tool. If the time it takes
to execute the query and the time to fetch
the first row are significantly different, then the query
can be modified using optimizer hints.
Solutions:
Optimize Queries using hints.
Use indexes wherever possible.
3. Mapping
If both Source and target are OK then problem could be
in mapping.
Add a filter transformation before target and if the
time is the same then there is a problem.
(OR) Look for the performance monitor in the Sessions
property sheet and view the counters.
Solutions:
If High error rows and rows in lookup cache indicate a
mapping bottleneck.
Optimize Single Pass Reading:
Optimize Lookup transformation :
1. Caching the lookup table:
When caching is enabled the informatica
server caches the lookup table and queries the
cache during the session. When this option is
not enabled the server queries the lookup
table on a row-by row basis.
Static, Dynamic, Shared, Un-shared and
Persistent cache
2. Optimizing the lookup condition
Whenever multiple conditions are placed, the
condition with equality sign should take
precedence.
3. Indexing the lookup table
The cached lookup table should be indexed on
order by columns. The session log contains
the ORDER BY statement
The un-cached lookup since the server issues a
SELECT statement for each row passing
into lookup transformation, it is better to
index the lookup table on the columns in the
condition
Optimize Filter transformation:
You can improve the efficiency by filtering early
in the data flow. Instead of using a filter
transformation halfway through the mapping to
remove a sizable amount of data.
Use a source qualifier filter to remove those same
rows at the source,
If not possible to move the filter into SQ, move
the filter transformation as close to the
source
qualifier as possible to remove unnecessary data
early in the data flow.
Optimize Aggregate transformation:
1. Group by simpler columns. Preferably numeric
columns.
2. Use Sorted input. The sorted input decreases
the use of aggregate caches. The server
assumes all input data are sorted and as it
reads it performs aggregate calculations.
3. Use incremental aggregation in session property
sheet.
Optimize Seq. Generator transformation:
1. Try creating a reusable Seq. Generator
transformation and use it in multiple mappings
2. The number of cached value property determines
41
the number of values the informatica

server caches at one time.
Optimize Expression transformation:
1. Factoring out common logic
2. Minimize aggregate function calls.
3. Replace common sub-expressions with local
variables.
4. Use operators instead of functions.
4. Sessions
If you do not have a source, target, or mapping
bottleneck, you may have a session bottleneck.
You can identify a session bottleneck by using the
performance details. The informatica server
creates performance details when you enable Collect
Performance Data on the General Tab of
the session properties.
Performance details display information about each
Source Qualifier, target definitions, and
individual transformation. All transformations have some
basic counters that indicate the
Number of input rows, output rows, and error rows.
Any value other than zero in the readfromdisk and
writetodisk counters for Aggregate, Joiner,
or Rank transformations indicate a session bottleneck.
Low bufferInput_efficiency and BufferOutput_efficiency
counter also indicate a session
bottleneck.
Small cache size, low buffer memory, and small commit
intervals can cause session bottlenecks.
5. System (Networks)
18. How to improve the Session performance?
1 Run concurrent sessions
2 Partition session (Power center)
3. Tune Parameter - DTM buffer pool, Buffer block size, Index cache size,
data cache size, Commit Interval, Tracing level (Normal, Terse, Verbose
Init, Verbose Data)
The session has memory to hold 83 sources and targets. If it is more, then
DTM can be increased.
The informatica server uses the index and data caches for Aggregate, Rank,
Lookup and Joiner
transformation. The server stores the transformed data from the above
transformation in the data
cache before returning it to the data flow. It stores group information for
those transformations in
index cache.
If the allocated data or index cache is not large enough to store the date,
the server stores the data
in a temporary disk file as it processes the session data. Each time the
server pages to the disk the
performance slows. This can be seen from the counters .
Since generally data cache is larger than the index cache, it has to be
more than the index.
4. Remove Staging area
5. Tune off Session recovery
6. Reduce error tracing
19. What are tracing levels?
Normal-default
Logs initialization and status information, errors
encountered, skipped rows due to transformation errors, summarizes session
results but not at the row level.
Terse
Log initialization, error messages, notification of rejected
data.
Verbose Init.
In addition to normal tracing levels, it also logs
additional initialization information, names of index and data files used
42
and detailed transformation statistics.

Verbose Data.
In addition to Verbose init, It records row level logs.
20. What is Slowly changing dimensions?
Slowly changing dimensions are dimension tables that have
slowly increasing data as well as updates to existing data.
21. What are mapping parameters and variables?
A mapping parameter is a user definable constant that takes up a value
before running a session. It can be used in SQ expressions, Expression
transformation etc.
Steps:
Define the parameter in the mapping designer - parameter & variables .
Use the parameter in the Expressions.
Define the values for the parameter in the parameter file.
A mapping variable is also defined similar to the parameter except that the
value of the variable is subjected to change.
It picks up the value in the following order.
1. From the Session parameter file
2. As stored in the repository object in the previous run.
3. As defined in the initial values in the designer.
4. Default values
43
Oracle
Q. How many types of Sql Statements are there in Oracle?
There are basically 6 types of sql statements. They are:
a) Data Definition Language (DDL) The DDL statements define and maintain objects
and drop objects.
b) Data Manipulation Language (DML) The DML statements manipulate database data.
c) Transaction Control Statements Manage change by DML
d) Session Control -Used to control the properties of current session enabling and
disabling roles and changing. E.g. Alter
Statements, Set Role
e) System Control Statements-Change Properties of Oracle Instance. E.g. Alter
System
f) Embedded Sql- Incorporate DDL, DML and TCS in Programming Language. E.g. Using
the Sql Statements in languages such
as 'C', Open, Fetch, execute and close
Q. What is a Join?
A join is a query that combines rows from two or more tables, views, or
materialized views ("snapshots"). Oracle performs a join whenever
multiple tables appear in the queries FROM clause. The query’s select list can
select any columns from any of these tables. If any two of
these tables have a column name in common, you must qualify all references to these
columns throughout the query with table names to
avoid ambiguity.
Q. What are join conditions?
Most join queries contain WHERE clause conditions that compare two columns, each
from a different table. Such a condition is called a
join condition. To execute a join, Oracle combines pairs of rows, each containing
one row from each table, for which the join condition
evaluates to TRUE. The columns in the join conditions need not also appear in the
select list.
Q. What is an equijoin?
An equijoin is a join with a join condition containing an equality operator. An
equijoin combines rows that have equivalent values for the
specified columns.
Eg:
Select ename, job, dept.deptno, dname From emp, dept Where emp.deptno = dept.deptno
;
Q. What are self joins?
A self join is a join of a table to itself. This table appears twice in the FROM
clause and is followed by table aliases that qualify column
names in the join condition.
Eg: SELECT e.ename || ‘ works for ‘ || e2.name “Employees and their Managers”
FROM emp e1, emp e2 WHERE e1.mgr = e2.empno;
ENAME EMPNO MGR
BLAKE 12345 67890
KING 67890 22446
Result: BLAKE works for KING
Q. What is an Outer Join?
An outer join extends the result of a simple join. An outer join returns all rows
that satisfy the join condition and those rows from one table
for which no rows from the other satisfy the join condition. Such rows are not
returned by a simple join. To write a query that performs an
outer join of tables A and B and returns all rows from A, apply the outer join
operator (+) to all columns of B in the join condition.
For all rows in A that have no matching rows in B, Oracle returns null for any
select list expressions containing columns of B.
Outer join queries are subject to the following rules and restrictions:
 The (+) operator can appear only in the WHERE clause or, in the context of left
correlation (that is, when specifying the TABLE clause)
in the FROM clause, and can be applied only to a column of a table or view.
 If A and B are joined by multiple join conditions, you must use the (+) operator
in all of these conditions. If you do not, Oracle will return
only the rows resulting from a simple join, but without a warning or error to
advise you that you do not have the results of an outer join.
 The (+) operator can be applied only to a column, not to an arbitrary expression.
However, an arbitrary expression can contain a
column marked with the (+) operator.
 A condition containing the (+) operator cannot be combined with another condition
using the OR logical operator.
 A condition cannot use the IN comparison operator to compare a column marked with
the (+) operator with an expression.
 A condition cannot compare any column marked with the (+) operator with a
subquery.
If the WHERE clause contains a condition that compares a column from table B with a
constant, the (+) operator must be applied to the
column so that Oracle returns the rows from table A for which it has generated
NULLs for this column. Otherwise Oracle will return only the
results of a simple join.
In a query that performs outer joins of more than two pairs of tables, a single
table can be the null-generated table for only one other table.
For this reason, you cannot apply the (+) operator to columns of B in the join
condition for A and B and the join condition for B and C.
44
Set Operators: UNION [ALL], INTERSECT, MINUS

Set operators combine the results of two component queries into a single result.
Queries containing set operators are called compound
queries.
The number and datatypes of the columns selected by each component query must be
the same, but the column lengths can be different.
If you combine more than two queries with set operators, Oracle evaluates adjacent
queries from left to right. You can use parentheses to
specify a different order of evaluation.
Restrictions:
 These set operators are not valid on columns of type BLOB, CLOB, BFILE, varray,
or nested table.
 The UNION, INTERSECT, and MINUS operators are not valid on LONG columns.
 To reference a column, you must use an alias to name the column.
 You cannot also specify the for_update_clause with these set operators.
 You cannot specify the order_by_clause in the subquery of these operators.
All set operators have equal precedence. If a SQL statement contains multiple set
operators, Oracle evaluates them from the left to right if
no parentheses explicitly specify another order.
The corresponding expressions in the select lists of the component queries of a
compound query must match in number and datatype. If
component queries select character data, the datatype of the return values are
determined as follows:
 If both queries select values of datatype CHAR, the returned values have datatype
CHAR.
 If either or both of the queries select values of datatype VARCHAR2, the returned
values have datatype VARCHAR2.
Q. What is a UNION?
The UNION operator eliminates duplicate records from the selected rows. We must
match datatype (using the TO_DATE and
TO_NUMBER functions) when columns do not exist in one or the other table.
Q. What is UNION ALL?
The UNION ALL operator does not eliminate duplicate selected rows.
Note: The UNION operator returns only distinct rows that appear in either result,
while the UNION ALL operator returns all rows.
Q. What is an INTERSECT?
The INTERSECT operator returns only those rows returned by both queries. It shows
only the distinct values from the rows returned by
both queries.
Q. What is MINUS?
The MINUS operator returns only rows returned by the first query but not by the
second. It also eliminates the duplicates from the first
query.
Note: For compound queries (containing set operators UNION, INTERSECT, MINUS, or
UNION ALL), the ORDER BY clause must use
positions, rather than explicit expressions. Also, the ORDER BY clause can appear
only in the last component query. The ORDER BY
clause orders all rows returned by the entire compound query.
Q) What is a Transaction in Oracle?
A transaction is a Logical unit of work that compromises one or more SQL Statements
executed by a single User. According to ANSI, a
transaction begins with first executable statement and ends when it is explicitly
committed or rolled back.
A transaction is an atomic unit.
Q. What are some of the Key Words Used in Oracle?
Some of the Key words that are used in Oracle are:
A) Committing: A transaction is said to be committed when the transaction makes
permanent changes resulting from the SQL
statements.
b) Rollback: A transaction that retracts any of the changes resulting from SQL
statements in Transaction.
c) SavePoint: For long transactions that contain many SQL statements, intermediate
markers or savepoints are declared. Savepoints can
be used to divide a transaction into smaller points.
45
We can declare intermediate markers called savepoints within the context of a

transaction. Savepoints divide a long transaction into
smaller parts. Using savepoints, we can arbitrarily mark our work at any point
within a long transaction. We then have the option later of
rolling back work performed before the current point in the transaction but after a
declared savepoint within the transaction.
For example, we can use savepoints throughout a long complex series of updates so
that if we make an error, we do not need to resubmit
every statement.
d) Rolling Forward: Process of applying redo log during recovery is called rolling
forward.
e) Cursor: A cursor is a handle (name or a pointer) for the memory associated with
a specific statement. A cursor is basically an area
allocated by Oracle for executing the Sql Statement. Oracle uses an implicit cursor
statement for Single row query and Uses Explicit cursor
for a multi row query.
f) System Global Area (SGA): The SGA is a shared memory region allocated by the
Oracle that contains Data and control information for
one Oracle Instance. It consists of Database Buffer Cache and Redo log Buffer.
(KPIT Infotech, Pune)
g) Program Global Area (PGA): The PGA is a memory buffer that contains data and
control information for server process.
g) Database Buffer Cache: Database Buffer of SGA stores the most recently used
blocks of database data. The set of database buffers in
an instance is called Database Buffer Cache.
h) Redo log Buffer: Redo log Buffer of SGA stores all the redo log entries.
i) Redo Log Files: Redo log files are set of files that protect altered database
data in memory that has not been written to Data Files. They
are basically used for backup when a database crashes.
j) Process: A Process is a 'thread of control' or mechanism in Operating System
that executes series of steps.
Q. What are Procedure, functions and Packages?
Procedures and functions consist of set of PL/SQL statements that are grouped
together as a unit to solve a specific problem or perform
set of related tasks.
Procedures do not return values while Functions return one Value.
Packages: Packages provide a method of encapsulating and storing related
procedures, functions, variables and other Package Contents
Q. What are Database Triggers and Stored Procedures?
Database Triggers: Database Triggers are Procedures that are automatically executed
as a result of insert in, update to, or delete from
table. Database triggers have the values old and new to denote the old value in the
table before it is deleted and the new indicated the new
value that will be used. DT is useful for implementing complex business rules which
cannot be enforced using the integrity rules. We can
have the trigger as Before trigger or After Trigger and at Statement or Row level.
e.g:: operations insert, update ,delete 3 before ,after 3*2 A total of 6
combinations
At statement level(once for the trigger) or row level( for every execution ) 6 * 2
A total of 12.
Thus a total of 12 combinations are there and the restriction of usage of 12
triggers has been lifted from Oracle 7.3 Onwards.
Stored Procedures: Stored Procedures are Procedures that are stored in Compiled
form in the database. The advantage of using the
stored procedures is that many users can use the same procedure in compiled and
ready to use format.
Q. How many Integrity Rules are there and what are they?
There are Three Integrity Rules. They are as follows:
a) Entity Integrity Rule: The Entity Integrity Rule enforces that the Primary key
cannot be Null
b) Foreign Key Integrity Rule: The FKIR denotes that the relationship between the
foreign key and the primary key has to be
enforced. When there is data in Child Tables the Master tables cannot be deleted.
c) Business Integrity Rules: The Third Integrity rule is about the complex business
processes which cannot be implemented by the
above 2 rules.
Q. What are the Various Master and Detail Relationships?
The various Master and Detail Relationship are
a) No Isolated : The Master cannot be deleted when a child is existing
b) Isolated : The Master can be deleted when the child is existing
c) Cascading : The child gets deleted when the Master is deleted.
Q. What are the Various Block Coordination Properties?
The various Block Coordination Properties are:
a) Immediate - Default Setting. The Detail records are shown when the Master Record
are shown.
b) Deferred with Auto Query- Oracle Forms defer fetching the detail records until
the operator navigates to the detail block.
c) Deferred with No Auto Query- The operator must navigate to the detail block and
explicitly execute a query
Q. What are the Different Optimization Techniques?
The Various Optimization techniques are:
a) Execute Plan: we can see the plan of the query and change it accordingly based
on the indexes
b) Optimizer_hint: set_item_property ('DeptBlock',OPTIMIZER_HINT,'FIRST_ROWS');
Select /*+ First_Rows */ Deptno,Dname,Loc,Rowid from dept where (Deptno > 25)
c) Optimize_Sql: By setting the Optimize_Sql = No, Oracle Forms assigns a single
cursor for all SQL statements. This slow downs
the processing because for every time the SQL must be parsed whenever they are
executed.
f45run module = my_firstform userid = scott/tiger optimize_sql = No
46
d) Optimize_Tp:
By setting the Optimize_Tp= No, Oracle Forms assigns seperate cursor only for each
query SELECT statement. All other SQL
statements reuse the cursor.
f45run module = my_firstform userid = scott/tiger optimize_Tp = No
Q. How do u implement the If statement in the Select Statement?
We can implement the if statement in the select statement by using the Decode
statement.
e.g select DECODE (EMP_CAT,'1','First','2','Second’, Null);
Q. How many types of Exceptions are there?
There are 2 types of exceptions. They are:
a) System Exceptions
e.g. When no_data_found, When too_many_rows
b) User Defined Exceptions
e.g. My_exception exception
When My_exception then
Q. What are the inline and the precompiler directives?
The inline and precompiler directives detect the values directly.
Q. How do you use the same lov for 2 columns?
We can use the same lov for 2 columns by passing the return values in global values
and using the global values in the code.
Q. How many minimum groups are required for a matrix report?
The minimum number of groups in matrix report is 4.
Q. What is the difference between static and dynamic lov?
The static lov contains the predetermined values while the dynamic lov contains
values that come at run time.
Q. What are the OOPS concepts in Oracle?
Oracle does implement the OOPS concepts. The best example is the Property Classes.
We can categorize the properties by setting the
visual attributes and then attach the property classes for the objects. OOPS
supports the concepts of objects and classes and we can
consider the property classes as classes and the items as objects
Q. What is the difference between candidate key, unique key and primary key?
Candidate keys are the columns in the table that could be the primary keys and the
primary key is the key that has been selected to identify
the rows. Unique key is also useful for identifying the distinct rows in the table.
Q. What is concurrency?
Concurrency is allowing simultaneous access of same data by different users. Locks
useful for accessing the database are:
a) Exclusive - The exclusive lock is useful for locking the row when an insert,
update or delete is being done. This lock should not be
applied when we do only select from the row.
b) Share lock - We can do the table as Share_Lock and as many share_locks can be
put on the same resource.
Q. What are Privileges and Grants?
Privileges are the right to execute a particular type of SQL statements.
E.g. Right to Connect, Right to create, Right to resource
Grants are given to the objects so that the object might be accessed accordingly.
The grant has to be given by the owner of the object.
Q. What are Table Space, Data Files, Parameter File and Control Files?
Table Space: The table space is useful for storing the data in the database.
When a database is created two table spaces are created.
a) System Table space: This data file stores all the tables related to the system
and dba tables
b) User Table space: This data file stores all the user related tables
We should have separate table spaces for storing the tables and indexes so that the
access is fast.
Data Files: Every Oracle Data Base has one or more physical data files. They store
the data for the database. Every data file is associated
with only one database. Once the Data file is created the size cannot change. To
increase the size of the database to store more data we
have to add data file.
Parameter Files: Parameter file is needed to start an instance.A parameter file
contains the list of instance configuration parameters.
e.g. db_block_buffers = 500 db_name = ORA7 db_domain = u.s.acme lang
Control Files: Control files record the physical structure of the data files and
redo log files
They contain the Db name, name and location of dbs, data files, redo log files and
time stamp.
Q. Some of the terms related to Physical Storage of the Data.
47
The finest level of granularity of the data base is the data blocks.
Data Block : One Data Block correspond to specific number of physical database
space
Extent : Extent is the number of specific number of contiguous data blocks.
Segments : Set of Extents allocated for Extents. There are three types of Segments.
a) Data Segment: Non Clustered Table has data segment data of every table is stored
in cluster data segment
b) Index Segment: Each Index has index segment that stores data
c) Roll Back Segment: Temporarily store 'undo' information
Q. What are the Pct Free and Pct Used?
Pct Free is used to denote the percentage of the free space that is to be left when
creating a table. Similarly Pct Used is used to denote the
percentage of the used space that is to be used when creating a table E.g. Pctfree
20, Pctused 40
Q. What is Row Chaining?
The data of a row in a table may not be able to fit the same data block. Data for
row is stored in a chain of data blocks.
Q. What is a 2 Phase Commit?
Two Phase commit is used in distributed data base systems. This is useful to
maintain the integrity of the database so that all the users see
the same values. It contains DML statements or Remote Procedural calls that
reference a remote object.
There are basically 2 phases in a 2 phase commit.
a) Prepare Phase: Global coordinator asks participants to prepare
b) Commit Phase: Commit all participants to coordinator to Prepared, Read only or
abort Reply
A two-phase commit mechanism guarantees that all database servers participating in
a distributed transaction either all commit or all roll
back the statements in the transaction. A two-phase commit mechanism also protects
implicit DML operations performed by integrity
constraints, remote procedure calls, and triggers.
Q. What is the difference between deleting and truncating of tables?
Deleting a table will not remove the rows from the table but entry is there in the
database dictionary and it can be retrieved But truncating
a table deletes it completely and it cannot be retrieved.
Q. What are mutating tables?
When a table is in state of transition it is said to be mutating. E.g. If a row has
been deleted then the table is said to be mutating and no
operations can be done on the table except select.
Q. What are Codd Rules?
Codd Rules describe the ideal nature of a RDBMS. No RDBMS satisfies all the 12 codd
rules and Oracle Satisfies 11 of the 12 rules and is
the only RDBMS to satisfy the maximum number of rules.
Q. What is Normalization?
Normalization is the process of organizing the tables to remove the redundancy.
There are mainly 5 Normalization rules.
1 Normal Form - A table is said to be in 1st Normal Form when the attributes are
atomic
2 Normal Form - A table is said to be in 2nd Normal Form when all the candidate
keys are dependant on the primary key
3rd Normal Form - A table is said to be third Normal form when it is not dependant
transitively
Q. What is the Difference between a post query and a pre query?
A post query will fire for every row that is fetched but the pre query will fire
only once.
Q. How can we delete the duplicate rows in the table?
We can delete the duplicate rows in the table by using the Rowid.
Delete emp where rowid=(select max(rowid) from emp group by empno)
Delete emp a where rownum=(select max(rownum) from emp g where a.empno=b.empno)
Q. Can U disable database trigger? How?
Yes. With respect to table ALTER TABLE TABLE [ DISABLE all_trigger ]
Q. What are pseudocolumns? Name them?
A pseudocolumn behaves like a table column, but is not actually stored in the
table. You can select from pseudocolumns, but you cannot insert,
update, or delete their values. This section describes these pseudocolumns:
* CURRVAL * NEXTVAL * LEVEL * ROWID * ROWNUM
Q. How many columns can table have?
The number of columns in a table can range from 1 to 254.
Q. Is space acquired in blocks or extents?
In extents.
48
Q. What is clustered index?

In an indexed cluster, rows are stored together based on their cluster key values.
Can not be applied for HASH.
Q. What are the datatypes supported By oracle (INTERNAL)?
varchar2, Number, Char, MLSLABEL.
Q. What are attributes of cursor?
%FOUND , %NOTFOUND , %ISOPEN,%ROWCOUNT
Q. Can you use select in FROM clause of SQL select ? Yes.
Q. Describe the difference between a procedure, function and anonymous pl/sql
block.
Candidate should mention use of DECLARE statement, a function must return a value
while a procedure doesn’t have to.
Q. What is a mutating table error and how can you get around it?
This happens with triggers. It occurs because the trigger is trying to modify a row
it is currently using. The usual fix involves either use of
views or temporary tables so the database is selecting from one while updating the
other.
Q. Describe the use of %ROWTYPE and %TYPE in PL/SQL.
%ROWTYPE allows you to associate a variable with an entire table row. The %TYPE
associates a variable with a single column type.
Q. What packages (if any) has Oracle provided for use by developers?
Oracle provides the DBMS_ series of packages. There are many which developers
should be aware of such as DBMS_SQL, DBMS_PIPE,
DBMS_TRANSACTION, DBMS_LOCK, DBMS_ALERT, DBMS_OUTPUT, DBMS_JOB, DBMS_UTILITY,
DBMS_DDL, UTL_FILE. If they
can mention a few of these and describe how they used them, even better. If they
include the SQL routines provided by Oracle, great, but
not really what was asked.
Q. Describe the use of PL/SQL tables.
PL/SQL tables are scalar arrays that can be referenced by a binary integer. They
can be used to hold values for use in later queries or
calculations. In Oracle 8 they will be able to be of the %ROWTYPE designation, or
RECORD.
Q. When is a declare statement needed?
The DECLARE statement is used in PL/SQL anonymous blocks such as with stand alone,
non-stored PL/SQL procedures. It must come
first in a PL/SQL standalone file if it is used.
Q. In what order should a open/fetch/loop set of commands in a PL/SQL block be
implemented if you use the %NOTFOUND
cursor variable in the exit when statement? Why?
OPEN then FETCH then LOOP followed by the exit when. If not specified in this order
will result in the final return being done twice
because of the way the %NOTFOUND is handled by PL/SQL.
Q. What are SQLCODE and SQLERRM and why are they important for PL/SQL developers?
SQLCODE returns the value of the error number for the last error encountered. The
SQLERRM returns the actual error message for the
last error encountered. They can be used in exception handling to report, or, store
in an error log table, the error that occurred in the code.
These are especially useful for the WHEN OTHERS exception.
Q. How can you find within a PL/SQL block, if a cursor is open?
Use the %ISOPEN cursor status variable.
Q. How can you generate debugging output from PL/SQL?
Use the DBMS_OUTPUT package. Another possible method is to just use the SHOW ERROR
command, but this only shows errors. The
DBMS_OUTPUT package can be used to show intermediate results from loops and the
status of variables as the procedure is executed.
The new package UTL_FILE can also be used.
Q. What are the types of triggers?
There are 12 types of triggers in PL/SQL that consist of combinations of the
BEFORE, AFTER, ROW, TABLE, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE
and ALL key words:
BEFORE ALL ROW INSERT
AFTER ALL ROW INSERT
BEFORE INSERT
AFTER INSERT
49
Q. How can variables be passed to a SQL routine?

By use of the & or double && symbol. For passing in variables numbers can be used
(&1, &2,...,&8) to pass the values after the command
into the SQLPLUS session. To be prompted for a specific variable, place the
ampersanded variable in the code itself:
“select * from dba_tables where owner=&owner_name;” . Use of double ampersands
tells SQLPLUS to resubstitute the value for each
subsequent use of the variable, a single ampersand will cause a reprompt for the
value unless an ACCEPT statement is used to get the
value from the user.
Q. You want to include a carriage return/linefeed in your output from a SQL script,
how can you do this?
The best method is to use the CHR() function (CHR(10) is a return/linefeed) and the
concatenation function “||”. Another method, although
it is hard to document and isn’t always portable is to use the return/linefeed as a
part of a quoted string.
Q. How can you call a PL/SQL procedure from SQL?
By use of the EXECUTE (short form EXEC) command. You can also wrap the call in a
BEGIN END block and treat it as an anonymous
PL/SQL block.
Q. How do you execute a host operating system command from within SQL?
By use of the exclamation point “!” (in UNIX and some other OS) or the HOST (HO)
command.
Q. You want to use SQL to build SQL, what is this called and give an example?
This is called dynamic SQL. An example would be:
set lines 90 pages 0 termout off feedback off verify off
spool drop_all.sql
select ‘drop user ‘||username||’ cascade;’ from dba_users
where username not in (“SYS’,’SYSTEM’);
spool off
Essentially you are looking to see that they know to include a command (in this
case DROP USER...CASCADE;) and that you need to
concatenate using the ‘||’ the values selected from the database.
Q. What SQLPlus command is used to format output from a select?
This is best done with the COLUMN command.
Q. You want to group the following set of select returns, what can you group on?
Max(sum_of_cost), min(sum_of_cost), count(item_no), item_no
The only column that can be grouped on is the “item_no” column, the rest have
aggregate functions associated with them.
Q. What special Oracle feature allows you to specify how the cost based system
treats a SQL statement?
The COST based system allows the use of HINTs to control the optimizer path
selection. If they can give some example hints such as
FIRST ROWS, ALL ROWS, USING INDEX, STAR, even better.
Q. You want to determine the location of identical rows in a table before
attempting to place a unique index on the table, how can
this be done?
Oracle tables always have one guaranteed unique column, the rowid column. If you
use a min/max function against your rowid and then
select against the proposed primary key you can squeeze out the rowids of the
duplicate rows pretty quick. For example:
select rowid from emp e where e.rowid > (select min(x.rowid)
from emp x where x.emp_no = e.emp_no);
In the situation where multiple columns make up the proposed key, they must all be
used in the where clause.
Q. What is a Cartesian product?
A Cartesian product is the result of an unrestricted join of two or more tables.
The result set of a three table Cartesian product will have x *
y * z number of rows where x, y, z correspond to the number of rows in each table
involved in the join. This occurs if there are not at least
n-1 joins where n is the number of tables in a SELECT.
Q. You are joining a local and a remote table, the network manager complains about
the traffic involved, how can you reduce the
network traffic?
Push the processing of the remote data to the remote instance by using a view to
pre-select the information for the join. This will result in
only the data required for the join being sent across.
50
Q. What is the default ordering of an ORDER BY clause in a SELECT statement?

Ascending
Q. What is tkprof and how is it used?
The tkprof tool is a tuning tool used to determine cpu and execution times for SQL
statements. You use it by first setting timed_statistics to
true in the initialization file and then turning on tracing for either the entire
database via the sql_trace parameter or for the session using the
ALTER SESSION command. Once the trace file is generated you run the tkprof tool
against the trace file and then look at the output from
the tkprof tool. This can also be used to generate explain plan output.
Q. What is explain plan and how is it used?
The EXPLAIN PLAN command is a tool to tune SQL statements. To use it you must have
an explain_table generated in the user you are
running the explain plan for. This is created using the utlxplan.sql script. Once
the explain plan table exists you run the explain plan
command giving as its argument the SQL statement to be explained. The explain_plan
table is then queried to see the execution plan of
the statement. Explain plans can also be run using tkprof.
Q. How do you set the number of lines on a page of output? The width?
The SET command in SQLPLUS is used to control the number of lines generated per
page and the width of those lines, for example SET
PAGESIZE 60 LINESIZE 80 will generate reports that are 60 lines long with a line
width of 80 characters. The PAGESIZE and LINESIZE
options can be shortened to PAGES and LINES.
Q. How do you prevent output from coming to the screen?
The SET option TERMOUT controls output to the screen. Setting TERMOUT OFF turns off
screen output. This option can be shortened to
TERM.
Q. How do you prevent Oracle from giving you informational messages during and
after a SQL statement execution?
The SET options FEEDBACK and VERIFY can be set to OFF.
Q. How do you generate file output from SQL? By use of the SPOOL command.
Data Modeler:
Q. Describe third normal form?
Expected answer: Something like: In third normal form all attributes in an entity
are related to the primary key and only to the primary key
Q. Is the following statement true or false? Why or why not?
“All relational databases must be in third normal form”
False. While 3NF is good for logical design most databases, if they have more than
just a few tables, will not perform well using full 3NF.
Usually some entities will be denormalized in the logical to physical transfer
process.
Q. What is an ERD?
An ERD is an Entity-Relationship-Diagram. It is used to show the entities and
relationships for a database logical model.
Q. Why are recursive relationships bad? How do you resolve them?
A recursive relationship (one where a table relates to itself) is bad when it is a
hard relationship (i.e. neither side is a “may” both are “must”)
as this can result in it not being possible to put in a top or perhaps a bottom of
the table (for example in the EMPLOYEE table you couldn’t
put in the PRESIDENT of the company because he has no boss, or the junior janitor
because he has no subordinates). These type of
relationships are usually resolved by adding a small intersection entity.
Q. What does a hard one-to-one relationship mean (one where the relationship on
both ends is “must”)?
This means the two entities should probably be made into one entity.
Q. How should a many-to-many relationship be handled? By adding an intersection
entity table
Q. What is an artificial (derived) primary key? When should an artificial (or
derived) primary key be used?
A derived key comes from a sequence. Usually it is used when a concatenated key
becomes too cumbersome to use as a foreign key.
Q. When should you consider denormalization?
Whenever performance analysis indicates it would be beneficial to do so without
compromising data integrity.
Q. What is a Schema?
Associated with each database user is a schema. A schema is a collection of schema
objects. Schema objects include tables, views,
sequences, synonyms, indexes, clusters, database links, snapshots, procedures,
functions, and packages.
Q. What do you mean by table?
Tables are the basic unit of data storage in an Oracle database. Data is stored in
rows and columns.
51
A row is a collection of column information corresponding to a single record.

Q. Is there an alternative of dropping a column from a table? If yes, what?
Dropping a column in a large table takes a considerable amount of time. A quicker
alternative is to mark a column as unused with the SET
UNUSED clause of the ALTER TABLE statement. This makes the column data unavailable,
although the data remains in each row of the
table. After marking a column as unused, you can add another column that has the
same name to the table. The unused column can then
be dropped at a later time when you want to reclaim the space occupied by the
column data.
Q. What is a rowid?
The rowid identifies each row piece by its location or address. Once assigned, a
given row piece retains its rowid until the corresponding
row is deleted, or exported and imported using the Export and Import utilities.
Q. What is a view? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
A view is a tailored presentation of the data contained in one or more tables or
other views. A view takes the output of a query and treats it
as a table. Therefore, a view can be thought of as a stored query or a virtual
table.
Unlike a table, a view is not allocated any storage space, nor does a view actually
contain data. Rather, a view is defined by a query that
extracts or derives data from the tables that the view references. These tables are
called base tables. Base tables can in turn be actual
tables or can be views themselves (including snapshots). Because a view is based on
other objects, a view requires no storage other than
storage for the definition of the view (the stored query) in the data dictionary.
Q. What are the advantages of having a view?
The advantages of having a view are:
 To provide an additional level of table security by restricting access to a
predetermined set of rows or columns of a table
 To hide data complexity
 To simplify statements for the user
 To present the data in a different perspective from that of the base table
 To isolate applications from changes in definitions of base tables
 To save complex queries
For example, a query can perform extensive calculations with table information.
By saving this query as a view, you can perform the calculations each time the view
is queried.
Q. What is a Materialized View? (Honeywell, KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Materialized views, also called snapshots, are schema objects that can be used to
summarize, precompute, replicate, and distribute data.
They are suitable in various computing environments especially for data
warehousing.
From a physical design point of view, Materialized Views resembles tables or
partitioned tables and behave like indexes.
Q. What is the significance of Materialized Views in data warehousing?
In data warehouses, materialized views are used to precompute and store aggregated
data such as sums and averages. Materialized
views in these environments are typically referred to as summaries because they
store summarized data. They can also be used to
precompute joins with or without aggregations.
Cost-based optimization can use materialized views to improve query performance by
automatically recognizing when a materialized view
can and should be used to satisfy a request. The optimizer transparently rewrites
the request to use the materialized view. Queries are
then directed to the materialized view and not to the underlying detail tables or
views.
Q. Differentiate between Views and Materialized Views? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Q. What is the major difference between an index and Materialized view?
Unlike indexes, materialized views can be accessed directly using a SELECT
statement.
Q. What are the procedures for refreshing Materialized views?
Oracle maintains the data in materialized views by refreshing them after changes
are made to their master tables.
The refresh method can be:
a) incremental (fast refresh) or
b) complete
For materialized views that use the fast refresh method, a materialized view log or
direct loader log keeps a record of changes to the
master tables.
Materialized views can be refreshed either on demand or at regular time intervals.
Alternatively, materialized views in the same database as their master tables can
be refreshed whenever a transaction commits its
changes to the master tables.
Q. What are materialized view logs?
A materialized view log is a schema object that records changes to a master table’s
data so that a materialized view defined on the master
table can be refreshed incrementally. Another name for materialized view log is
snapshot log.
Each materialized view log is associated with a single master table. The
materialized view log resides in the same database and schema
as its master table.
52
Q. What is a synonym?
A synonym is an alias for any table, view, snapshot, sequence, procedure, function,
or package. Because a synonym is simply an alias, it
requires no storage other than its definition in the data dictionary.
Q. What are the advantages of having synonyms?
Synonyms are often used for security and convenience.
For example, they can do the following:
1. Mask the name and owner of an object
2. Provide location transparency for remote objects of a distributed database
3. Simplify SQL statements for database users
Q. What are the advantages of having an index? Or What is an index?
The purpose of an index is to provide pointers to the rows in a table that contain
a given key value. In a regular index, this is achieved by
storing a list of rowids for each key corresponding to the rows with that key
value. Oracle stores each key value repeatedly with each
stored rowid.
Q. What are the different types of indexes supported by Oracle?
The different types of indexes are:
a. B-tree indexes
b. B-tree cluster indexes
c. Hash cluster indexes
d. Reverse key indexes
e. Bitmap indexes
Q. Can we have function based indexes?
Yes, we can create indexes on functions and expressions that involve one or more
columns in the table being indexed. A function-based
index precomputes the value of the function or expression and stores it in the
index.
You can create a function-based index as either a B-tree or a bitmap index.
Q. What are the restrictions on function based indexes?
The function used for building the index can be an arithmetic expression or an
expression that contains a PL/SQL function, package
function, C callout, or SQL function. The expression cannot contain any aggregate
functions, and it must be DETERMINISTIC. For building
an index on a column containing an object type, the function can be a method of
that object, such as a map method. However, you cannot
build a function-based index on a LOB column, REF, or nested table column, nor can
you build a function-based index if the object type
contains a LOB, REF, or nested table.
Q. What are the advantages of having a B-tree index?
The major advantages of having a B-tree index are:
1. B-trees provide excellent retrieval performance for a wide range of queries,
including exact match and range searches.
2. Inserts, updates, and deletes are efficient, maintaining key order for fast
retrieval.
3. B-tree performance is good for both small and large tables, and does not degrade
as the size of a table grows.
Q. What is a bitmap index? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
a given key value. In a regular index, this is achieved by
storing a list of rowids for each key corresponding to the rows with that key
value. Oracle stores each key value repeatedly with each
stored rowid. In a bitmap index, a bitmap for each key value is used instead of a
list of rowids.
Each bit in the bitmap corresponds to a possible rowid. If the bit is set, then it
means that the row with the corresponding rowid contains the
key value. A mapping function converts the bit position to an actual rowid, so the
bitmap index provides the same functionality as a regular
index even though it uses a different representation internally. If the number of
different key values is small, then bitmap indexes are very
space efficient.
Bitmap indexing efficiently merges indexes that correspond to several conditions in
a WHERE clause. Rows that satisfy some, but not all,
conditions are filtered out before the table itself is accessed. This improves
response time, often dramatically.
Q. What are the advantages of having bitmap index for data warehousing
applications? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Bitmap indexing benefits data warehousing applications which have large amounts of
data and ad hoc queries but a low level of concurrent
transactions. For such applications, bitmap indexing provides:
1. Reduced response time for large classes of ad hoc queries
2. A substantial reduction of space usage compared to other indexing techniques
3. Dramatic performance gains even on very low end hardware
4. Very efficient parallel DML and loads
Q. What is the advantage of bitmap index over B-tree index?
Fully indexing a large table with a traditional B-tree index can be prohibitively
expensive in terms of space since the index can be several
times larger than the data in the table. Bitmap indexes are typically only a
fraction of the size of the indexed data in the table.
Q. What is the limitation/drawback of a bitmap index?
Bitmap indexes are not suitable for OLTP applications with large numbers of
concurrent transactions modifying the data. These indexes
are primarily intended for decision support in data warehousing applications where
users typically query the data rather than update it.
Bitmap indexes are not suitable for high-cardinality data.
53
Q. How do you choose between B-tree index and bitmap index?

The advantages of using bitmap indexes are greatest for low cardinality columns:
that is, columns in which the number of distinct values is
small compared to the number of rows in the table. If the values in a column are
repeated more than a hundred times, then the column is a
candidate for a bitmap index. Even columns with a lower number of repetitions and
thus higher cardinality, can be candidates if they tend to
be involved in complex conditions in the WHERE clauses of queries.
For example, on a table with one million rows, a column with 10,000 distinct values
is a candidate for a bitmap index. A bitmap index on
this column can out-perform a B-tree index, particularly when this column is often
queried in conjunction with other columns.
B-tree indexes are most effective for high-cardinality data: that is, data with
many possible values, such as CUSTOMER_NAME or
PHONE_NUMBER. A regular Btree index can be several times larger than the indexed
data. Used appropriately, bitmap indexes can be
significantly smaller than a corresponding B-tree index.
Q. What are clusters?
Clusters are an optional method of storing table data. A cluster is a group of
tables that share the same data blocks because they share
common columns and are often used together.
For example, the EMP and DEPT table share the DEPTNO column. When you cluster the
EMP and DEPT tables, Oracle physically stores
all rows for each department from both the EMP and DEPT tables in the same data
blocks.
Q. What is partitioning? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Partitioning addresses the key problem of supporting very large tables and indexes
by allowing you to decompose them into smaller and
more manageable pieces called partitions. Once partitions are defined, SQL
statements can access and manipulate the partitions rather
than entire tables or indexes. Partitions are especially useful in data warehouse
applications, which commonly store and analyze large
amounts of historical data.
Q. What are the different partitioning methods?
Two primary methods of partitioning are available:
1. range partitioning, which partitions the data in a table or index according to a
range of values, and
2. hash partitioning, which partitions the data according to a hash function.
Another method, composite partitioning, partitions the data by range and further
subdivides the data into sub partitions using a hash
function.
Q. What is the necessity to have table partitions?
The need to partition large tables is driven by:
· Data Warehouse and Business Intelligence demands for ad hoc analysis on great
quantities of historical data
· Cheaper disk storage
· Application performance failure due to use of traditional techniques
Q. What are the advantages of storing each partition in a separate tablespace?
The major advantages are:
1. You can contain the impact of data corruption.
2. You can back up and recover each partition or subpartition independently.
3. You can map partitions or subpartitions to disk drives to balance the I/O load.
Q. What are the advantages of partitioning?
Partitioning is useful for:
1. Very Large Databases (VLDBs)
2. Reducing Downtime for Scheduled Maintenance
3. Reducing Downtime Due to Data Failures
4. DSS Performance
5. I/O Performance
6. Disk Striping: Performance versus Availability
7. Partition Transparency
Q. What is Range Partitioning? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Range partitioning maps rows to partitions based on ranges of column values. Range
partitioning is defined by the partitioning specification
for a table or index:
PARTITION BY RANGE ( column_list ) and by the partitioning specifications for each
individual partition:
VALUES LESS THAN ( value_list )
Q. What is Hash Partitioning?
Hash partitioning uses a hash function on the partitioning columns to stripe data
into partitions. Hash partitioning allows data that does not
lend itself to range partitioning to be easily partitioned for performance reasons
such as parallel DML, partition pruning, and partition-wise
joins.
Q. What are the advantages of Hash partitioning over Range Partitioning?
Hash partitioning is a better choice than range partitioning when:
54
a) You do not know beforehand how much data will map into a given range
b) Sizes of range partitions would differ quite substantially
c) Partition pruning and partition-wise joins on a partitioning key are important
Q. What are the rules for partitioning a table?
A table can be partitioned if:
– It is not part of a cluster
– It does not contain LONG or LONG RAW datatypes
Q. What is a global partitioned index?
In a global partitioned index, the keys in a particular index partition may refer
to rows stored in more than one underlying table partition or
subpartition. A global index can only be range-partitioned, but it can be defined
on any type of partitioned table.
Q. What is a local index?
In a local index, all keys in a particular index partition refer only to rows
stored in a single underlying table partition. A local index is created
by specifying the LOCAL attribute.
Q. What are CLOB and NCLOB datatypes? (Mascot)
The CLOB and NCLOB datatypes store up to four gigabytes of character data in the
database. CLOBs store single-byte character set data
and NCLOBs store fixed-width and varying-width multibyte national character set
data (NCHAR data).
Q. What is PL/SQL?
PL/SQL is Oracle’s procedural language extension to SQL. PL/SQL enables you to mix
SQL statements with procedural constructs. With
PL/SQL, you can define and execute PL/SQL program units such as procedures,
PL/SQL program units generally are categorized as anonymous blocks and stored
procedures.
Q. What is an anonymous block?
An anonymous block is a PL/SQL block that appears within your application and it is
not named or stored in the database.
Q. What is a Stored Procedure?
A stored procedure is a PL/SQL block that Oracle stores in the database and can be
called by name from an application. When you create
a stored procedure, Oracle parses the procedure and stores its parsed
representation in the database.
Q. What is a distributed transaction?
A distributed transaction is a transaction that includes one or more statements
that update data on two or more distinct nodes of a
distributed database.
Q. What are packages? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
A package is a group of related procedures and functions, together with the cursors
and variables they use, stored together in the database
for continued use as a unit.
While packages allow the administrator or application developer the ability to
organize such routines, they also offer increased
functionality (for example, global package variables can be declared and used by
any procedure in the package) and performance (for
example, all objects of the package are parsed, compiled, and loaded into memory
once).
Q. What are procedures and functions? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
A procedure or function is a schema object that consists of a set of SQL statements
and other PL/SQL constructs, grouped together, stored
in the database, and executed as a unit to solve a specific problem or perform a
set of related tasks. Procedures and functions permit the
caller to provide parameters that can be input only, output only, or input and
output values.
Q. What is the difference between Procedure and Function?
Procedures and functions are identical except that functions always return a single
value to the caller, while procedures do not return
values to the caller.
Q. What is a DML and what do they do?
Data manipulation language (DML) statements query or manipulate data in existing
schema objects. They enable you to:
1. Retrieve data from one or more tables or views (SELECT)
2. Add new rows of data into a table or view (INSERT)
3. Change column values in existing rows of a table or view (UPDATE)
4. Remove rows from tables or views (DELETE)
5. See the execution plan for a SQL statement (EXPLAIN PLAN)
6. Lock a table or view, temporarily limiting other users’ access (LOCK TABLE)
Q. What is a DDL and what do they do?
Data definition language (DDL) statements define, alter the structure of, and drop
schema objects. DDL statements enable you to:
1. Create, alter, and drop schema objects and other database structures, including
the database itself and database users
(CREATE, ALTER, DROP)
2. Change the names of schema objects (RENAME)
3. Delete all the data in schema objects without removing the objects’ structure
(TRUNCATE)
55
4. Gather statistics about schema objects, validate object structure, and list
chained rows within objects (ANALYZE)
5. Grant and revoke privileges and roles (GRANT, REVOKE)
6. Turn auditing options on and off (AUDIT, NOAUDIT)
7. Add a comment to the data dictionary (COMMENT)
Q. What are shared sql’s?
Oracle automatically notices when applications send identical SQL statements to the
database. The SQL area used to process the first
occurrence of the statement is shared—that is, used for processing subsequent
occurrences of that same statement. Therefore, only one
shared SQL area exists for a unique statement. Since shared SQL areas are shared
memory areas, any Oracle process can use a shared
SQL area. The sharing of SQL areas reduces memory usage on the database server,
thereby increasing system throughput.
Q. What are triggers?
Oracle allows to define procedures called triggers that execute implicitly when an
INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE statement is issued
against the associated table or, in some cases, against a view, or when database
system actions occur. These procedures can be written
in PL/SQL or Java and stored in the database, or they can be written as C callouts.
Q. What is Cost-based Optimization?
Using the cost-based approach, the optimizer determines which execution plan is
most efficient by considering available access paths and
factoring in information based on statistics for the schema objects (tables or
indexes) accessed by the SQL statement.
Q. What is Rule-Based Optimization?
Using the rule-based approach, the optimizer chooses an execution plan based on the
access paths available and the ranks of these
access paths.
Q. What is meant by degree of parallelism?
The number of parallel execution servers associated with a single operation is
known as the degree of parallelism.
Q. What is meant by data consistency?
Data consistency means that each user sees a consistent view of the data, including
visible changes made by the user’s own transactions
and transactions of other users.
Q. What are Locks?
Locks are mechanisms that prevent destructive interaction between transactions
accessing the same resource—either user objects such
as tables and rows or system objects not visible to users, such as shared data
structures in memory and data dictionary rows.
Q. What are the locking modes used in Oracle?
Oracle uses two modes of locking in a multiuser database:
Exclusive lock mode: Prevents the associates resource from being shared. This lock
mode is obtained to modify data. The first transaction
to lock a resource exclusively is the only transaction that can alter the resource
until the exclusive lock is released.
Share lock mode: Allows the associated resource to be shared, depending on the
operations involved. Multiple users reading data can
share the data, holding share locks to prevent concurrent access by a writer (who
needs an exclusive lock). Several transactions can
acquire share locks on the same resource.
Q. What is a deadlock?
A deadlock can occur when two or more users are waiting for data locked by each
other.
Q. How can you avoid deadlocks?
Multitable deadlocks can usually be avoided if transactions accessing the same
tables lock those tables in the same order, either through
implicit or explicit locks.
For example, all application developers might follow the rule that when both a
master and detail table are updated, the master table is
locked first and then the detail table. If such rules are properly designed and
then followed in all applications, deadlocks are very unlikely to
occur.
Q. What is redo log?
The redo log, present for every Oracle database, records all changes made in an
Oracle database. The redo log of a database consists of
at least two redo log files that are separate from the datafiles (which actually
store a database’s data). As part of database recovery from
an instance or media failure, Oracle applies the appropriate changes in the
database’s redo log to the datafiles, which updates database
data to the instant that the failure occurred.
A database’s redo log can consist of two parts: the online redo log and the
archived redo log.
Q. What are Rollback Segments?
Rollback segments are used for a number of functions in the operation of an Oracle
database. In general, the rollback segments of a
database store the old values of data changed by ongoing transactions for
uncommitted transactions.
Among other things, the information in a rollback segment is used during database
recovery to undo any uncommitted changes applied
from the redo log to the datafiles. Therefore, if database recovery is necessary,
then the data is in a consistent state after the rollback
segments are used to remove all uncommitted data from the datafiles.
Q. What is SGA?
The System Global Area (SGA) is a shared memory region that contains data and
control information for one Oracle instance. An SGA and
the Oracle background processes constitute an Oracle instance.
Oracle allocates the system global area when an instance starts and deallocates it
when the instance shuts down. Each instance has its
own system global area.
56
Users currently connected to an Oracle server share the data in the system global
area. For optimal performance, the entire system global
area should be as large as possible (while still fitting in real memory) to store
as much data in memory as possible and minimize disk I/O.
The information stored within the system global area is divided into several types
of memory structures, including the database buffers,
redo log buffer, and the shared pool. These areas have fixed sizes and are created
during instance startup.
Q. What is PCTFREE?
The PCTFREE parameter sets the minimum percentage of a data block to be reserved as
free space for possible updates to rows that
already exist in that block.
Q. What is PCTUSED?
The PCTUSED parameter sets the minimum percentage of a block that can be used for
row data plus overhead before new rows will be
added to the block. After a data block is filled to the limit determined by
PCTFREE, Oracle considers the block unavailable for the insertion
of new rows until the percentage of that block falls below the parameter PCTUSED.
Until this value is achieved, Oracle uses the free space
of the data block only for updates to rows already contained in the data block.
Notes:
Nulls are stored in the database if they fall between columns with data values. In
these cases they require one byte to store the length of
the column (zero).
Trailing nulls in a row require no storage because a new row header signals that
the remaining columns in the previous row are null. For
example, if the last three columns of a table are null, no information is stored
for those columns. In tables with many columns, the columns
more likely to contain nulls should be defined last to conserve disk space.
Two rows can both contain all nulls without violating a unique index.
NULL values in indexes are considered to be distinct except when all the non-NULL
values in two or more rows of an index are identical, in
which case the rows are considered to be identical. Therefore, UNIQUE indexes
prevent rows containing NULL values from being treated
as identical.
Bitmap indexes include rows that have NULL values, unlike most other types of
indexes. Indexing of nulls can be useful for some types of
SQL statements, such as queries with the aggregate function COUNT.
Bitmap indexes on partitioned tables must be local indexes.
PL/SQL is Oracle’s procedural language extension to SQL. PL/SQL combines the
ease and flexibility of SQL with the procedural functionality of a structured
programming language, such as IF ... THEN, WHILE, and LOOP.
When designing a database application, a developer should consider the
advantages of using stored PL/SQL:
Because PL/SQL  code can be stored centrally in a database, network traffic
between applications and the database is reduced, so application and system
performance increases.
Data access can be controlled by stored PL/SQL code. In this case, the users of 
PL/SQL can access data only as intended by the application developer (unless
another access route is granted).
PL/SQL blocks can be sent by an application to a database, executing complex
operations without excessive network traffic.
Even when PL/SQL is not stored in the database, applications can send blocks of
PL/SQL to the database rather than individual SQL statements, thereby again
reducing network traffic.
The following sections describe the different program units that can be defined and
stored centrally in a database.
Committing and Rolling Back Transactions
The changes made by the SQL statements that constitute a transaction can be either
committed or rolled back. After a transaction is
committed or rolled back, the next transaction begins with the next SQL statement.
Committing a transaction makes permanent the changes resulting from all SQL
statements in the transaction. The changes made by the
SQL statements of a transaction become visible to other user sessions’ transactions
that start only after the transaction is committed.
Rolling back a transaction retracts any of the changes resulting from the SQL
statements in the transaction. After a transaction is rolled
back, the affected data is left unchanged as if the SQL statements in the
transaction were never executed.
Introduction to the Data Dictionary
One of the most important parts of an Oracle database is its data dictionary, which
is
a read-only set of tables that provides information about its associated database.
A
data dictionary contains:
The definitions of all schema objects in the database (tables, views, indexes,
clusters, synonyms, sequences, procedures, functions, packages, triggers,
and so on)
How much space has been allocated for, and is currently used by, the
57
schema objects
Default values for columns
Integrity constraint information
The names of Oracle users
Privileges and roles each user has been granted
Auditing information, such as who has accessed or updated various
schema objects
Other general database information 
The data dictionary is structured in tables and views, just like other database
data.
All the data dictionary tables and views for a given database are stored in that
database’s SYSTEM tablespace.
Not only is the data dictionary central to every Oracle database, it is an
important
tool for all users, from end users to application designers and database
administrators. To access the data dictionary, you use SQL statements. Because the
data dictionary is read-only, you can issue only queries (SELECT statements)
against the tables and views of the data dictionary.
Q. What is the function of DUMMY table?
The table named DUAL is a small table in the data dictionary that Oracle and user
written programs can reference to guarantee a known
result. This table has one column called DUMMY and one row containing the value
"X".
Databases, tablespaces, and datafiels are closely related, but they have important
differences:
Databases and tablespaces: An Oracle database consists of one or more logical
storage units called tablespaces, which collectively store
all of the database’s data.
Tablespaces and datafiles: Each table in an Oracle database consists of one or more
files called datafiles, which are physical structures
that conform with the operating system in which Oracle is running.
databases and datafiles:
A database’s data is collectively stored in the datafiles that
constitute each tablespace of the database. For example, the
simplest Oracle database would have one tablespace and one
datafile. Another database might have three tablespaces, each
consisting of two datafiles (for a total of six datafiles).
Nulls
A null is the absence of a value in a column of a row. Nulls indicate missing,
unknown, or inapplicable data. A null should not be used to imply any other value,
such as zero. A column allows nulls unless a NOT NULL or PRIMARY KEY
integrity constraint has been defined for the column, in which case no row can be
inserted without a value for that column.
these cases they require one byte to store the length of the column (zero).
the
remaining columns in the previous row are null. For example, if the last three
columns of a table are null, no information is stored for those columns. In tables
with many columns, the columns more likely to contain nulls should be defined last
to conserve disk space.
Most comparisons between nulls and other values are by definition neither true nor
false, but unknown. To identify nulls in SQL, use the IS NULL predicate. Use the
SQL function NVL to convert nulls to non-null values.
Nulls are not indexed, except when the cluster key column value is null or the
index
is a bitmap index.
What are different types of locks?
Q. Master table and Child table performances and comparisons in Oracle?
Q. What are the different types of Cursors? Explain. (Honeywell)
Q. What are the different types of Deletes?
Q. Can a View be updated?
Interview Questions from Honeywell
58
1. What is pragma?
2. Can you write commit in triggers?
3. Can you call user defined functions in select statements
4. Can you call insert/update/delete in select statements. If yes how? If no what
is the other way?
5. After update how do you know, how many records got updated
6. Select statement does not retrieve any records. What exception is raised?
Interview Questions from Shreesoft
1. How many columns can a PLSQL table have
Interview Questions from mascot
1. What is Load balancing & what u have used to do this? (SQL Loader )
2. What r Routers?
PL/SQL
1. What are different types of joins?
2. Difference between Packages and Procedures
3. Difference between Function and Procedures
4. How many types of triggers are there? When do you use Triggers
5. Can you write DDL statements in Triggers? (No)
6. What is Hint?
7. How do you tune a SQL query?
Interview Questions from KPIT Infotech, Pune
1. Package body
2. What is molar query?
3. What is row level security
General:
Why ORACLE is the best database for Datawarehousing
For data loading in Oracle, what are conventional loading and direct-path loading ?
7. If you use oracle SQL*Loader, how do you transform data with it during loading ?
Example.
Three ways SQL*Loader could doad data, what are those three types ?
What are the contents of "bad files" and "discard files" when using SQL*Loader ?
How do you use commit frequencies ? how does it affect loading performance ?
What are the other factors of the database on which the loading performance
depend ?
* WHAT IS PARALLELISM ?
* WHAT IS A PARALLEL QUERY ?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT WAYS OF LOADING DATA TO DATAWAREHOUSE USING ORACLE?
* WHAT IS TABLE PARTITIONING? HOW IT IS USEFUL TO WAREHOUSE DATABASE?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF PARTITIONING IN ORACLE?
* WHAT IS A MATERIALIZED VIEW? HOW IT IS DIFFERENT FROM NORMAL AND INLINE VIEWS?
* WHAT IS INDEXING? WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF INDEXES SUPPORTED BY ORACLE?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT STORAGE OPTIONS SUPPORTED BY ORACLE?
* WHAT IS QUERY OPTIMIZER? WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF OPTIMIZERS SUPPORTED BY
ORACLE?
* EXPLAIN ROLLUP,CUBE,RANK AND DENSE_RANK FUNCTIONS OF ORACLE 8i.
that is, columns in which the number of distinct values is
small compared to the number of rows in the table. A gender column, which only has
two distinct values (male and female), is ideal for a
bitmap index. However, data warehouse administrators will also choose to build
bitmap indexes on columns with much higher cardinalities.
Local vs global: A B-tree index on a partitioned table can be local or global.
Global indexes must be
fully rebuilt after a direct load, which can be very costly when loading a
relatively
small number of rows into a large table. For this reason, it is strongly
recommended
that indexes on partitioned tables should be defined as local indexes unless there
is
a well-justified performance requirement for a global index. Bitmap indexes on
partitioned tables are always local.
Why Constraints are Useful in a Data Warehouse
Constraints provide a mechanism for ensuring that data conforms to guidelines
specified by the database administrator. The most common types of constraints
include unique constraints (ensuring that a given column is unique), not-null
constraints, and foreign-key constraints (which ensure that two keys share a
primary key-foreign key relationship).
Materialized Views for Data Warehouses
In data warehouses, materialized views can be used to precompute and store
59
aggregated data such as the sum of sales. Materialized views in these environments
are typically referred to as summaries, because they store summarized data. They
can also be used to precompute joins with or without aggregations. A materialized
view eliminates the overhead associated with expensive joins or aggregations for a
large or important class of queries.
The Need for Materialized Views
Materialized views are used in data warehouses to increase the speed of queries on
very large databases. Queries to large databases often involve joins between tables
or aggregations such as SUM, or both. These operations are very expensive in terms
of time and processing power.
How does MV’s work?
The query optimizer can use materialized views by
automatically recognizing when an existing materialized view can and should be
used to satisfy a request. It then transparently rewrites the request to use the
materialized view. Queries are then directed to the materialized view and not to
the
underlying detail tables. In general, rewriting queries to use materialized views
rather than detail tables results in a significant performance gain.
If a materialized view is to be used by query rewrite, it must be stored in the
same
database as its fact or detail tables. A materialized view can be partitioned, and
you
can define a materialized view on a partitioned table and one or more indexes on
the materialized view.
The types of materialized views are:
Materialized Views with Joins and Aggregates
Single-Table Aggregate Materialized Views
Materialized Views Containing Only Joins
Some Useful system tables:
user_tab_partitions
user_tab_columns
Doc3
Repository related Questions
Q. What is the difference between PowerCenter and PowerMart?
With PowerCenter, you receive all product functionality, including the ability to
register multiple servers, share metadata across
repositories, and partition data.
A PowerCenter license lets you create a single repository that you can configure as
a global repository, the core component of a data
warehouse.
PowerMart includes all features except distributed metadata, multiple registered
servers, and data partitioning. Also, the various options
available with PowerCenter (such as PowerCenter Integration Server for BW,
PowerConnect for IBM DB2, PowerConnect for IBM
MQSeries, PowerConnect for SAP R/3, PowerConnect for Siebel, and PowerConnect for
PeopleSoft) are not available with PowerMart.
Q. What are the new features and enhancements in PowerCenter 5.1?
The major features and enhancements to PowerCenter 5.1 are:
a) Performance Enhancements
· High precision decimal arithmetic. The Informatica Server optimizes data
throughput to increase performance of sessions using
the Enable Decimal Arithmetic option.
· To_Decimal and Aggregate functions. The Informatica Server uses improved
algorithms to increase performance of
To_Decimal and all aggregate functions such as percentile, median, and average.
· Cache management. The Informatica Server uses better cache management to increase
performance of Aggregator, Joiner,
Lookup, and Rank transformations.
· Partition sessions with sorted aggregation. You can partition sessions with
Aggregator transformation that use sorted input.
This improves memory usage and increases performance of sessions that have sorted
data.
60
b) Relaxed Data Code Page Validation

When enabled, the Informatica Client and Informatica Server lift code page
selection and validation restrictions. You can select
any supported code page for source, target, lookup, and stored procedure data.
c) Designer Features and Enhancements
· Debug mapplets. You can debug a mapplet within a mapping in the Mapping Designer.
You can set breakpoints in
transformations in the mapplet.
· Support for slash character (/) in table and field names. You can use the
Designer to import source and target definitions with
table and field names containing the slash character (/). This allows you to import
SAP BW source definitions by connecting
directly to the underlying database tables.
d) Server Manager Features and Enhancements
· Continuous sessions. You can schedule a session to run continuously. A continuous
session starts automatically when the Load
Manager starts. When the session stops, it restarts immediately without
rescheduling. Use continuous sessions when reading real
time sources, such as IBM MQSeries.
· Partition sessions with sorted aggregators. You can partition sessions with
sorted aggregators in a mapping.
· Register multiple servers against a local repository. You can register multiple
PowerCenter Servers against a local repository.
Q. What is a repository?
The Informatica repository is a relational database that stores information, or
metadata, used by the Informatica Server and Client tools.
The repository also stores administrative information such as usernames and
passwords, permissions and privileges, and product version.
We create and maintain the repository with the Repository Manager client tool. With
the Repository Manager, we can also create folders to
organize metadata and groups to organize users.
Q. What are different kinds of repository objects? And what it will contain?
Repository objects displayed in the Navigator can include sources, targets,
transformations, mappings, mapplets, shortcuts, sessions,
batches, and session logs.
Q. What is a metadata?
Designing a data mart involves writing and storing a complex set of instructions.
You need to know where to get data (sources), how to
change it, and where to write the information (targets). PowerMart and PowerCenter
call this set of instructions metadata. Each piece of
metadata (for example, the description of a source table in an operational
database) can contain comments about it.
In summary, Metadata can include information such as mappings describing how to
transform source data, sessions indicating when you
want the Informatica Server to perform the transformations, and connect strings for
sources and targets.
Q. What are folders?
Folders let you organize your work in the repository, providing a way to separate
different types of metadata or different projects into easily
identifiable areas.
Q. What is a Shared Folder?
A shared folder is one, whose contents are available to all other folders in the
same repository. If we plan on using the same piece of
metadata in several projects (for example, a description of the CUSTOMERS table
that provides data for a variety of purposes), you might
put that metadata in the shared folder.
Q. What are mappings?
A mapping specifies how to move and transform data from sources to targets.
Mappings include source and target definitions and
transformations. Transformations describe how the Informatica Server transforms
data. Mappings can also include shortcuts, reusable
transformations, and mapplets. Use the Mapping Designer tool in the Designer to
create mappings.
Q. What are mapplets?
61
You can design a mapplet to contain sets of transformation logic to be reused in

multiple mappings within a folder, a repository, or a
domain. Rather than recreate the same set of transformations each time, you can
create a mapplet containing the transformations, then
add instances of the mapplet to individual mappings. Use the Mapplet Designer tool
in the Designer to create mapplets.
Q. What are Transformations?
A transformation generates, modifies, or passes data through ports that you connect
in a mapping or mapplet. When you build a mapping,
you add transformations and configure them to handle data according to your
business purpose. Use the Transformation Developer tool in
the Designer to create transformations.
Q. What are Reusable transformations?
You can design a transformation to be reused in multiple mappings within a folder,
a repository, or a domain. Rather than recreate the
same transformation each time, you can make the transformation reusable, then add
instances of the transformation to individual
mappings. Use the Transformation Developer tool in the Designer to create reusable
transformations.
Q. What are Sessions and Batches?
Sessions and batches store information about how and when the Informatica Server
moves data through mappings. You create a session
for each mapping you want to run. You can group several sessions together in a
batch. Use the Server Manager to create sessions and
batches.
Q. What are Shortcuts?
We can create shortcuts to objects in shared folders. Shortcuts provide the easiest
way to reuse objects. We use a shortcut as if it were the
actual object, and when we make a change to the original object, all shortcuts
inherit the change.
Shortcuts to folders in the same repository are known as local shortcuts. Shortcuts
to the global repository are called global shortcuts.
We use the Designer to create shortcuts.
Q. What are Source definitions?
Detailed descriptions of database objects (tables, views, synonyms), flat files,
XML files, or Cobol files that provide source data. For
example, a source definition might be the complete structure of the EMPLOYEES
table, including the table name, column names and
datatypes, and any constraints applied to these columns, such as NOT NULL or
PRIMARY KEY. Use the Source Analyzer tool in the
Designer to import and create source definitions.
Q. What are Target definitions?
Detailed descriptions for database objects, flat files, Cobol files, or XML files
to receive transformed data. During a session, the Informatica
Server writes the resulting data to session targets. Use the Warehouse Designer
tool in the Designer to import or create target definitions.
Q. What is Dynamic Data Store?
The need to share data is just as pressing as the need to share metadata. Often,
several data marts in the same organization need the
same information. For example, several data marts may need to read the same product
data from operational sources, perform the same
profitability calculations, and format this information to make it easy to review.
If each data mart reads, transforms, and writes this product data separately, the
throughput for the entire organization is lower than it could
be. A more efficient approach would be to read, transform, and write the data to
one central data store shared by all data marts.
Transformation is a processing-intensive task, so performing the profitability
calculations once saves time.
Therefore, this kind of dynamic data store (DDS) improves throughput at the level
of the entire organization, including all data marts. To
improve performance further, you might want to capture incremental changes to
sources. For example, rather than reading all the product
data each time you update the DDS, you can improve performance by capturing only
the inserts, deletes, and updates that have occurred
in the PRODUCTS table since the last time you updated the DDS.
The DDS has one additional advantage beyond performance: when you move data into
the DDS, you can format it in a standard fashion.
For example, you can prune sensitive employee data that should not be stored in any
data mart. Or you can display date and time values
in a standard format. You can perform these and other data cleansing tasks when you
move data into the DDS instead of performing them
repeatedly in separate data marts.
Q. When should you create the dynamic data store? Do you need a DDS at all?
To decide whether you should create a dynamic data store (DDS), consider the
following issues:
62
· How much data do you need to store in the DDS? The one principal advantage of
data marts is the selectivity of information
included in it. Instead of a copy of everything potentially relevant from the OLTP
database and flat files, data marts contain only
the information needed to answer specific questions for a specific audience (for
example, sales performance data used by the
sales division). A dynamic data store is a hybrid of the galactic warehouse and the
individual data mart, since it includes all the
data needed for all the data marts it supplies. If the dynamic data store contains
nearly as much information as the OLTP source,
you might not need the intermediate step of the dynamic data store. However, if the
dynamic data store includes substantially less
than all the data in the source databases and flat files, you should consider
creating a DDS staging area.
· What kind of standards do you need to enforce in your data marts? Creating a DDS
is an important technique in enforcing
standards. If data marts depend on the DDS for information, you can provide that
data in the range and format you want everyone
to use. For example, if you want all data marts to include the same information on
customers, you can put all the data needed for
this standard customer profile in the DDS. Any data mart that reads customer data
from the DDS should include all the information
in this profile.
· How often do you update the contents of the DDS? If you plan to frequently update
data in data marts, you need to update the
contents of the DDS at least as often as you update the individual data marts that
the DDS feeds. You may find it easier to read
data directly from source databases and flat file systems if it becomes burdensome
to update the DDS fast enough to keep up
with the needs of individual data marts. Or, if particular data marts need updates
significantly faster than others, you can bypass
the DDS for these fast update data marts.
· Is the data in the DDS simply a copy of data from source systems, or do you plan
to reformat this information before
storing it in the DDS? One advantage of the dynamic data store is that, if you plan
on reformatting information in the same
fashion for several data marts, you only need to format it once for the dynamic
data store. Part of this question is whether you
keep the data normalized when you copy it to the DDS.
· How often do you need to join data from different systems? On occasion, you may
need to join records queried from different
databases or read from different flat file systems. The more frequently you need to
perform this type of heterogeneous join, the
more advantageous it would be to perform all such joins within the DDS, then make
the results available to all data marts that use
the DDS as a source.
Q. What is a Global repository?
The centralized repository in a domain, a group of connected repositories. Each
domain can contain one global repository. The global
repository can contain common objects to be shared throughout the domain through
global shortcuts. Once created, you cannot change a
global repository to a local repository. You can promote an existing local
repository to a global repository.
Q. What is Local Repository?
Each local repository in the domain can connect to the global repository and use
objects in its shared folders. A folder in a local repository
can be copied to other local repositories while keeping all local and global
shortcuts intact.
Q. What are the different types of locks?
There are five kinds of locks on repository objects:
· Read lock. Created when you open a repository object in a folder for which you do
not have write permission. Also created when
you open an object with an existing write lock.
· Write lock. Created when you create or edit a repository object in a folder for
which you have write permission.
· Execute lock. Created when you start a session or batch, or when the Informatica
Server starts a scheduled session or batch.
· Fetch lock. Created when the repository reads information about repository
objects from the database.
· Save lock. Created when you save information to the repository.
Q. After creating users and user groups, and granting different sets of privileges,
I find that none of the repository users can
perform certain tasks, even the Administrator.
Repository privileges are limited by the database privileges granted to the
database user who created the repository. If the database user
(one of the default users created in the Administrators group) does not have full
database privileges in the repository database, you need to
edit the database user to allow all privileges in the database.
Q. I created a new group and removed the Browse Repository privilege from the
group. Why does every user in the group still
have that privilege?
Privileges granted to individual users take precedence over any group restrictions.
Browse Repository is a default privilege granted to all
new users and groups. Therefore, to remove the privilege from users in a group, you
must remove the privilege from the group, and every
user in the group.
Q. I do not want a user group to create or edit sessions and batches, but I need
them to access the Server Manager to stop the
Informatica Server.
63
To permit a user to access the Server Manager to stop the Informatica Server, you
must grant them both the Create Sessions and
Batches, and Administer Server privileges. To restrict the user from creating or
editing sessions and batches, you must restrict the user's
write permissions on a folder level.
Alternatively, the user can use pmcmd to stop the Informatica Server with the
Administer Server privilege alone.
Q. How does read permission affect the use of the command line program, pmcmd?
To use pmcmd, you do not need to view a folder before starting a session or batch
within the folder. Therefore, you do not need read
permission to start sessions or batches with pmcmd. You must, however, know the
exact name of the session or batch and the folder in
which it exists.
With pmcmd, you can start any session or batch in the repository if you have the
Session Operator privilege or execute permission on the
folder.
Q. My privileges indicate I should be able to edit objects in the repository, but I
cannot edit any metadata.
You may be working in a folder with restrictive permissions. Check the folder
permissions to see if you belong to a group whose privileges
are restricted by the folder owner.
Q. I have the Administer Repository Privilege, but I cannot access a repository
using the Repository Manager.
To perform administration tasks in the Repository Manager with the Administer
Repository privilege, you must also have the default
privilege Browse Repository. You can assign Browse Repository directly to a user
login, or you can inherit Browse Repository from a
group.
Questions related to Server Manager
Q. What is Event-Based Scheduling?
When you use event-based scheduling, the Informatica Server starts a session when
it locates the specified indicator file. To use eventbased
scheduling, you need a shell command, script, or batch file to create an indicator
file when all sources are available. The file must be
created or sent to a directory local to the Informatica Server. The file can be of
any format recognized by the Informatica Server operating
system. The Informatica Server deletes the indicator file once the session starts.
Use the following syntax to ping the Informatica Server on a UNIX system:
pmcmd ping [{user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}]
[hostname:]portno
Use the following syntax to start a session or batch on a UNIX system:
pmcmd start {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno [folder_name:]{session_name |
batch_name} [:pf=param_file] session_flag wait_flag
Use the following syntax to stop a session or batch on a UNIX system:
pmcmd stop {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno[folder_name:]{session_name |
batch_name} session_flag
Use the following syntax to stop the Informatica Server on a UNIX system:
pmcmd stopserver {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno
Q. What are the different types of Commit intervals?
The different commit intervals are:
· Target-based commit. The Informatica Server commits data based on the number of
target rows and the key constraints on the
target table. The commit point also depends on the buffer block size and the commit
interval.
· Source-based commit. The Informatica Server commits data based on the number of
source rows. The commit point is the
commit interval you configure in the session properties.
64
Designer Questions
Q. What are the tools provided by Designer?
The Designer provides the following tools:
· Source Analyzer. Use to import or create source definitions for flat file, XML,
Cobol, ERP, and relational sources.
· Warehouse Designer. Use to import or create target definitions.
· Transformation Developer. Use to create reusable transformations.
· Mapplet Designer. Use to create mapplets.
· Mapping Designer. Use to create mappings.
Q. What is a transformation?
A transformation is a repository object that generates, modifies, or passes data.
You configure logic in a transformation that the Informatica
Server uses to transform data. The Designer provides a set of transformations that
perform specific functions. For example, an Aggregator
transformation performs calculations on groups of data.
Each transformation has rules for configuring and connecting in a mapping. For more
information about working with a specific
transformation, refer to the chapter in this book that discusses that particular
transformation.
You can create transformations to use once in a mapping, or you can create reusable
transformations to use in multiple mappings.
Q. What are the different types of Transformations? (Mascot)
a) Aggregator transformation: The Aggregator transformation allows you to perform
aggregate calculations, such as averages and sums.
The Aggregator transformation is unlike the Expression transformation, in that you
can use the Aggregator transformation to perform
calculations on groups. The Expression transformation permits you to perform
calculations on a row-by-row basis only. (Mascot)
b) Expression transformation: You can use the Expression transformations to
calculate values in a single row before you write to the
target. For example, you might need to adjust employee salaries, concatenate first
and last names, or convert strings to numbers. You can
use the Expression transformation to perform any non-aggregate calculations. You
can also use the Expression transformation to test
conditional statements before you output the results to target tables or other
transformations.
c) Filter transformation: The Filter transformation provides the means for
filtering rows in a mapping. You pass all the rows from a source
transformation through the Filter transformation, and then enter a filter condition
for the transformation. All ports in a Filter transformation
are input/output, and only rows that meet the condition pass through the Filter
transformation.
d) Joiner transformation: While a Source Qualifier transformation can join data
originating from a common source database, the Joiner
transformation joins two related heterogeneous sources residing in different
locations or file systems.
e) Lookup transformation: Use a Lookup transformation in your mapping to look up
data in a relational table, view, or synonym. Import a
lookup definition from any relational database to which both the Informatica Client
and Server can connect. You can use multiple Lookup
transformations in a mapping.
The Informatica Server queries the lookup table based on the lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares Lookup transformation port
values to lookup table column values based on the lookup condition. Use the result
of the lookup to pass to other transformations and the
target.
Q. What is the difference between Aggregate and Expression Transformation? (Mascot)
Q. What is Update Strategy?
When we design our data warehouse, we need to decide what type of information to
store in targets. As part of our target table design, we
need to determine whether to maintain all the historic data or just the most recent
changes.
The model we choose constitutes our update strategy, how to handle changes to
existing records.
Update strategy flags a record for update, insert, delete, or reject. We use this
transformation when we want to exert fine control over
updates to a target, based on some condition we apply. For example, we might use
the Update Strategy transformation to flag all customer
records for update when the mailing address has changed, or flag all employee
records for reject for people no longer working for the
company.
Q. Where do you define update strategy?
We can set the Update strategy at two different levels:
65
· Within a session. When you configure a session, you can instruct the Informatica
Server to either treat all records in the same
way (for example, treat all records as inserts), or use instructions coded into the
session mapping to flag records for different
database operations.
· Within a mapping. Within a mapping, you use the Update Strategy transformation to
flag records for insert, delete, update, or
reject.
Q. What are the advantages of having the Update strategy at Session Level?
Q. What is a lookup table? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
The lookup table can be a single table, or we can join multiple tables in the same
database using a lookup query override. The Informatica
Server queries the lookup table or an in-memory cache of the table for all incoming
rows into the Lookup transformation.
If your mapping includes heterogeneous joins, we can use any of the mapping sources
or mapping targets as the lookup table.
Q. What is a Lookup transformation and what are its uses?
We use a Lookup transformation in our mapping to look up data in a relational
table, view or synonym.
We can use the Lookup transformation for the following purposes:
 Get a related value. For example, if our source table includes employee ID, but
we want to include the employee name in
our target table to make our summary data easier to read.
 Perform a calculation. Many normalized tables include values used in a
calculation, such as gross sales per invoice or
sales tax, but not the calculated value (such as net sales).
 Update slowly changing dimension tables. We can use a Lookup transformation to
determine whether records already
exist in the target.
Q. What are connected and unconnected Lookup transformations?
We can configure a connected Lookup transformation to receive input directly from
the mapping pipeline, or we can configure an
unconnected Lookup transformation to receive input from the result of an expression
in another transformation.
An unconnected Lookup transformation exists separate from the pipeline in the
mapping. We write an expression using the :LKP reference
qualifier to call the lookup within another transformation.
A common use for unconnected Lookup transformations is to update slowly changing
dimension tables.
Q. What is the difference between connected lookup and unconnected lookup?
Differences between Connected and Unconnected Lookups:
Receives input values directly from the
pipeline.
Receives input values from the result of a
:LKP expression in another transformation.
We can use a dynamic or static cache We can use a static cache
Supports user-defined default values Does not support user-defined default
values
Q. What is Sequence Generator Transformation? (Mascot)
The Sequence Generator transformation generates numeric values. We can use the
Sequence Generator to create unique primary key
values, replace missing primary keys, or cycle through a sequential range of
numbers.
The Sequence Generation transformation is a connected transformation. It contains
two output ports that we can connect to one or more
transformations.
Q. What are the uses of a Sequence Generator transformation?
We can perform the following tasks with a Sequence Generator transformation:
o Create keys
o Replace missing values
o Cycle through a sequential range of numbers
Q. What are the advantages of Sequence generator? Is it necessary, if so why?
66
We can make a Sequence Generator reusable, and use it in multiple mappings. We

might reuse a Sequence Generator when we perform
multiple loads to a single target.
For example, if we have a large input file that we separate into three sessions
running in parallel, we can use a Sequence Generator to
generate primary key values. If we use different Sequence Generators, the
Informatica Server might accidentally generate duplicate key
values. Instead, we can use the same reusable Sequence Generator for all three
sessions to provide a unique value for each target row.
Q. How is the Sequence Generator transformation different from other
transformations?
The Sequence Generator is unique among all transformations because we cannot add,
edit, or delete its default ports (NEXTVAL and
CURRVAL).
Unlike other transformations we cannot override the Sequence Generator
transformation properties at the session level. This protecxts the
integrity of the sequence values generated.
Q. What does Informatica do? How it is useful?
Q. What is the difference between Informatica version 1.7.2 and 1.7.3?
Q. What are the complex filters used till now in your applications?
Q. Feartures of Informatica
Q. Have you used Informatica? which version?
Q. How do you set up a schedule for data loading from scratch? describe step-by-
step.
Q. How do you use mapplet?
Q. What are the different data source types you have used with Informatica?
Q. Is it possible to run one loading session with one particular target and
multiple types of data sources?
This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 6.0 and
PowerMart 6.0.
Designer
· Compare objects. The Designer allows you to compare two repository objects of the
same type to identify differences between
them. You can compare sources, targets, transformations, mapplets, mappings,
instances, or mapping/mapplet dependencies in
detail. You can compare objects across open folders and repositories.
· Copying objects. In each Designer tool, you can use the copy and paste functions
to copy objects from one workspace to another.
For example, you can select a group of transformations in a mapping and copy them
to a new mapping.
· Custom tools. The Designer allows you to add custom tools to the Tools menu. This
allows you to start programs you use
frequently from within the Designer.
· Flat file targets. You can create flat file target definitions in the Designer to
output data to flat files. You can create both fixedwidth
and delimited flat file target definitions.
· Heterogeneous targets. You can create a mapping that outputs data to multiple
database types and target types. When you run
a session with heterogeneous targets, you can specify a database connection for
each relational target. You can also specify a file
name for each flat file or XML target.
· Link paths. When working with mappings and mapplets, you can view link paths.
Link paths display the flow of data from a column
in a source, through ports in transformations, to a column in the target.
· Linking ports. You can now specify a prefix or suffix when automatically linking
ports between transformations based on port
names.
· Lookup cache. You can use a dynamic lookup cache in a Lookup transformation to
insert and update data in the cache and
target when you run a session.
· Mapping parameter and variable support in lookup SQL override. You can use
mapping parameters and variables when you
enter a lookup SQL override.
· Mapplet enhancements. Several mapplet restrictions are removed. You can now
include multiple Source Qualifier
transformations in a mapplet, as well as Joiner transformations and Application
Source Qualifier transformations for IBM
MQSeries. You can also include both source definitions and Input transformations in
one mapplet. When you work with a mapplet
in a mapping, you can expand the mapplet to view all transformations in the
mapplet.
· Metadata extensions. You can extend the metadata stored in the repository by
creating metadata extensions for repository
objects. The Designer allows you to create metadata extensions for source
definitions, target definitions, transformations,
mappings, and mapplets.
· Numeric and datetime formats. You can define formats for numeric and datetime
values in flat file sources and targets. When
you define a format for a numeric or datetime value, the Informatica Server uses
the format to read from the file source or to write
to the file target.
· Pre- and post-session SQL. You can specify pre- and post-session SQL in a Source
Qualifier transformation and in a mapping
target instance when you create a mapping in the Designer. The Informatica Server
issues pre-SQL commands to the database
once before it runs the session. Use pre-session SQL to issue commands to the
database such as dropping indexes before
extracting data. The Informatica Server issues post-session SQL commands to the
database once after it runs the session. Use
post-session SQL to issue commands to a database such as re-creating indexes.
· Renaming ports. If you rename a port in a connected transformation, the Designer
propagates the name change to expressions in
the transformation.
67
· Sorter transformation. The Sorter transformation is an active transformation that

allows you to sort data from relational or file
sources in ascending or descending order according to a sort key. You can increase
session performance when you use the
Sorter transformation to pass data to an Aggregator transformation configured for
sorted input in a mapping.
· Tips. When you start the Designer, it displays a tip of the day. These tips help
you use the Designer more efficiently. You can
display or hide the tips by choosing Help-Tip of the Day.
· Tool tips for port names. Tool tips now display for port names. To view the full
contents of the column, position the mouse over the
cell until the tool tip appears.
· View dependencies. In each Designer tool, you can view a list of objects that
depend on a source, source qualifier, transformation,
or target. Right-click an object and select the View Dependencies option.
· Working with multiple ports or columns. In each Designer tool, you can move
multiple ports or columns at the same time.
Informatica Server
· Add timestamp to workflow logs. You can configure the Informatica Server to add a
timestamp to messages written to the
workflow log.
· Expanded pmcmd capability. You can use pmcmd to issue a number of commands to the
Informatica Server. You can use
pmcmd in either an interactive or command line mode. The interactive mode prompts
you to enter information when you omit
parameters or enter invalid commands. In both modes, you can enter a command
followed by its command options in any order.
In addition to commands for starting and stopping workflows and tasks, pmcmd now
has new commands for working in the
interactive mode and getting details on servers, sessions, and workflows.
· Error handling. The Informatica Server handles the abort command like the stop
command, except it has a timeout period. You
can specify when and how you want the Informatica Server to stop or abort a
workflow by using the Control task in the workflow.
After you start a workflow, you can stop or abort it through the Workflow Monitor
or pmcmd.
· Export session log to external library. You can configure the Informatica Server
to write the session log to an external library.
· Flat files. You can specify the precision and field length for columns when the
Informatica Server writes to a flat file based on a
flat file target definition, and when it reads from a flat file source. You can
also specify the format for datetime columns that the
Informatica Server reads from flat file sources and writes to flat file targets.
· Write Informatica Windows Server log to a file. You can now configure the
Informatica Server on Windows to write the
Informatica Server log to a file.
Metadata Reporter
· List reports for jobs, sessions, workflows, and worklets. You can run a list
report that lists all jobs, sessions, workflows, or
worklets in a selected repository.
· Details reports for sessions, workflows, and worklets. You can run a details
report to view details about each session,
workflow, or worklet in a selected repository.
· Completed session, workflow, or worklet detail reports. You can run a completion
details report, which displays details about
how and when a session, workflow, or worklet ran, and whether it ran successfully.
· Installation on WebLogic. You can now install the Metadata Reporter on WebLogic
and run it as a web application.
Repository Manager
objects. The Repository Manager allows you to create metadata extensions for source
definitions, target definitions,
transformations, mappings, mapplets, sessions, workflows, and worklets.
· pmrep security commands. You can use pmrep to create or delete repository users
and groups. You can also use pmrep to
modify repository privileges assigned to users and groups.
· Tips. When you start the Repository Manager, it displays a tip of the day. These
tips help you use the Repository Manager more
efficiently. You can display or hide the tips by choosing Help-Tip of the Day.
Repository Server
The Informatica Client tools and the Informatica Server now connect to the
repository database over the network through the Repository
Server.
· Repository Server. The Repository Server manages the metadata in the repository
database. It accepts and manages all
repository client connections and ensures repository consistency by employing
object locking. The Repository Server can manage
multiple repositories on different machines on the network.
· Repository connectivity changes. When you connect to the repository, you must
specify the host name of the machine hosting
the Repository Server and the port number the Repository Server uses to listen for
connections. You no longer have to create an
ODBC data source to connect a repository client application to the repository.
Transformation Language
· New functions. The transformation language includes two new functions, ReplaceChr
and ReplaceStr. You can use these
functions to replace or remove characters or strings in text data.
· SETVARIABLE. The SETVARIABLE function now executes for rows marked as insert or
update.
68
Workflow Manager
The Workflow Manager and Workflow Monitor replace the Server Manager. Instead of
creating a session, you now create a process called
a workflow in the Workflow Manager. A workflow is a set of instructions on how to
execute tasks such as sessions, emails, and shell
commands. A session is now one of the many tasks you can execute in the Workflow
Manager.
The Workflow Manager provides other tasks such as Assignment, Decision, and Event-
Wait tasks. You can also create branches with
conditional links. In addition, you can batch workflows by creating worklets in the
Workflow Manager.
· DB2 external loader. You can use the DB2 EE external loader to load data to a DB2
EE database. You can use the DB2 EEE
external loader to load data to a DB2 EEE database. The DB2 external loaders can
insert data, replace data, restart load
operations, or terminate load operations.
· Environment SQL. For relational databases, you may need to execute some SQL
commands in the database environment when
you connect to the database. For example, you might want to set isolation levels on
the source and target systems to avoid
deadlocks. You configure environment SQL in the database connection. You can use
environment SQL for source, target, lookup,
and stored procedure connections.
· Email. You can create email tasks in the Workflow Manager to send emails when you
run a workflow. You can configure a
workflow to send an email anywhere in the workflow logic, including after a session
completes or after a session fails. You can
also configure a workflow to send an email when the workflow suspends on error.
· Flat file targets. In the Workflow Manager, you can output data to a flat file
from either a flat file target definition or a relational
target definition.
· Heterogeneous targets. You can output data to different database types and target
types in the same session. When you run a
session with heterogeneous targets, you can specify a database connection for each
relational target. You can also specify a file
name for each flat file or XML target.
objects. The Workflow Manager allows you to create metadata extensions for
sessions, workflows, and worklets.
· Oracle 8 direct path load support. You can load data directly to Oracle 8i in
bulk mode without using an external loader. You
can load data directly to an Oracle client database version 8.1.7.2 or higher.
· Partitioning enhancements. To improve session performance, you can set partition
points at multiple transformations in a
pipeline. You can also specify different partition types at each partition point.
· Server variables. You can use new server variables to define the workflow log
directory and workflow log count.
· Teradata TPump external loader. You can use the Teradata TPump external loader to
load data to a Teradata database. You can
use TPump in sessions that contain multiple partitions.
· Tips. When you start the Workflow Manager, it displays a tip of the day. These
tips help you use the Workflow Manager more
· Workflow log. In addition to session logs, you can configure the Informatica
Server to create a workflow log to record details
about workflow runs.
· Workflow Monitor. You use a tool called the Workflow Monitor to monitor
workflows, worklets, and tasks. The Workflow Monitor
displays information about workflow runs in two views: Gantt Chart view or Task
view. You can run, stop, abort, and resume
workflows from the Workflow Monitor.
Q: How do I connect job streams/sessions or batches across folders? (30 October
2000)
For quite a while there's been a deceptive problem with sessions in the Informatica
repository. For management and maintenance
reasons, we've always wanted to separate mappings, sources, targets, in to subject
areas or functional areas of the business. This makes
sense until we try to run the entire Informatica job stream. Understanding of
course that only the folder in which the map has been defined
can house the session. This makes it difficult to run jobs / sessions across
folders - particularly when there are necessary job
dependancies which must be defined. The purpose of this article is to introduce an
alternative solution to this problem. It requires the use
of shortcuts.
The basics are like this: Keep the map creations, sources, and targets subject
oriented. This allows maintenance to be easier (by subect
area). Then once the maps are done, change the folders to allow shortcuts (done
from the repository manager). Create a folder called:
"MY_JOBS" or something like that. Go in to designer, open "MY_JOBS", expand the
source folders, and create shortcuts to the mappings
in the source folders.
Go to the session manager, and create sessions for each of the short-cut mappings
in MY_JOBS. Then batch them as you see
fit. This will allow a single folder for running jobs and sessions housed anywhere
in any folder across your repository.
Q: How do I get maximum speed out of my database connection? (12 September 2000)
In Sybase or MS-SQL Server, go to the Database Connection in the Server Manager.
Increase the packet size. Recommended sizing
depends on distance traveled from PMServer to Database - 20k Is usually acceptable
on the same subnet. Also, have the DBA increase
the "maximum allowed" packet size setting on the Database itself. Following this
change, the DBA will need to restart the DBMS.
Changing the Packet Size doesn't mean all connections will connect at this size, it
just means that anyone specifying a larger packet size
69
for their connection may be able to use it. It should increase speed, and decrease
network traffic. Default IP Packets are between 1200
bytes and 1500 bytes.
In Oracle: there are two methods. For connection to a local database, setup the
protocol as IPC (between PMServer and
a DBMS Server that are hosted on the same machine). IPC is not a protocol that can
be utilized across networks
(apparently). IPC stands for Inter Process Communication, and utilizes memory
piping (RAM) instead of client context,
through the IP listner. For remote connections there is a better way: Listner.ORA
and TNSNames.ORA need to be
modified to include SDU and TDU settings. SDU = Service Layer Data Buffer, and TDU
= Transport Layer Data Buffer.
Both of which specify packet sizing in Oracle connections over IP. Default for
Oracle is 1500 bytes. Also note: these
settings can be used in IPC connections as well, to control the IPC Buffer sizes
passed between two local programs
(PMServer and Oracle Server)
Both the Server and the Client need to be modified. The server will allow packets
up to the max size set - but unless the
client specifies a larger packet size, the server will default to the smallest
setting (1500 bytes). Both SDU and TDU
should be set the same. See the example below:
TNSNAMES.ORA
LOC=(DESCRIPTION= (SDU = 20480) (TDU=20480)
LISTENER.ORA
LISTENER=....(SID_DESC= (SDU = 20480) (TDU=20480) (SID_NAME = beqlocal) ....
Q: How do I get a Sequence Generator to "pick up" where another "left off"? (8 June
2000)
· To perform this mighty trick, one can use an unconnected lookup on the Sequence
ID of the target table. Set the properties to
"LAST VALUE", input port is an ID. the condition is: SEQ_ID >= input_ID. Then in an
expression set up a variable port: connect
a NEW self-resetting sequence generator to a new input port in the expression. The
variable port's expression should read:
IIF( v_seq = 0 OR ISNULL(v_seq) = true, :LKP.lkp_sequence(1), v_seq). Then, set up
an output port. Change the output
port's expression to read: v_seq + input_seq (from the resetting sequence
generator). Thus you have just completed an
"append" without a break in sequence numbers.
Q: How do I query the repository to see which sessions are set in TEST MODE? (8
June 2000)
· Runthefollowing select:
select * from opb_load_session where bit_option = 13;
It's actually BIT # 2 in this bit_option setting, so if you have a mask, or a bit-
level function you can then AND it with a mask of 2, if
this is greater than zero, it's been set for test load.
Q: How do I "validate" all my mappings at once? (31 March 2000)
· Issue the following command WITH CARE.
UPDATE OPB_MAPPING SET IS_VALID = 1;
· Then disconnect from the database, and re-connect. In session manager, and
designer as well.
Q: How do I validate my entire repository? (12 September 2000)
· To add the menu option, change this registry entry on your client.
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Informatica/PowerMart Client Tools/4.7/Repository
Manager Options . Add the following string
Name: EnableCheckReposit Data.
Validate Repository forces Informatica to run through the repository, and check the
repo for errors
Q: How do I work around a bug in 4.7? I can't change the execution order of my
stored procedures that I've imported? (31 March
2000)
· Issue the following statements WITH CARE:
select widget_id from OPB_WIDGET where WIDGET_NAME = <widget name>
(write down the WIDGET ID)
· select * from OPB_WIDGET_ATTR where WIDGET_ID = <widget_id>
· update OPB_WIDGET_ATTR set attr_value = <execution order> where WIDGET_ID =
<widget_id> and attr_id = 5
· COMMIT;
The <execution order> is the number of the order in which you want the stored proc
to execute. Again, disconnect from
both designer and session manager repositories, and re-connect to "re-read" the
local cache.
70
Q: How do I keep the session manager from "Quitting" when I try to open a session?
(23 March 2000)
· Informatica Tech Support has said: if you are using a flat file as a source, and
your "file name" in the "Source Options" dialog is
longer than 80 characters, it will "kill" the Session Manager tool when you try to
re-open it. You can fix the session by: logging in
to the repository via SQLPLUS, or ISQL, and finding the table called:
OPB_LOAD_SESSION, find the Session ID associated with
the session name - write it down. Then select FNAME from OPB_LOAD_FILES where
Session_ID = <session_id>. Change /
update OPB_LOAD_FILES set FNAME= <new file name> column, change the length back to
less than 80 characters, and
commit the changes. Now the session has been repaired. Try to keep the directory to
that source file in the DIRECTORY entry
box above the file name box. Try to keep all the source files together in the same
source directory if possible.
Q: How do I repair a "damaged" repository? (16 March 2000)
· There really isn't a good repair tool, nor is there a "great" method for
repairing the repository. However, I have some suggestions
which might help. If you're running in to a session which causes the session
manager to "quit" on you when you try to open it, or
you have a map that appears to have "bad sources", there may be something you can
do. There are varying degrees of damage
to the repository - mostly caused because the sequence generator that PM/PC relies
on is buried in a table in the repository - and
they generate their own sequence numbers. If this table becomes "corrupted" or
generates the wrong sequences, you can get
repository errors all over the place. It can spread quickly. Try the following
steps to repair a repository: (USE AT YOUR OWN
RISK) The recommended path is to backup the repository, send it to Technical
Support - and tell them it's damaged.
1. Delete the session, disconnect, re-connect, then re-create the session, then
attempt to edit the new session again. If the new
session won't open up (srvr mgr quits), then there are more problems - PM/PC is not
successfully attaching sources and targets to
the session (SEE: OPB_LOAD_SESSION table (SRC_ID, TARGET_ID) columns - they will be
zero, when they should contain an
ID.
2. Delete the session, then open the map. Delete the source and targets from the
MAP. Save the map and invalidate it - forcing an
update to the repository and it's links. Drag the sources and targets back in to
the map and re-connect them. Validate and Save.
Then try re-building the session (back to step one). If there is still a failure,
then there are more problems.
3. Delete the session and the map entirely. Save the repository changes - thus
requesting a delete in the repository. While the
"delete" may occur - some of the tables in the repository may not be "cleansed".
There may still be some sources, targets, and
transformation objects (reusable) left in the repository. Rebuild the map from
scratch - then save it again... This will create a new
MAP ID in the OPB_MAPPING table, and force PM/PC to create new ID links to existing
Source and Target objects (as well as all
the other objects in the map).
4. If that didn't work - you may have to delete the sources, reusable objects, and
targets, as well as the session and the map. Then
save the repository - again, trying to "remove" the objects from the repository
itself. Then re-create them. This forces PM/PC to
assign new ID's to ALL the objects in the map, the map, and the session - hopefully
creating a "good" picture of all that was
rebuilt.
· Or try this method:
1. Create a NEW repository -> call it REPO_A (for reference only).
2. Copy any of the MAPPINGS that don't have "problems" opening in their respective
sessions, and copy the mappings (using
designer) from the old repository (REPO_B) to the new repository (REPO_A). This
will create NEW ID's for all the mappings,
CAUTION: You will lose your sessions.
3. DELETE the old repository (REPO_B).
4. Create a new repository in the OLD Repository Space (REPO_B)..
5. Copy the maps back in to the original repository (Recreated Repository) From
REPO_A to REPO_B.
6. Rebuild the sessions, then re-create all of the objects you originally had
trouble with.
· You can apply this to FOLDER level and Repository Manager Copying, but you need
to make sure that none of the objects within
a folder have any problems.
· What this does: creates new ID's, resets the sequence generator, re-establishes
all the links to the objects in the tables, and
drop's out (by process of elimination) any objects you've got problems with.
· Bottom line: PM/PC client tools have trouble when the links between ID's get
broken. It's fairly rare that this occurs, but when it
does - it can cause heartburn.
Q: How do I clear the locks that are left in the repository? (3 March 2000)
Clearing locks is typically a task for the repository manager. Generally it's done
from within the Repository Manager: Edit Menu -> Show
Locks. Select the locks, then press "remove". Typically locks are left on objects
when a client is rebooted without properly exiting
Informatica. These locks can keep others from editing the objects. They can also
keep scheduled executions from occurring. It's not
uncommon to want to clear the locks automatically - on a prescheduled time table,
or at a specified time. This can be done safely only if
no-one has an object out for editing at the time of deletion of the lock. The
suggested method is to log in to the database from an
automated script, and issue a "delete from OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS" table.
71
Q: How do I turn on the option for Check Repository? (3 March 2000)

According to Technical Support, it's only available by adjusting the registry
entries on the client. PM/PC need to be told it's in Admin mode
to work. Below are the steps to turn on the Administration Mode on the client. Be
aware - this may be a security risk, anyone using that
terminal will have access to these features.
1)start repository manager
2) repository menu go to check repository
3) if the option is not there you need to edit your registry using regedit
go to: HKEY_CURRENT_USER>>SOFTWARE>>INFORMATICA>>PowerMart Client Tools>>Repository
Manager Options
go to your specific version 4.5 or 4.6 and then go to Repository Manager. In
there add two strings:
1) EnableAdminMode 1
2) EnableCheckReposit 1
· both should be spelled as shown the value for both is 1
Q: How do I generate an Audit Trail for my repository (ORACLE / Sybase) ?
Download one of two *USE AT YOUR OWN RISK* zip files. The first is available now
for PowerMart 4.6.x and PowerCenter 1.6x. It's a 7k
zip file: Informatica Audit Trail v0.1a The other file (for 4.5.x is coming...).
Please note: this is FREE software that plugs in to ORACLE
7x, and ORACLE 8x, and Oracle 8i. It has NOT been built for Sybase, Informix, or
DB2. If someone would care to adapt it, and send it
back to me, I'll be happy to post these also. It has limited support - has not been
fully tested in a multi-user environment, any
feedback would be appreciated. NOTE: SYBASE VERSION IS ON IT'S WAY.
Q: How do I "tune" a repository? My repository is slowing down after a lot of use,
how can I make it faster?
In Oracle: Schedule a nightly job to ANALYZE TABLE for ALL INDEXES, creating
histograms for the tables - keep the cost based optimizer
up to date with the statistics. In SYBASE: schedule a nightly job to UPDATE
STATISTICS against the tables and indexes. In Informix,
DB2, and RDB, see your owners manuals about maintaining SQL query optimizer
statistics.
Q: How do I achieve "best performance" from the Informatica tool set?
By balancing what Informatica is good at with what the databases are built for.
There are reasons for placing some code at the database
level - particularly views, and staging tables for data. Informatica is extremely
good at reading/writing and manipulating data at very high
rates of throughput. However - to achieve optimum performance (in the Gigabyte to
Terabyte range) there needs to be a balance of
Tuning in Oracle, utilizing staging tables, views for joining source to target
data, and throughput of manipulation in Informatica. For
instance: Informatica will never achieve the speeds of "append" or straight inserts
that Oracle SQL*Loader, or Sybase BCP achieve. This
is because these two tools are written internally - specifically for the purposes
of loading data (direct to tables / disk structures). The API
that Oracle / Sybase provide Informatica with is not nearly as equipped to allow
this kind of direct access (to eliminate breakage when
Oracle/Sybase upgrade internally). The basics of Informatica are: 1) Keep maps as
simple as possible 2) break complexity up in to
multiple maps if possible 3) rule of thumb: one MAP per TARGET table 4) Use staging
tables for LARGE sets of data 5) utilize SQL for it's
power of sorts, aggregations, parallel queries, temp spaces, etc... (setup views in
the database, tune indexes on staging tables) 6) Tune
the database - partition tables, move them to physical disk areas, etc... separate
the logic.
Q: How do I get an Oracle Sequence Generator to operate faster?
The first item is: use a function to call it, not a stored procedure. Then, make
sure the sequence generator and the function are local to the
SOURCE or TARGET database, DO NOT use synonyms to place either the sequence or
function in a remote instance (synonyms to a
separate schema/database on the same instance may be only a slight performance
hit). This should help - possibly double the throughput
of generating sequences in your map. The other item is: see slide presentations on
performance tuning for your sessions / maps for a
"best" way to utilize an Oracle sequence generator. Believe it or not - the write
throughput shown in the session manager per target table
is directly affected by calling an external function/procedure which is generating
sequence numbers. It does NOT appear to affect the read
throughput numbers. This is a difficult problem to solve when you have low "write
throughput" on any or all of your targets. Start with the
sequence number generator (if you can), and try to optimize the map for this.
Q: I have a mapping that runs for hours, but it's not doing that much. It takes 5
input tables, uses 3 joiner transformations, a few
lookups, a couple expressions and a filter before writing to the target. We're
running PowerMart 4.6 on an NT 4 box. What tuning
options do I have?
Without knowing the complete environment, it's difficult to say what the problem
is, but here's a few solutions with which you can
experiment. If the NT box is not dedicated to PowerMart (PM) during its operation,
identify what it contends with and try rescheduling things
such that PM runs alone. PM needs all the resources it can get. If it's a dedicated
box, it's a well known fact that PM consumes resources
at a rapid clip, so if you have room for more memory, get it, particularly since
you mentioned use of the joiner transformation. Also toy with
72
the caching parameters, but remember that each joiner grabs the full complement of
memory that you allocate. So if you give it 50Mb, the 3
joiners will really want 150Mb. You can also try breaking up the session into
parallel sessions and put them into a batch, but again, you'll
have to manage memory carefully because of the joiners. Parallel sessions is a good
option if you have a multiple-processor CPU, so if
you have vacant CPU slots, consider adding more CPU's. If a lookup table is
relatively big (more than a few thousand rows), try turning the
cache flag off in the session and see what happens. So if you're trying to look up
a "transaction ID" or something similar out of a few million
rows, don't load the table into memory. Just look it up, but be sure the table has
appropriate indexes. And last, if the sources live on a
pretty powerful box, consider creating a view on the source system that essentially
does the same thing as the joiner transformations and
possibly some of the lookups. Take advantage of the source system's hardware to do
a lot of the work before handing down the result to
the resource constrained NT box.
Q: Is there a "best way" to load tables?
Yes - If all that is occurring is inserts (to a single target table) - then the
BEST method of loading that target is to configure and utilize the
bulk loading tools. For Sybase it's BCP, for Oracle it's SQL*Loader. With multiple
targets, break the maps apart (see slides), one for
INSERTS only, and remove the update strategies from the insert only maps (along
with unnecessary lookups) - then watch the throughput
fly. We've achieved 400+ rows per second per table in to 5 target Oracle tables
(Sun Sparc E4500, 4 CPU's, Raid 5, 2 GIG RAM, Oracle
8.1.5) without using SQL*Loader. On an NT 366 mhz P3, 128 MB RAM, single disk,
single target table, using SQL*Loader we've loaded 1
million rows (150 MB) in 9 minutes total - all the map had was one expression to
left and right trim the ports (12 ports, each row was 150
bytes in length). 3 minutes for SQL*Loader to load the flat file - DIRECT, Non-
Recoverable.
Q: How do I guage that the performance of my map is acceptable?
If you have a small file (under 6MB) and you have pmserver on a Sun Sparc 4000,
Solaris 5.6, 2 cpu's, 2 gigs RAM, (baseline
configuration - if your's is similar you'll be ok). For NT: 450 MHZ PII 128 MB RAM
(under 3 MB file size), then it's nothing to worry about
unless your write throughput is sitting at 1 to 5 rows per second. If you are in
this range, then your map is too complex, or your tables have
not been optimized. On a baseline defined machine (as stated above), expected read
throughput will vary - depending on the source, write
throughput for relational tables (tables in the database) should be upwards of 150
to 450+ rows per second. To calculate the total write
throughput, add all of the rows per second for each target together, run the map
several times, and average the throughput. If your map is
running "slow" by these standards, then see the slide presentations to implement a
different methodology for tuning. The suggestion here
is: break the map up - 1 map per target table, place common logic in to maplets.
Q: How do I create a “state variable”?
Create a variable port in an expression (v_MYVAR), set the data type to Integer
(for this example), set the expression to:
IIF( ( ISNULL(v_MYVAR) = true or v_MYVAR = 0 ) [ and <your condition> ], 1,
v_MYVAR).> What happens here, is that upon initialization
Informatica may set the v_MYVAR to NULL, or zero.> The first time this code is
executed it is set to “1”.> Of course – you can set the
variable to any value you wish – and carry that through the transformations.> Also
– you can add your own AND condition (as indicated in
italics), and only set the variable when a specific condition has been met.> The
variable port will hold it’s value for the rest of the
transformations.> This is a good technique to use for lookup values when a single
lookup value is necessary based on a condition being
met (such as a key for an “unknown” value).> You can change the data type to
character, and use the same examination – simply remove
the “or v_MYVAR = 0” from the expression – character values will be first set to
NULL.
Q: How do I pass a variable in to a session?
There is no direct method of passing variables in to maps or sessions.> In order to
get a map/session to respond to data driven (variables)
– a data source must be provided.> If working with flat files – it can be another
flat file, if working with relational data sources it can be with
another relational table.> Typically a relational table works best, because SQL
joins can then be employed to filter the data sets, additional
maps and source qualifiers can utilize the data to modify or alter the parameters
during run-time.
Q: How can I create one map, one session, and utilize multiple source files of the
same format?
In UNIX it’s very easy: create a link to the source file desired, place the link in
the SrcFiles directory, run the session.> Once the session
has completed successfully, change the link in the SrcFiles directory to point to
the next available source file.> Caution: the only downfall
is that you cannot run multiple source files (of the same structure) in to the
database simultaneously.> In other words – it forces the same
session to be run serially, but if that outweighs the maintenance and speed is not
a major issue, feel free to implement it this way.> On NT
you would have to physically move the files in and out of the SrcFiles directory.
Note: the difference between creating a link to an
individual file, and changing SrcFiles directory to link to a specific directory is
this: changing a link to an individual file allows multiple
sessions to link to all different types of sources, changing SrcFiles to be a link
itself is restrictive – also creates Unix Sys Admin pressures
for directory rights to PowerCenter (one level up).
Q: How can I move my Informatica Logs / BadFiles directories to other disks without
changing anything in my sessions?
Use the UNIX Link command – ask the SA to create the link and grant read/write
permissions – have the “real” directory placed on any
other disk you wish to have it on.
73
Q: How do I handle duplicate rows coming in from a flat file?

If you don't care about "reporting" duplicates, use an aggregator. Set the Group By
Ports to group by the primary key in the parent target
table. Keep in mind that using an aggregator causes the following: The last
duplicate row in the file is pushed through as the one and only
row, loss of ability to detect which rows are duplicates, caching of the data
before processing in the map continues. If you wish to report
duplicates, then follow the suggestions in the presentation slides (available on
this web site) to institute a staging table. See the pro's and
cons' of staging tables, and what they can do for you.
Q: Where can I find a history / metrics of the load sessions that have occurred in
Informatica? (8 June 2000)
The tables which house this information are OPB_LOAD_SESSION, OPB_SESSION_LOG, and
OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG.
OPB_LOAD_SESSION contains the single session entries, OPB_SESSION_LOG contains a
historical log of all session runs that have
taken place. OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG keeps track of the errors, and the target tables
which have been loaded. Keep in mind these
tables are tied together by Session_ID. If a session is deleted from
OPB_LOAD_SESSION, it's history is not necessarily deleted from
OPB_SESSION_LOG, nor from OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG. Unfortunately - this leaves un-
identified session ID's in these tables. However,
when you can join them together, you can get the start and complete times from each
session. I would suggest using a view to get the
data out (beyond the MX views) - and record it in another metrics table for
historical reasons. It could even be done by putting a TRIGGER
on these tables (possibly the best solution)...
Q: Where can I find more information on what the Informatica Repository Tables are?
On this web-site. We have published an unsupported view of what we believe to be
housed in specific tables in the Informatica
Repository. Check it out - we'll be adding to this section as we go. Right now it's
just a belief of what we see in the tables. Repository
Table Meta-Data Definitions
Q: Where can I find / change the settings regarding font's, colors, and layouts for
the designer?
You can find all the font's, colors, layouts, and controls in the registry of the
individual client. All this information is kept at:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Informatica\PowerMart Client Tools\<ver>. Below here,
you'll find the different folders which allow
changes to be made. Be careful, deleting items in the registry could hamper the
software from working properly.
Q: Where can I find tuning help above and beyond the manuals?
Right here. There are slide presentations, either available now, or soon which will
cover tuning of Informatica maps and sessions - it does
mean that the architectural solution proposed here be put in place.
Q: Where can I find the map's used in generating performance statistics?
A windows ZIP file will soon be posted, which houses a repository backup, as well
as a simple PERL program that generates the source
file, and a SQL script which creates the tables in Oracle. You'll be able to
download this, and utilize this for your own benefit.
Q: Why doesn't constraint based load order work with a maplet? (08 May 2000)
If your maplet has a sequence generator (reusable) that's mapped with data straight
to an "OUTPUT" designation, and then the map splits
the output to two tables: parent/child - and your session is marked with
"Constraint Based Load Ordering" you may have experienced a
load problem - where the constraints do not appear to be met?? Well - the problem
is in the perception of what an "OUTPUT" designation
is. The OUTPUT component is NOT an "object" that collects a "row" as a row, before
pushing it downstream. An OUTPUT component is
merely a pass-through structural object - as indicated, there are no data types on
the INPUT or OUTPUT components of a maplet - thus
indicating merely structure. To make the constraint based load order work properly,
move all the ports through a single expression, then
through the OUTPUT component - this will force a single row to be "put together"
and passed along to the receiving maplet. Otherwise -
the sequence generator generates 1 new sequence ID for each split target on the
other side of the OUTPUT component.
Q: Why doesn't 4.7 allow me to set the Stored Procedure connection information in
the Session Manager -> Transformations
Tab? (31 March 2000)
This functionality used to exist in an older version of PowerMart/PowerCenter. It
was a good feature - as we could control when the
procedure was executed (ie: source pre-load), but execute it in a target database
connection. It appears to be a removed piece of
functionality. We are asking Informatica to put it back in.
Q: Why doesn't it work when I wrap a sequence generator in a view, with a lookup
object?
First - to wrap a sequence generator in a view, you must create an Oracle stored
function, then call the function in the select statement in a
view. Second, Oracle dis-allows an order by clause on a column returned from a user
function (It will cut your connection - and report an
74
oracle error). I think this is a bug that needs to be reported to Oracle. An

Informatica lookup object automatically places an "order by"
clause on the return ports / output ports in the order they appear in the object.
This includes any "function" return. The minute it executes
a non-cached SQL lookup statement with an order by clause on the function return
(sequence number) - Oracle cuts the connection. Thus
keeping this solution from working (which would be slightly faster than binding an
external procedure/function).
Q: Why doesn't a running session QUIT when Oracle or Sybase return fatal errors?
The session will only QUIT when it's threshold is set: "Stop on 1 errors".
Otherwise the session will continue to run.
Q: Why doesn't a running session return a non-successful error code to the command
line when Oracle or Sybase return any
error?
If the session is not bounded by it's threshold: set "Stop on 1 errors" the session
will run to completion - and the server will consider the
session to have completed successfully - even if Oracle runs out of Rollback or
Temp Log space, even if Sybase has a similar error. To
correct this - set the session to stop on 1 error, then the command line: pmcmd
will return a non-zero (it failed) type of error code. - as will
the session manager see that the session failed.
Q: Why doesn't the session work when I pass a text date field in to the to_date
function?
In order to make to_date(xxxx,<format>) work properly, we suggest surrounding your
expression with the following:
IIF( is_date(<date>,<format>) = true, to_date(<date>,<format>), NULL) This will
prevent session errors with "transformation error" in the
port. If you pass a non-date to a to_date function it will cause the session to
bomb out. By testing it first, you ensure 1) that you have a
real date, and 2) your format matches the date input. The format should match the
expected date input directly - spaces, no spaces, and
everything in between. For example, if your date is: 1999103022:31:23 then you want
a format to be: YYYYMMDDHH24:MI:SS with no
spaces.
Q: Why doesn't the session control an update to a table (I have no update strategy
in the map for this target)?
In order to process ANY update to any target table, you must put an update strategy
in the map, process a DD_UPDATE command,
change the session to "data driven". There is a second method: without utilizing an
update strategy, set the SESSION properties to
"UPDATE" instead of "DATA DRIVEN", but be warned ALL targets will be updated in
place - with failure if the rows don't exist. Then you
can set the update flags in the mapping's sessions to control updates to the
target. Simply setting the "update flags" in a session is not
enough to force the update to complete - even though the log may show an update SQL
statement, the log will also show: cannot insert
(duplicate key) errors.
Q: Who is the Informatica Sales Team in the Denver Region?
Christine Connor (Sales), and Alan Schwab (Technical Engineer).
Q: Who is the contact for Informatica consulting across the country?
CORE Integration
Q: What happens when I don't connect input ports to a maplet? (14 June 2000)
Potentially Hazardous values are generated in the maplet itself. Particularly for
numerics. If you didn't connect ALL the ports to an input on
a maplet, chances are you'll see sporadic values inside the maplet - thus sporadic
results. Such as ZERO in certain decimal cases where
NULL is desired. This is because both the INPUT and OUTPUT objects of a maplet are
nothing more than an interface, which defines the
structure of a data row - they are NOT like an expression that actually "receives"
or "puts together" a row image. This can cause a
misunderstanding of how the maplet works - if you're not careful, you'll end up
with unexpected results.
Q: What is the Local Object Cache? (3 March 2000)
The local object cache is a cache of the Informatica objects which are retrieved
from the repository when a connection is established to a
repository. The cache is not readily accessed because it's housed within the PM/PC
client tool. When the client is shut-down, the cache is
released. Apparently the refresh cycle of this local cache requires a full
disconnect/reconnect to the repository which has been updated.
This cache will house two different images of the same object. For instance: a
shared object, or a shortcut to another folder. If the actual
source object is updated (source shared, source shortcut), updates can only be seen
in the current open folder if a disconnect/reconnect is
performed against that repository. There is no apparent command to refresh the
cache from the repository. This may cause some
confusion when updating objects then switching back to the mapping where you'd
expect to see the newly updated object appear.
Q: What is the best way to "version control"?
75
It seems the general developer community agrees on this one, the Informatica
Versioning leaves a lot to be desired. We suggest not
utilizing the versioning provided. For two reasons: one, it's extremely unwieldy
(you lose all your sessions), and the repository grows
exponentially because Informatica copies objects to increase the version number. We
suggest two different approaches; 1) utilizing a
backup of the repository - synchronize Informatica repository backups (as opposed
to DBMS repo backups) with all the developers. Make
your backup consistently and frequently. Then - if you need to back out a piece,
restore the whole repository. 2) Build on this with a
second "scratch" repository, save and restore to the "scratch" repository ONE
version of the folders. Drag and drop the folders to and from
the "scratch" development repository. Then - if you need to VIEW a much older
version, restore that backup to the scratch area, and view
the folders. In this manner - you can check in the whole repository backup binary
to an outside version control system like PVCS, CCS,
SCM, etc... Then restore the whole backup in to acceptance - use the backup as a
"VERSION" or snapshot of everything in the repository
- this way items don't get lost, and disconnected versions do not get migrated up
in to production.
Q: What is the best way to handle multiple developer environments?
The school of thought is still out on this one. As with any - there are many many
ways to handle this. One idea is presented here (which
seems to work well, and be comfortable to those who already worked in shared Source
Code environments). The idea is this: All
developers use shared folders, shared objects, and global repositories. In
development - it's all about communication between team
members - so that the items being modified are assigned to individuals for work.
With this methodology - all maps can use common
mapplets, shared sources, targets, and other items. The one problem with this is
that the developers MUST communicate about what they
are working on. This is a common and familiar method to working on shared source
code - most development teams feel comfortable with
this, as do managers. The problem with another commonly utilized method (one folder
per developer), is that you end up with run-away
development environments. Code re-use, and shared object use nearly always drop to
zero percent (caveat: unless you are following SEI /
CMM / KPA Level 5 - and you have a dedicated CM (Change Management) person in the
works. Communication is still of utmost
importance, however now you have the added problem of "checking in" what looks like
different source tables from different developers,
but the objects are named the same... Among other problems that arise.
Q: What is the web address to submit new enhancement requests?
· Informatica's enhancement request web address is:
mailto:featurerequest@informatica.com
Q: What is the execution order of the ports in an expression?
All ports are executed TOP TO BOTTOM in a serial fashion, but they are done in the
following groups: All input ports are pushed values
first. Then all variables are executed (top to bottom physical ordering in the
expression). Last - all output expressions are executed to
push values to output ports - again, top to bottom in physical ordering. You can
utilize this to your advantage, by placing lookups in to
variables, then using the variables "later" in the execution cycle.
Q: What is a suggested method for validating fields / marking them with errors?
One of the successful methods is to create an expression object, which contains
variables.> One variable per port that is to be checked.>
Set the error “flag” for that field, then at the bottom of the expression trap each
of the error fields.> From this port you can choose to set
flags based on each individual error which occurred, or feed them out as a
combination of concatenated field names – to be inserted in to
the database as an error row in an error tracking table.
Q: What does the error “Broken Pipe” mean in the PMSERVER.ERR log on Unix?
One of the known causes for this error message is: when someone in the client User
Interface queries the server, then presses the
“cancel” button that appears briefly in the lower left corner.> It is harmless –
and poses no threat.
Q: What is the best way to create a readable “DEBUG” log?
Create a table in a relational database which resembles your flat file source
(assuming you have a flat file source).> Load the data in to the
relational table.> Then – create your map from top to bottom and turn on VERBOSE
DATA log at the session level.> Go back to the map,
over-ride the SQL in the SQL Qualifier to only pull one to three rows through the
map, then run the session.> In this manner, the DEBUG
log will be readable, errors will be much easier to identify – and once the logic
is fixed, the whole data set can be run through the map with
NORMAL logging.> Otherwise you may end up with a huge (Megabyte) log.> The other
two ways to create debugging logs are: 1) switch
the session to TEST LOAD, set it to 3 rows, and run… The problem with this is that
the reader will read ALL of the source data.> 2)
change the output to a flat file…. The problem with this is that your log ends up
huge (depends on the number of source rows you have).
Q: What is the best methodology for utilizing Informatica’s Strengths?
It depends on the purpose. However – there is a basic definition of how well the
tool will perform with throughput and data handling, if
followed in general principal – you will have a winning situation.> 1) break all
complex maps down in to small manageable chunks.> Break
up any logic you can in to steps.> Informatica does much better with smaller more
maintainable maps. 2) Break up complex logic within
an expression in to several different expressions.> Be wary though: the more
expressions the slower the throughput – only break up the
76
logic if it’s too difficult to maintain.> 3) Follow the guides for table structures
and data warehouse structures which are available on this
web site.> For reference: load flat files to staging tables, load staging tables in
to operational data stores / reference stores / data
warehousing sources, load data warehousing sources in to star schemas or
snowflakes, load star schemas or snowflakes in to highly denormalized
reporting tables.> By breaking apart the logic you will see the fastest throughput.
Q: When is it right to use SQL*Loader / BCP as a piped session versus a tail
process?
SQL*Loader / BCP as a piped session should be used when no intermediate file is
necessary, or the source data is too large to stage to an
intermediate file, there is not enough disk or time to place all the source data in
to an intermediate file.> The downfalls currently are this: as
a piped process (for PowerCenter 1.5.2 and 1.6 / PowerMart v4.52. and 4.6)> the
core does NOT stop when either BCP or SQL*Loader
“quit” or terminate.> The core will only stop after reading all of the source data
in to the data reader thread.> This is dangerous if you have
a huge file you wish to process – and it’s scheduled as a monitored process.> Which
means: a 5 hour load (in which SQL*Loader / BCP
stopped within the first 5 minutes) will only stop and signal a page after 5 hours
of reading source data.
Q: What happens when Informatica causes DR Watson's on NT? (30 October 2000)
This is just my theory for now, but here's the best explanation I can come up with.
Typically this occurs when there is not enough physical
RAM available to perform the operation. Usually this only happens when SQLServer is
installed on the same machine as the PMServer -
however if this is not your case, some of this may still apply. PMServer starts up
child threads just like Unix. The threads share the global
shared memory area - and rely on NT's Thread capabilities. The DR Watson seems to
appear when a thread attempts to deallocate, or
allocate real memory. There's none left (mostly because of SQLServer). The memory
manager appears to return an error, or asks the
thread to wait while it reorganizes virtual RAM to make way for the physical
request. Unfortunately the thread code doesn't pay attention to
this requrest, resulting in a memory violation. The other theory is the thread
attempts to free memory that's been swapped to virtual, or has
been "garbage collected" and cleared already - thus resulting again in a protected
memory mode access violation - thus a DR Watson.
Typically the DR Watson can cause the session to "freeze up". The only way to clear
this is to stop and restart the PMSERVER service - in
some cases it requires a full machine reboot. The only other possibility is when
PMServer is attempting to free or shut down a thread -
maybe there's an error in the code which causes the DR Watson. In any case, the
only real fix is to increase the physical RAM on the
machine, or to decrease the number of concurrent sessions running at any given
point, or to decrease the amount of RAM that each
concurrent session is using.
Q: What happens when Informatica CORE DUMPS on Unix? (12 April 2000)
Many things can cause a core dump, but the question is: how do you go about
"finding out" what cuased it, how do you work to solve it,
and is there a simple fix? This case was found to be frequent (according to tech
support) among setups of New Unix Hardware - causing
unnecessary core dumps. The IPC semaphore settings were set too low - causing X
number of concurrent sessions to "die" with "writer
process died" and "reader process died" etc... We are on a Unix Machine - Sun
Solaris 5.7, anyone with this configuration might want to
check the settings if they experience "Core Dumps" as well.
1. Run "sysdef", examine the IPC Semaphores section at the bottom of the output.
2. the folowing settings should be "increased"
3. SEMMNI - (semaphore identifiers), (7 x # of concurrent sessions to run in
Informatica) + 10 for growth + DBMS setting (DBMS
Setting: Oracle = 2 per user, Sybase = 40 (avg))
4. SEMMNU - (undo structures in system) = 0.80 x SEMMNI value
5. SEMUME - (max undo entries per process) = SEMMNU
6. SHMMNI - (shared memory identifiers) = SEMMNI + 10
· These settings must be changed by ROOT: etc/system file.
· About the CORE DUMP: To help Informatica figure out what's going wrong you can
run a unix utility: "truss" in the following
manner:
1. Shut down PMSERVER
2. login as "powermart" owner of pmserver - cd to the pmserver home directory.
3. Open Session Manager on another client - log in, and be ready to press "start"
for the sessions/batches causing problems.
4. type: truss -f -o truss.out pmserver <hit return>
5. On the client, press "start" for the sessions/batches having trouble.
6. When all the batches have completed or failed, press "stop server" from the
Server Manager
· Your "truss.out" file will have been created - thus giving you a log of all the
forked processes, and memory management /system
calls that will help decipher what's happing. you can examine the "truss.out" file
- look for: "killed" in the log.
· DONT FORGET: Following a CORE DUMP it's always a good idea to shut down the unix
server, and bounce the box (restart the
whole server).
Q: What happens when Oracle or Sybase goes down in the middle of a transformation?
77
It’s up to the database to recover up to the last commit point.> If you’re asking
this question, you should be thinking about re-runnability of
your processes.> Designing re-runability in to the processing/maps up front is the
best preventative measure you can have.> Utilizing the
recovery facility of PowerMart / PowerCenter appears to be sketchy at best –
particularly in this area of recovery.> The transformation
itself will eventually error out – stating that the database is no longer available
(or something to that effect).
Q: What happens when Oracle (or Sybase) is taken down for routine backup, but
nothing is running in PMServer at the time?
PMServer reports that the database is unavailable in the PMSERVER.err log.> When
Oracle/Sybase comes back on line, PMServer will
attempt to re-connect (if the repository is on the Oracle/Sybase instance that went
down), and eventually it will succeed (when
Oracle/Sybase becomes available again).> However – it is recommended that PMServer
be scheduled to shutdown before Oracle/Sybase
is taken off-line and scheduled to re-start after Oracle/Sybase is put back on-
line.
Q: What happens in a database when a cached LOOKUP object is created (during a
session)?
The session generates a select statement with an Order By clause. Any time this is
issued, the databases like Oracle and Sybase will
select (read) all the data from the table, in to the temporary database/space. Then
the data will be sorted, and read in chunks back to
Informatica server. This means, that hot-spot contention for a cached lookup will
NOT be the table it just read from. It will be the TEMP
area in the database, particularly if the TEMP area is being utilized for other
things. Also - once the cache is created, it is not re-read until
the next running session re-creates it.
Q: Can you explain how "constraint based load ordering" works? (27 Jan 2000)
Constraint based load ordering in PowerMart / PowerCenter works like this: it
controls the order in which the target tables are committed to
a relational database. It is of no use when sending information to a flat file. To
construct the proper constraint order: links between the
TARGET tables in Informatica need to be constructed. Simply turning on "constraint
based load ordering" has no effect on the operation
itself. Informatica does NOT read constraints from the database when this switch is
turned on. Again, to take advantage of this switch, you
must construct primary / foreign key relationships in the TARGET TABLES in the
designer of Informatica. Creating primary / foreign key
relationships is difficult - you are only allowed to link a single port (field) to
a single table as a primary / foreign key.
Q: It appears as if "constraint based load ordering" makes my session "hang" (it
never completes). How do I fix this? (27 Jan
2000)
We have a suggested method. The best known method for fixing this "hang" bug is to
1) open the map, 2) delete the target tables (parent /
child pairs) 3) Save the map, 4) Drag in the targets again, Parent's FIRST 5)
relink the ports, 6) Save the map, 7) refresh the session, and
re-run it. What it does: Informatica places the "target load order" as the order in
which the targets are created (in the map). It does this
because the repository is Seuqence ID Based and the session derives it's "commit"
order by the Sequence ID (unless constraint based
load ordering is ON), then it tries to re-arrange the commit order based on the
constraints in the Target Table definitions (in
PowerMart/PowerCenter). Once done, this will solve the commit ordering problems,
and the "constraint based" load ordering can even be
turned off in the session. Informatica claims not to support this feature in a
session that is not INSERT ONLY. However -we've gotten it to
work successfully in DATA DRIVEN environments. The only known cause (according to
Technical Support) is this: the writer is going to
commit a child table (as defined by the key links in the targets). It checks to see
if that particular parent row has been committed yet - but it
finds nothing (because the reader filled up the memory cache with new rows). The
memory that was holding the "committed" rows has
been "dumped" and no longer exists. So - the writer waits, and waits, and waits -
it never sees a "commit" for the parents, so it never
"commits" the child rows. This only appears to happen with files larger than a
certain number of rows (depending on your memory settings
for the session). The only fix is this: Set "ThrottleReader=20" in the PMSERVER.CFG
file. It apparently limits the Reader thread to a
maximum of "20" blocks for each session - thus leaving the writer more room to
cache the commit blocks. However - this too also hangs in
certain situations. To fix this, Tech Support recommends moving to PowerMart 4.6.2
release (internal core apparently needs a fix). 4.6.2
appears to be "better" behaved but not perfect. The only other way to fix this is
to turn off constraint based load ordering, choose a
different architecture for your maps (see my presentations), and control one
map/session per target table and their order of execution.
Q: Is there a way to copy a session with a map, when copying a map from repository
to repository? Say, copying from
Development to Acceptance?
Not that anyone is aware of. There is no direct straight forward method for copying
a session. This is the one downside to attempting to
version control by folder. You MUST re-create the session in Acceptance (UNLESS)
you backup the Development repository, and
RESTORE it in to acceptance. This is the only way to take all contents (and
sessions) from one repository to another. In this fashion, you
are versioning all of the repository at once. With the repository BINARY you can
then check this whole binary in to PVCS or some other
outside version control system. However, to recreate the session, the best method
is to: bring up Development folder/repo, side by side
with Acceptance folder/repo - then modify the settings in Acceptance as necessary.
Q: Can I set Informatica up for Target flat file, and target relational database?
Up through PowerMart 4.6.2, PowerCenter 1.6.2 this cannot be done in a single map.
The best method for this is to stay relational with
your first map, add a table to your database that looks exactly like the flat file
(1 for 1 with the flat file), target the two relational tables.
78
Then, construct another map which simply reads this "staging" table and dumps it to
flat file. You can batch the maps together as
sequential.
Q: How can you optimize use of an Oracle Sequence Generator?
In order to optimize the use of an Oracle Sequence Generator you must break up you
map. The generic method for calling a sequence
generator is to encapsulate it in a stored procedure. This is typically slow - and
kills the performance. Your version of Informatica's tool
should contain maplets to make this easier. Break the map up in to inserts only,
and updates only. The suggested method is as follows:
1) Create a staging table - bring the data in straight from the flat file in to the
staging table. 2) Create a maplet with the current logic in it.
3) create one INSERT map, and one Update map (separate inserts from updates) 4)
create a SOURCE called: DUAL, containing the
fields: DUMMY char(1), NEXTVAL NUMBER(15,0), CURRVAL number(15,0), 5) Copy the
source in to your INSERT map, 6) delete the
Source Qualifier for "dummy" 7) copy the "nextval" port in to the original source
qualifier (the one that pulls data from the staging table) 8)
Over-ride the SQL in the original source qualifier, (generate it, then change
DUAL.NEXTVAL to the sequence name: SQ_TEST.NEXTVAL.
9) Feed the "nextval" port through the mapplet. 10) Change the where clause on the
SQL over-ride to select only the data from the staging
table that doesn't exist in the parent target (to be inserted. This is extremely
fast, and will allow your inserts only map to operate at
incredibly high throughput while using an Oracle Sequence Generator. Be sure to
tune your indexes on the Oracle tables so that there is a
high read throughput.
Q: Why can't I over-ride the SQL in a lookup, and make the lookup non-cached?
· Apparently Informatica hasn't made this feature available yet in their tool. It's
a shame - it would simplify the method for pulling
Oracle Sequence numbers from the database. For now - it's simply not implemented.
Q: Does it make a difference if I push all my ports (fields) through an expression,
or push only the ports which are used in the
expression?
· From the work that has been done - it doesn't make much of an impact on the
overall speed of the map. If the paradigm is to
push all ports through the expressions for readability then do so, however if it's
easier to push the ports around the expression
(not through it), then do so.
Q: What is the affect of having multiple expression objects vs one expression
object with all the expressions?
· Less overall objects in the map make the map/session run faster. Consolodating
expressions in to a single expression object is
most helpful to throughput - but can increase the complexity (maintenance). Read
the question/answer about execution cycles
above for hints on how to setup a large expression like this.
Q.Am using a SP that returns a resultset. ( ex : select * from cust where cust_id =
@cust_id )I am supposed to load the contents of this into
the target..As simple as it seems , I am not able to pass the the mapping
parameters for cust_idAlso , I cannot have a mapping without SQ
Tranf.
Ans: Here select * from cust where cust_id = @cust_id is wrong it should be like
this: select * from cust where cust_id = ‘$$cust_id‘
Q.My requirement is like this: Target table structure. Col1, col2, col3, filename
The source file structure will have col1, col2 and col3. All the 10 files have the
same structure but different filenames. when i run my
mapping thro' file list, i am able to load all the 10 files but the filename column
is empty. Hence my requirement is that while reading from
the file list, is there any way i can extract the filename and populate into my
target table.what u have said is that it will populate into a
separate table. But in no way i can find which record has come from which file. Pls
help?
Ans: Here PMCMD command can be used with shell script to run the same session by
changing the source file name dynamically in the
parameter file.
Q.Hi all,i am fighting with this problem for a quiet a bit of time now.I need your
help guys (plz)i am trying to load data from DB2 to
Oracle.the column in DB2 is of LONGVARCHAR and the column in Oracle that i am
mapping to is of CLOB data type.for this it is giving
'parameter binding error,illegal parameter value in LOB function'plz if anybody had
faced this kind of problem,guide me.
(log file give problem as follows:
WRITER_1_*_1> WRT_8167 Start loading table [SHR_ASSOCIATION] at: Mon Jan 03
17:21:17 2005
WRITER_1_*_1> Mon Jan 03 17:21:17 2005
WRITER_1_*_1> WRT_8229 Database errors occurred:
Database driver error...parameter binding failed
ORA-24801: illegal parameter value in OCI lob function Database driver error...)
Ans: Informatica Powercenter below 6.2.1 doesn’t supports CLOB/BLOB data types but
this is supported in 7.0 onwards. So please
upgrade to this version or change the data type of u r column to the suitable one.
Q.Hi We are doing production support, when I checked one mapping I found that for
that mapping Source is Sybase and Target is Oracle
table (in mapping) when I checked in the session for the same maping I found that
In session properties they declared the target as Flat file
Is it possible?? if so how....when it’s possible?
79
Ans: I think they are loading the data from SYBASE source to Oracle Target using
the External Loader.
Q.Is there *any* way to use a SQL statement as a source rather than a table or
tables and join them in Informatica via aggregator's, Join's,
etc... ?
Ans: SQL Override is there in the Source Qualifier Transformation.
Q.I have a data file in which each record may contain variable number of fields. I
have to store these records in oracle table with one to one
relationship between record in data file and record in table.
Ans: Question is not clear. But I think he should have the structure of all the
records depending on its type. Then use a sequence
transformation for getting an unique id for each record.
Give the two types of tables involved in producing a star schema and the type of
data they hold.
Answer:
Fact tables and dimension tables. A fact table contains measurements while
dimension tables will contain data that will help describe the
fact tables.
What are types of Facts?
Answer: There are three types of facts:
Additive: Additive facts are facts that can be summed up through all of the
dimensions in the fact table.
Semi-Additive: Semi-additive facts are facts that can be summed up for some of the
dimensions in the fact table, but not the others.
Non-Additive: Non-additive facts are facts that cannot be summed up for any of the
dimensions present in the fact table.
What are non-additive facts in detail?
Answer:
A fact may be measure, metric or a dollar value. Measure and metric are non
additive facts.
Dollar value is additive fact. If we want to find out the amount for a particular
place for a particular period of time, we can add the dollar
amounts and come up with the total amount.
A non additive fact, for eg measure height(s) for ‘citizens by geographical
location’ , when we rollup ‘city’ data to ’state’ level data we should
not add heights of the citizens rather we may want to use it to derive ‘count’
What is the difference between view and materialized view?
View - store the SQL statement in the database and let you use it as a table.
Everytime you access the view, the SQL statement executes.
Materialized View - stores the results of the SQL in table form in the database.
SQL statement only executes once and after that everytime
you run the query, the stored result set is used. Pros include quick query results
What is active data warehousing?
An active data warehouse provides information that enables decision-makers within
an organization to manage customer relationships
nimbly, efficiently and proactively. Active data warehousing is all about
integrating advanced decision support with day-to-day-even minuteto-
minute-decision making in a way that increases quality of those customer touches
which encourages customer loyalty and thus secure
an organization’s bottom line. The marketplace is coming of age as we progress from
first-generation “passive” decision-support systems
to current- and next-generation “active” data warehouse implementations
What is SKAT?
Answer:
Symbolic Knowledge Acquisition Technology (SKAT).
A system based on SKAT develops an evolving model from a set of elementary blocks,
sufficient to describe an arbitrarily complex
algorithm hidden in data, instead of routine searching for the best coefficients
for a solution that belongs to some predetermined group of
functions. Each time a better model is found, the system determines the best
regression parameters for that model. In most general terms,
this technology can be classified as a branch of Evolutionary Programming.
What is Memory Based Reasoning (MBR)?
Answer:
To forecast a future situation, or to make a correct decision, such systems find
the closest past analogs of the present situation and choose
the same solution which was the right one in those past situations. That is why
this method is also called the nearest neighbor method.
Give reasons for the growing popularity of Data Mining.
Answer:
Reasons for the growing popularity of Data Mining
80
Growing Data Volume

The main reason for necessity of automated computer systems for intelligent data
analysis is the enormous volume of existing and newly
appearing data that require processing. The amount of data accumulated each day by
various business, scientific, and governmental
organizations around the world is daunting. According to information from GTE
research center, only scientific organizations store each day
about 1 TB (terabyte!) of new information. And it is well known that academic world
is by far not the leading supplier of new data. It
becomes impossible for human analysts to cope with such overwhelming amounts of
data.
Limitations of Human Analysis
Two other problems that surface when human analysts process data are the inadequecy
of the human brain when searching for compex
multifactorial dependencies in data, and the lack of objectiveness in such an
analysis. A human expert is always a hostage of the previous
experience of investigating other systems. Sometimes this helps, sometimes this
hurts, but it is almost impossible to get rid of this fact.
Low Cost of Machine Learning
One additional benefit of using automated data mining systems is that this process
has a much lower cost than hiring an army of highly
trained (and payed) professional statisticians. While data mining does not
eliminate human participation in solving the task completely, it
significantly simplifies the job and allows an analyst who is not a professional in
statistics and programming to manage the process of
extracting knowledge from data.
What is Market Basket Analysis?
Answer :
Processing transactional data in order to find those groups of products that are
sold together well. One also searches for directed
association rules identifying the best product to be offered with a current
selection of purchased products
What is Clustering?
Answer :
Clustering. Sometimes called segmentation, clustering identifies people who share
common characteristics, and averages those
characteristics to form a “characteristic vector” or “centroid.” Clustering systems
usually let you specify how many clusters to identify within
a group of profiles, and then try to find the set of clusters that best represents
the most profiles.Clustering is used directly by some vendors
to provide reports on general characteristics of different visitor groups. These
techniques require training, and suffer from drift on Web sites
with dynamic Web pages.
What are cubes?
Answer :
Cubes are data processing units composed of fact tables and dimensions from the
data warehouse. They provide multidimensional views
of data, querying and analytical capabilities to clients.
What are measures?
Answer :
Measures are numeric data based on columns in a fact table. They are the primary
data which end users are interested in. E.g. a sales fact
table may contain a profit measure which represents profit on each sale.
What are dimensions?
Answer :
Dimensions are categories by which summarized data can be viewed. E.g. a profit
summary in a fact table can be viewed by a Time
dimension, Region dimension, Product dimension
What are fact tables?
Answer :
A fact table is a table that contains summarized numerical and historical data
(facts) and a multipart index composed of foreign keys from
the primary keys of related dimension tables.
What are the benefits of Data Warehousing?
Answer :
Data warehouses are designed to perform well with aggregate queries running on
large amounts of data.
The structure of data warehouses is easier for end users to navigate, understand
and query against unlike the relational databases
primarily designed to handle lots of transactions.
Data warehouses enable queries that cut across different segments of a company’s
operation. E.g. production data could be compared
against inventory data even if they were originally stored in different databases
with different structures.
Queries that would be complex in very normalized databases could be easier to build
and maintain in data warehouses, decreasing the
workload on transaction systems.
81
Data warehousing is an efficient way to manage and report on data that is from a
variety of sources, non uniform and scattered throughout
a company.
Data warehousing is an efficient way to manage demand for lots of information from
lots of users.
Data warehousing provides the capability to analyze large amounts of historical
data for nuggets of wisdom that can provide an
organization with competitive advantage.
What does data management consist of?
Answer :
Data management, as it relates to data warehousing, consists of four key areas
associated with improving the management, and ultimately
the usability and reliability, of data. These are:
Data profiling: Understanding the data we have.
Data quality: Improving the quality of data we have.
Data integration: Combining similar data from multiple sources.
Data augmentation: Improving the value of the data.
How is a data warehouse different from a normal database?
Answer :
Every company conducting business inputs valuable information into transactional-
oriented data stores. The distinguishing traits of these
online transaction processing (OLTP) databases are that they handle very detailed,
day-to-day segments of data, are very write-intensive
by nature and are designed to maximize data input and throughput while minimizing
data contention and resource-intensive data
lookups.By contrast, a data warehouse is constructed to manage aggregated,
historical data records, is very read-intensive by nature and
is oriented to maximize data output. Usually, a data warehouse is fed a daily diet
of detailed business data in overnight batch loads with the
intricate daily transactions being aggregated into more historical and analytically
formatted database objects. Naturally, since a data
warehouse is a collection of a business entity’s historical information, it tends
to be much larger in terms of size than its OLTP counterpart.
Do you know what a local lookup is?
Answer :
This function is similar to a mlookup…the difference being that this funtion
returns NULL when there is no record having the value that has
been mentioned in the arguments of the function.
If it finfs the matching record it returns the complete record..that is all the
fields along with their values corresponding to the expression
mentioned in the lookup local function.
eg: lookup_local( “LOOKUP_FILE”,81) -> null
if the key on which the lookup file is patitioned does not hold any value as
mentioned.
What is ODS?
Answer :
1. ODS means Operational Data Store.
2. A collection of operation or bases data that is extracted from operation
databases and standardized, cleansed, consolidated,
transformed, and loaded into an enterprise data architecture. An ODS is used to
support data mining of operational data, or as the store for
base data that is summarized for a data warehouse. The ODS may also be used to
audit the data warehouse to assure summarized and
derived data is calculated properly. The ODS may further become the enterprise
shared operational database, allowing operational
systems that are being reengineered to use the ODS as there operation databases.
Why should you put your data warehouse on a different system than your OLTP system?
Answer :
A OLTP system is basically ” data oriented ” (ER model) and not ” Subject oriented
“(Dimensional Model) .That is why we design a
separate system that will have a subject oriented OLAP system…
What are conformed dimensions?
Answer :
Conformed dimensions mean the exact same thing with every possible fact table to
which they are joined
Ex:Date Dimensions is connected all facts like Sales facts,Inventory facts..etc
What is ETL?
Answer :
ETL stands for extraction, transformation and loading.
ETL provide developers with an interface for designing source-to-target mappings,
ransformation and job control parameter.
· Extraction
Take data from an external source and move it to the warehouse pre-processor
database.
· Transformation
Transform data task allows point-to-point generating, modifying and transforming
data.
82
· Loading
Load data task adds records to a database table in a warehouse.
What does level of Granularity of a fact table signify?
Answer :
Granularity The first step in designing a fact table is to determine the
granularity of the fact table. By granularity, we mean the lowest level
of information that will be stored in the fact table. This constitutes two steps:
Determine which dimensions will be included. Determine
where along the hierarchy of each dimension the information will be kept. The
determining factors usually goes back to the requirements
What is the Difference between OLTP and OLAP?
Answer :
Main Differences between OLTP and OLAP are:-
1. User and System Orientation
OLTP: customer-oriented, used for data analysis and querying by clerks, clients and
IT professionals.
OLAP: market-oriented, used for data analysis by knowledge workers( managers,
executives, analysis).
2. Data Contents
OLTP: manages current data, very detail-oriented.
OLAP: manages large amounts of historical data, provides facilities for
summarization and aggregation, stores information at different
levels of granularity to support decision making process.
3. Database Design
OLTP: adopts an entity relationship(ER) model and an application-oriented database
design.
OLAP: adopts star, snowflake or fact constellation model and a subject-oriented
database design.
4. View
OLTP: focuses on the current data within an enterprise or department.
OLAP: spans multiple versions of a database schema due to the evolutionary process
of an organization; integrates information from many
organizational locations and data stores
Why are OLTP database designs not generally a good idea for a Data Warehouse?
Answer :
Since in OLTP,tables are normalised and hence query response will be slow for end
user and OLTP doesnot contain years of data and
hence cannot be analysed.
---------------------------------------------
161703153-All-in-One-Informatica-Questionnaire.pdf
1. What are the components of Informatica? And what is the purpose of each?
Ans: Informatica Designer, Server Manager & Repository Manager. Designer for
Creating Source & Target
definitions, Creating Mapplets and Mappings etc. Server Manager for creating
sessions & batches, Scheduling
the sessions & batches, Monitoring the triggered sessions and batches, giving post
and pre session commands,
creating database connections to various instances etc. Repository Manage for
Creating and Adding
repositories, Creating & editing folders within a repository, Establishing users,
groups, privileges & folder
permissions, Copy, delete, backup a repository, Viewing the history of sessions,
Viewing the locks on various
objects and removing those locks etc.
2. What is a repository? And how to add it in an informatica client?
Ans: It’s a location where all the mappings and sessions related information is
stored. Basically it’s a database
where the metadata resides. We can add a repository through the Repository manager.
3. Name at least 5 different types of transformations used in mapping design and
state the use of
each.
Ans: Source Qualifier – Source Qualifier represents all data queries from the
source, Expression – Expression
performs simple calculations,
Filter – Filter serves as a conditional filter,
Lookup – Lookup looks up values and passes to other objects,
Aggregator - Aggregator performs aggregate calculations.
4. How can a transformation be made reusable?
Ans: In the edit properties of any transformation there is a check box to make it
reusable, by checking that it
becomes reusable. You can even create reusable transformations in Transformation
developer.
5. How are the sources and targets definitions imported in informatica designer?
How to create Target
definition for flat files?
Ans: When you are in source analyzer there is a option in main menu to Import the
source from Database, Flat
File, Cobol File & XML file, by selecting any one of them you can import a source
definition. When you are in
Warehouse Designer there is an option in main menu to import the target from
Database, XML from File and
XML from sources you can select any one of these.
There is no way to import target definition as file in Informatica designer. So
while creating the target definition
for a file in the warehouse designer it is created considering it as a table, and
then in the session properties of
that mapping it is specified as file.
6. Explain what is sql override for a source table in a mapping.
Ans: The Source Qualifier provides the SQL Query option to override the default
query. You can enter any SQL
statement supported by your source database. You might enter your own SELECT
statement, or have the
database perform aggregate calculations, or call a stored procedure or stored
function to read the data and
perform some tasks.
7. What is lookup override?
Ans: This feature is similar to entering a custom query in a Source Qualifier
transformation. When entering a
Lookup SQL Override, you can enter the entire override, or generate and edit the
default SQL statement.
The lookup query override can include WHERE clause.
8. What are mapplets? How is it different from a Reusable Transformation?
Ans: A mapplet is a reusable object that represents a set of transformations. It
allows you to reuse
transformation logic and can contain as many transformations as you need. You
create mapplets in the Mapplet
Designer.
Its different than a reusable transformation as it may contain a set of
transformations, while a reusable
transformation is a single one.
9. How to use an oracle sequence generator in a mapping?
1
Ans: We have to write a stored procedure, which can take the sequence name as input
and dynamically
generates a nextval from that sequence. Then in the mapping we can use that stored
procedure through a
procedure transformation.
10. What is a session and how to create it?
Ans: A session is a set of instructions that tells the Informatica Server how and
when to move data from sources
to targets. You create and maintain sessions in the Server Manager.
11. How to create the source and target database connections in server manager?
Ans: In the main menu of server manager there is menu “Server Configuration”, in
that there is the menu
“Database connections”. From here you can create the Source and Target database
connections.
12. Where are the source flat files kept before running the session?
Ans: The source flat files can be kept in some folder on the Informatica server or
any other machine, which is in
its domain.
13. What are the oracle DML commands possible through an update strategy?
Ans: dd_insert, dd_update, dd_delete & dd_reject.
14. How to update or delete the rows in a target, which do not have key fields?
Ans: To Update a table that does not have any Keys we can do a SQL Override of the
Target Transformation by
specifying the WHERE conditions explicitly. Delete cannot be done this way. In this
case you have to
specifically mention the Key for Target table definition on the Target
transformation in the Warehouse Designer
and delete the row using the Update Strategy transformation.
15. What is option by which we can run all the sessions in a batch simultaneously?
Ans: In the batch edit box there is an option called concurrent. By checking that
all the sessions in that Batch will
run concurrently.
16. Informatica settings are available in which file?
Ans: Informatica settings are available in a file pmdesign.ini in Windows folder.
17. How can we join the records from two heterogeneous sources in a mapping?
Ans: By using a joiner.
18. Difference between Connected & Unconnected look-up.
Ans: An unconnected Lookup transformation exists separate from the pipeline in the
mapping. You write an
expression using the :LKP reference qualifier to call the lookup within another
transformation. While the
connected lookup forms a part of the whole flow of mapping.
19. Difference between Lookup Transformation & Unconnected Stored Procedure
Transformation –
Which one is faster ?
20. Compare Router Vs Filter & Source Qualifier Vs Joiner.
Ans: A Router transformation has input ports and output ports. Input ports reside
in the input group, and output
ports reside in the output groups. Here you can test data based on one or more
group filter conditions.
But in filter you can filter data based on one or more conditions before writing it
to targets.
A source qualifier can join data coming from same source database. While a joiner
is used to combine data from
heterogeneous sources. It can even join data from two tables from same database.
A source qualifier can join more than two sources. But a joiner can join only two
sources.
21. How to Join 2 tables connected to a Source Qualifier w/o having any
relationship defined ?
Ans: By writing an sql override.
22. In a mapping there are 2 targets to load header and detail, how to ensure that
header loads first then
detail table.
2
Ans: Constraint Based Loading (if no relationship at oracle level) OR Target Load
Plan (if only 1 source qualifier
for both tables) OR select first the header target table and then the detail table
while dragging them in mapping.
23. A mapping just take 10 seconds to run, it takes a source file and insert into
target, but before that
there is a Stored Procedure transformation which takes around 5 minutes to run and
gives output
‘Y’ or ‘N’. If Y then continue feed or else stop the feed. (Hint: since SP
transformation takes more
time compared to the mapping, it shouldn’t run row wise).
Ans: There is an option to run the stored procedure before starting to load the
rows.
Data warehousing concepts
1.What is difference between view and materialized view?
Views contains query whenever execute views it has read from base table
Where as M views loading or replicated takes place only once, which gives you
better query performance
Refresh m views 1.on commit and 2. on demand
(Complete, never, fast, force)
2.What is bitmap index why it’s used for DWH?
A bitmap for each key value replaces a list of rowids. Bitmap index more efficient
for data warehousing because
low cardinality, low updates, very efficient for where class
3.What is star schema? And what is snowflake schema?
The center of the star consists of a large fact table and the points of the star
are the dimension tables.
Snowflake schemas normalized dimension tables to eliminate redundancy. That is, the
Dimension data has been grouped into multiple tables instead of one large table.
Star schema contains demoralized dimension tables and fact table, each primary key
values in dimension table
associated with foreign key of fact tables.
Here a fact table contains all business measures (normally numeric data) and
foreign key values, and dimension
tables has details about the subject area.
Snowflake schema basically a normalized dimension tables to reduce redundancy in
the dimension tables
4.Why need staging area database for DWH?
Staging area needs to clean operational data before loading into data warehouse.
Cleaning in the sense your merging data which comes from different source
5.What are the steps to create a database in manually?
create os service and create init file and start data base no mount stage then give
create data base
command.
6.Difference between OLTP and DWH?
OLTP system is basically application orientation (eg, purchase order it is
functionality of an application)
Where as in DWH concern is subject orient (subject in the sense custorer, product,
item, time)
OLTP
· Application Oriented
· Used to run business
· Detailed data
· Current up to date
· Isolated Data
· Repetitive access
· Clerical User
· Performance Sensitive
· Few Records accessed at a time (tens)
· Read/Update Access
· No data redundancy
· Database Size 100MB-100 GB
DWH
· Subject Oriented
· Used to analyze business
· Summarized and refined
3
· Snapshot data
· Integrated Data
· Ad-hoc access
· Knowledge User
· Performance relaxed
· Large volumes accessed at a time(millions)
· Mostly Read (Batch Update)
· Redundancy present
· Database Size 100 GB - few terabytes
7.Why need data warehouse?
A single, complete and consistent store of data obtained from a variety of
different sources made available to
end users in a what they can understand and use in a business context.
A process of transforming data into information and making it available to users in
a timely enough manner to
make a difference Information
Technique for assembling and managing data from various sources for the purpose of
answering business
questions. Thus making decisions that were not previous possible
8.What is difference between data mart and data warehouse?
A data mart designed for a particular line of business, such as sales, marketing,
or finance.
Where as data warehouse is enterprise-wide/organizational
The data flow of data warehouse depending on the approach
9.What is the significance of surrogate key?
Surrogate key used in slowly changing dimension table to track old and new values
and it’s derived from primary
key.
10.What is slowly changing dimension. What kind of scd used in your project?
Dimension attribute values may change constantly over the time. (Say for example
customer dimension has
customer_id,name, and address) customer address may change over time.
How will you handle this situation?
There are 3 types, one is we can overwrite the existing record, second one is
create additional new record at the
time of change with the new attribute values.
Third one is create new field to keep new values in the original dimension table.
11.What is difference between primary key and unique key constraints?
Primary key maintains uniqueness and not null values
Where as unique constrains maintain unique values and null values
12.What are the types of index? And is the type of index used in your project?
Bitmap index, B-tree index, Function based index, reverse key and composite index.
We used Bitmap index in our project for better performance.
13.How is your DWH data modeling(Details about star schema)?
14.A table have 3 partitions but I want to update in 3rd partitions how will you
do?
Specify partition name in the update statement. Say for example
Update employee partition(name) a, set a.empno=10 where ename=’Ashok’
15.When you give an update statement how memory flow will happen and how oracles
allocate memory
for that?
Oracle first checks in Shared sql area whether same Sql statement is available if
it is there it uses.
Otherwise allocate memory in shared sql area and then create run time memory in
Private sql area to create
parse tree and execution plan. Once it completed stored in the shared sql area
wherein previously allocated
memory
16.Write a query to find out 5th max salary? In Oracle, DB2, SQL Server
4
Select (list the columns you want) from (select salary from employee order by
salary)
Where rownum<5
17.When you give an update statement how undo/rollback segment will work/what are
the steps?
Oracle keep old values in undo segment and new values in redo entries. When you say
rollback it replace old
values from undo segment. When you say commit erase the undo segment values and
keep new vales in
permanent.
Informatica Administration
18.What is DTM? How will you configure it?
DTM transform data received from reader buffer and its moves transformation to
transformation on row by
row basis and it uses transformation caches when necessary.
19.You transfer 100000 rows to target but some rows get discard how will you trace
them? And where its
get loaded?
Rejected records are loaded into bad files. It has record indicator and column
indicator.
Record indicator identified by (0-insert,1-update,2-delete,3-reject) and column
indicator identified by (D-valid,Ooverflow,
N-null,T-truncated).
Normally data may get rejected in different reason due to transformation logic
20.What are the different uses of a repository manager?
Repository manager used to create repository which contains metadata the
informatica uses to transform
data from source to target. And also it use to create informatica user’s and
folders and copy, backup and restore
the repository
21.How do you take care of security using a repository manager?
Using repository privileges, folder permission and locking.
Repository privileges(Session operator, Use designer, Browse repository, Create
session and batches,
Administer repository, administer server, super user)
Folder permission(owner, groups, users)
Locking(Read, Write, Execute, Fetch, Save)
22.What is a folder?
Folder contains repository objects such as sources, targets, mappings,
transformation which are helps
logically organize our data warehouse.
23.Can you create a folder within designer?
Not possible
24.What are shortcuts? Where it can be used? What are the advantages?
There are 2 shortcuts(Local and global) Local used in local repository and global
used in global repository. The
advantage is reuse an object without creating multiple objects. Say for example a
source definition want to use
in 10 mappings in 10 different folder without creating 10 multiple source you
create 10 shotcuts.
25.How do you increase the performance of mappings?
Use single pass read(use one source qualifier instead of multiple SQ for same
table)
Minimize data type conversion (Integer to Decimal again back to Integer)
Optimize transformation(when you use Lookup, aggregator, filter, rank and joiner)
Use caches for lookup
Aggregator use presorted port, increase cache size, minimize input/out port as much
as possible
5
Use Filter wherever possible to avoid unnecessary data flow
26.Explain Informatica Architecture?
Informatica consist of client and server. Client tools such as Repository manager,
Designer, Server
manager. Repository data base contains metadata it read by informatica server used
read data from source,
transforming and loading into target.
27.How will you do sessions partitions?
It’s not available in power part 4.7
Transformation
28.What are the constants used in update strategy?
DD_INSERT, DD_UPDATE, DD_DELETE, DD_REJECT
29.What is difference between connected and unconnected lookup transformation?
Connected lookup return multiple values to other transformation
Where as unconnected lookup return one values
If lookup condition matches Connected lookup return user defined default values
Where as unconnected lookup return null values
Connected supports dynamic caches where as unconnected supports static
30.What you will do in session level for update strategy transformation?
In session property sheet set Treat rows as “Data Driven”
31.What are the port available for update strategy , sequence generator, Lookup,
stored procedure
transformation?
Transformations Port
Update strategy Input, Output
Sequence Generator Output only
Lookup Input, Output, Lookup, Return
Stored Procedure Input, Output
32.Why did you used connected stored procedure why don’t use unconnected stored
procedure?
33.What is active and passive transformations?
Active transformation change the no. of records when passing to targe(example
filter)
where as passive transformation will not change the transformation(example
expression)
34.What are the tracing level?
Normal – It contains only session initialization details and transformation details
no. records rejected, applied
Terse - Only initialization details will be there
Verbose Initialization – Normal setting information plus detailed information about
the transformation.
Verbose data – Verbose init. Settings and all information about the session
35.How will you make records in groups?
Using group by port in aggregator
36.Need to store value like 145 into target when you use aggregator, how will you
do that?
Use Round() function
37.How will you move mappings from development to production database?
Copy all the mapping from development repository and paste production repository
while paste it will promt
whether you want replace/rename. If say replace informatica replace all the source
tables with repository
database.
38.What is difference between aggregator and expression?
6
Aggregator is active transformation and expression is passive transformation
Aggregator transformation used to perform aggregate calculation on group of records
really
Where as expression used perform calculation with single record
39.Can you use mapping without source qualifier?
Not possible, If source RDBMS/DBMS/Flat file use SQ or use normalizer if the source
cobol feed
40.When do you use a normalizer?
Normalized can be used in Relational to denormilize data.
41.What are stored procedure transformations. Purpose of sp transformation. How did
you go about
using your project?
Connected and unconnected stored procudure.
Unconnected stored procedure used for data base level activities such as pre and
post load
Connected stored procedure used in informatica level for example passing one
parameter as input and
capturing return value from the stored procedure.
Normal - row wise check
Pre-Load Source - (Capture source incremental data for incremental aggregation)
Post-Load Source - (Delete Temporary tables)
Pre-Load Target - (Check disk space available)
Post-Load Target – (Drop and recreate index)
42.What is lookup and difference between types of lookup. What exactly happens when
a lookup is
cached. How does a dynamic lookup cache work.
key values).
There are 2 type connected and unconnected transformation
Connected lookup returns multiple values if condition true
Where as unconnected return a single values through return port.
Connected lookup return default user value if the condition does not mach
Where as unconnected return null values
Lookup cache does:
Read the source/target table and stored in the lookup cache
43.What is a joiner transformation?
Used for heterogeneous sources(A relational source and a flat file)
Type of joins:
Assume 2 tables has values(Master - 1, 2, 3 and Detail - 1, 3, 4)
Normal(If the condition mach both master and detail tables then the records will be
displaced. Result set 1, 3)
Master Outer(It takes all the rows from detail table and maching rows from master
table. Result set 1, 3, 4)
Detail Outer(It takes all the values from master source and maching values from
detail table. Result set 1, 2, 3)
Full Outer(It takes all values from both tables)
44.What is aggregator transformation how will you use in your project?
Used perform aggregate calculation on group of records and we can use conditional
clause to filter data
45.Can you use one mapping to populate two tables in different schemas?
Yes we can use
46.Explain lookup cache, various caches?
key values).
Various Caches:
Persistent cache (we can save the lookup cache files and reuse them the next time
process the lookup
transformation)
7
Re-cache from database (If the persistent cache not synchronized with lookup table
you can configure the
lookup transformation to rebuild the lookup cache)
Static cache (When the lookup condition is true, Informatica server return a value
from lookup cache and
it’s does not update the cache while it processes the lookup transformation)
Dynamic cache (Informatica server dynamically inserts new rows or update existing
rows in the cache and
the target. Suppose if we want lookup a target table we can use dynamic cache)
Shared cache (we can share lookup transformation between multiple transformations
in a mapping. 2
lookup in a mapping can share single lookup cache)
47.Which path will the cache be created?
User specified directory. If we say c:\ all the cache files created in this
directory.
48.Where do you specify all the parameters for lookup caches?
Lookup property sheet/tab.
49.How do you remove the cache files after the transformation?
After session complete, DTM remove cache memory and deletes caches files.
In case using persistent cache and Incremental aggregation then caches files will
be saved.
50.What is the use of aggregator transformation?
To perform Aggregate calculation
Use conditional clause to filter data in the expression Sum(commission, Commission
>2000)
Use non-aggregate function iif (max(quantity) > 0, Max(quantitiy), 0))
51.What are the contents of index and cache files?
Index caches files hold unique group values as determined by group by port in the
transformation.
Data caches files hold row data until it performs necessary calculation.
52.How do you call a store procedure within a transformation?
In the expression transformation create new out port in the expression write
:sp.stored procedure
name(arguments)
53.Is there any performance issue in connected & unconnected lookup? If yes, How?
Yes
Unconnected lookup much more faster than connected lookup why because in
unconnected not connected
to any other transformation we are calling it from other transformation so it
minimize lookup cache value
Where as connected transformation connected to other transformation so it keeps
values in the lookup cache.
54.What is dynamic lookup?
When we use target lookup table, Informatica server dynamically insert new values
or it updates if the
values exist and passes to target table.
55.How Informatica read data if source have one relational and flat file?
Use joiner transformation after source qualifier before other transformation.
56.How you will load unique record into target flat file from source flat files has
duplicate data?
There are 2 we can do this either we can use Rank transformation or oracle external
table
In rank transformation using group by port (Group the records) and then set no. of
rank 1. Rank transformation
return one value from the group. That the values will be a unique one.
8
57.Can you use flat file for repository?
No, We cant
58.Can you use flat file for lookup table?
No, We cant
59.Without Source Qualifier and joiner how will you join tables?
In session level we have option user defined join. Where we can write join
condition.
60.Update strategy set DD_Update but in session level have insert. What will
happens?
Insert take place. Because this option override the mapping level option
Sessions and batches
61.What are the commit intervals?
Source based commit (Based on the no. of active source records(Source qualifier)
reads. Commit interval set
10000 rows and source qualifier reads 10000 but due to transformation logic 3000
rows get rejected when 7000
reach target commit will fire, so writer buffer does not rows held the buffer)
Target based commit (Based on the rows in the buffer and commit interval. Target
based commit set 10000 but
writer buffer fills every 7500, next time buffer fills 15000 now commit statement
will fire then 22500 like go on.)
62.When we use router transformation?
When we want perform multiple condition to filter out data then we go for router.
(Say for example source
records 50 filter condition mach 10 records remaining 40 records get filter out but
still we want perform few more
filter condition to filter remaining 40 records.)
63.How did you schedule sessions in your project?
Run once (set 2 parameter date and time when session should start)
Run Every (Informatica server run session at regular interval as we configured,
parameter Days, hour, minutes,
end on, end after, forever)
Customized repeat (Repeat every 2 days, daily frequency hr, min, every week, every
month)
Run only on demand(Manually run) this not session scheduling.
64.How do you use the pre-sessions and post-sessions in sessions wizard, what for
they used?
Post-session used for email option when the session success/failure send email. For
that we should
configure
Step1. Should have a informatica startup account and create outlook profile for
that user
Step2. Configure Microsoft exchange server in mail box applet(control panel)
Step3. Configure informatica server miscellaneous tab have one option called MS
exchange profile where
we have specify the outlook profile name.
Pre-session used for even scheduling (Say for example we don’t know whether source
file available or not
in particular directory. For that we write one DOS command to move file directory
to destination and set event
based scheduling option in session property sheet Indicator file wait for).
65.What are different types of batches. What are the advantages and dis-advantages
of a concurrent
batch?
separately.
one session. Split sessions
and put into one concurrent batches to complete quickly.
9
Disadvantage
66.How do you handle a session if some of the records fail. How do you stop the
session in case of
errors. Can it be achieved in mapping level or session level?
It can be achieved in session level only. In session property sheet, log files tab
one option is the error handling
Stop on ------ errors. Based on the error we set informatica server stop the
session.
67.How you do improve the performance of session.
If we use Aggregator transformation use sorted port, Increase aggregate cache size,
Use filter before
aggregation so that it minimize unnecessary aggregation.
Lookup transformation use lookup caches
Increase DTM shared memory allocation
Eliminating transformation errors using lower tracing level(Say for example a
mapping has 50 transformation
when transformation error occur informatica server has to write in session log file
it affect session performance)
68.Explain incremental aggregation. Will that increase the performance? How?
Incremental aggregation capture whatever changes made in source used for aggregate
calculation in a session,
rather than processing the entire source and recalculating the same calculation
each time session run.
Therefore it improve session performance.
Only use incremental aggregation following situation:
Mapping have aggregate calculation
Source table changes incrementally
Filtering source incremental data by time stamp
Before Aggregation have to do following steps:
Use filter transformation to remove pre-existing records
Reinitialize aggregate cache when source table completely changes for example
incremental changes happing
daily and complete changes happenings monthly once. So when the source table
completely change we have
reinitialize the aggregate cache and truncate target table use new source table.
Choose Reinitialize cache in the
aggregation behavior in transformation tab
69.Concurrent batches have 3 sessions and set each session run if previous complete
but 2nd fail then
what will happen the batch?
Batch will fail
General Project
70. How many mapping, dimension tables, Fact tables and any complex mapping you
did? And what is
your database size, how frequently loading to DWH?
I did 22 Mapping, 4 dimension table and one fact table. One complex mapping I did
for slowly changing
dimension table. Database size is 9GB. Loading data every day
71. What are the different transformations used in your project?
Aggregator, Expression, Filter, Sequence generator, Update Strategy, Lookup, Stored
Procedure, Joiner, Rank,
Source Qualifier.
72. How did you populate the dimensions tables?
73. What are the sources you worked on?
Oracle
74. How many mappings have you developed on your whole dwh project?
45 mappings
10
75. What is OS used your project?
Windows NT
76. Explain your project (Fact table, dimensions, and database size)
Fact table contains all business measures (numeric values) and foreign key values,
Dimension table contains
details about subject area like customer, product
77.What is difference between Informatica power mart and power center?
78.Have you done any complex mapping?
Developed one mapping to handle slowly changing dimension table.
79.Explain details about DTM?
Once we session start, load manager start DTM and it allocate session shared memory
and contains reader and
writer. Reader will read source data from source qualifier using SQL statement and
move data to DTM then
DTM transform data to transformation to transformation and row by row basis finally
move data to writer then
writer write data into target using SQL statement.
I-Flex Interview (14 th May 2003)
80.What are the key you used other than primary key and foreign key?
Used surrogate key to maintain uniqueness to overcome duplicate value in the
primary key.
81.Data flow of your Data warehouse(Architecture)
DWH is a basic architecture (OLTP to Data warehouse from DWH OLAP analytical and
report building.
82.Difference between Power part and power center?
83.What are the batches and it’s details?
separately.
one session. Split sessions
and put into one concurrent batches to complete quickly.
Disadvantage
84.What is external table in oracle. How oracle read the flat file
Used for read flat file. Oracle internally write SQL loader script with control
file.
85.What are the index you used? Bitmap join index?
11
Bitmap index used in data warehouse environment to increase query response time,
since DWH has low
cardinality, low updates, very efficient for where clause.
Bitmap join index used to join dimension and fact table instead reading 2 different
index.
86.What are the partitions in 8i/9i? Where you will use hash partition?
In oracle8i there are 3 partition (Range, Hash, Composite)
In Oracle9i List partition is additional one
Range (Used for Dates values for example in DWH ( Date values are Quarter 1,
Quarter 2, Quarter 3, Quater4)
Hash (Used for unpredictable values say for example we cant able predict which
value to allocate which
partition then we go for hash partition. If we set partition 5 for a column oracle
allocate values into 5 partition
accordingly).
List (Used for literal values say for example a country have 24 states create 24
partition for 24 states each)
Composite (Combination of range and hash)
91.What is main difference mapplets and mapping?
Reuse the transformation in several mappings, where as mapping not like that.
If any changes made in mapplets it automatically inherited in all other instance
mapplets.
92. What is difference between the source qualifier filter and filter
transformation?
Source qualifier filter only used for relation source where as Filter used any kind
of source.
Source qualifier filter data while reading where as filter before loading into
target.
93. What is the maximum no. of return value when we use unconnected
transformation?
Only one.
94. What are the environments in which informatica server can run on?
Informatica client runs on Windows 95 / 98 / NT, Unix Solaris, Unix AIX(IBM)
Informatica Server runs on Windows NT / Unix
Minimum Hardware requirements
Informatica Client Hard disk 40MB, RAM 64MB
Informatica Server Hard Disk 60MB, RAM 64MB
95. Can unconnected lookup do everything a connected lookup transformation can do?
No, We cant call connected lookup in other transformation. Rest of things it’s
possible
96. In 5.x can we copy part of mapping and paste it in other mapping?
I think its possible
97. What option do you select for a sessions in batch, so that the sessions run one
after the other?
We have select an option called “Run if previous completed”
98. How do you really know that paging to disk is happening while you are using a
lookup
transformation? Assume you have access to server?
We have collect performance data first then see the counters parameter
lookup_readtodisk if it’s greater than 0
then it’s read from disk
Step1. Choose the option “Collect Performance data” in the general tab session
property
sheet.
12
Step2. Monitor server then click server-request  session performance details
Step3. Locate the performance details file named called session_name.perf file in
the session
log file directory
Step4. Find out counter parameter lookup_readtodisk if it’s greater than 0 then
informatica
read lookup table values from the disk. Find out how many rows in the cache see
Lookup_rowsincache
99. List three option available in informatica to tune aggregator transformation?
Use Sorted Input to sort data before aggregation
Use Filter transformation before aggregator
Increase Aggregator cache size
100.Assume there is text file as source having a binary field to, to source
qualifier What native data type
informatica will convert this binary field to in source qualifier?
Binary data type for relational source for flat file ?
101.Variable v1 has values set as 5 in designer(default), 10 in parameter file, 15
in
repository. While running session which value informatica will read?
Informatica read value 15 from repository
102. Joiner transformation is joining two tables s1 and s2. s1 has 10,000 rows and
s2 has 1000 rows .
Which table you will set master for better performance of joiner
transformation? Why?
Set table S2 as Master table because informatica server has to keep master table in
the cache so if it is 1000 in
cache will get performance instead of having 10000 rows in cache
103. Source table has 5 rows. Rank in rank transformation is set to 10. How many
rows the rank
transformation will output?
5 Rank
104. How to capture performance statistics of individual transformation in the
mapping and explain
some important statistics that can be captured?
Use tracing level Verbose data
105. Give a way in which you can implement a real time scenario where data in a
table is changing and
you need to look up data from it. How will you configure the lookup transformation
for this purpose?
In slowly changing dimension table use type 2 and model 1
106. What is DTM process? How many threads it creates to process data, explain each
thread in brief?
DTM receive data from reader and move data to transformation to transformation on
row by row basis. It’s
create 2 thread one is reader and another one is writer
107. Suppose session is configured with commit interval of 10,000 rows and source
has 50,000 rows
explain the commit points for source based commit & target based commit. Assume
appropriate value
wherever required?
Target Based commit (First time Buffer size full 7500 next time 15000)
Commit Every 15000, 22500, 30000, 40000, 50000
Source Based commit(Does not affect rows held in buffer)
Commit Every 10000, 20000, 30000, 40000, 50000
108.What does first column of bad file (rejected rows) indicates?
First Column - Row indicator (0, 1, 2, 3)
13
Second Column – Column Indicator (D, O, N, T)
109. What is the formula for calculation rank data caches? And also Aggregator,
data, index caches?
Index cache size = Total no. of rows * size of the column in the lookup condition
(50 * 4)
Aggregator/Rank transformation Data Cache size = (Total no. of rows * size of the
column in the lookup
condition) + (Total no. of rows * size of the connected output ports)
110. Can unconnected lookup return more than 1 value? No
INFORMATICA TRANSFORMATIONS
· Aggregator
· Expression
· External Procedure
· Advanced External Procedure
· Filter
· Joiner
· Lookup
· Normalizer
· Rank
· Router
· Sequence Generator
· Stored Procedure
· Source Qualifier
· Update Strategy
· XML source qualifier
14
Expression Transformation
- You can use ET to calculate values in a single row before you write to the target
- You can use ET, to perform any non-aggregate calculation
- To perform calculations involving multiple rows, such as sums of averages, use
the Aggregator. Unlike
ET the Aggregator Transformation allow you to group and sort data
Calculation
To use the Expression Transformation to calculate values for a single row, you must
include the following ports.
- Input port for each value used in the calculation
- Output port for the expression
NOTE
You can enter multiple expressions in a single ET. As long as you enter only one
expression for each port, you can
create any number of output ports in the Expression Transformation. In this way,
you can use one expression
transformation rather than creating separate transformations for each calculation
that requires the same set of data.
Sequence Generator Transformation
- Create keys
- Replace missing values
- This contains two output ports that you can connect to one or more
transformations. The server
generates a value each time a row enters a connected transformation, even if that
value is not used.
- There are two parameters NEXTVAL, CURRVAL
- The SGT can be reusable
- You can not edit any default ports (NEXTVAL, CURRVAL)
SGT Properties
- Start value
- Increment By
- End value
- Current value
- Cycle (If selected, server cycles through sequence range. Otherwise,
Stops with configured end value)
- Reset
- No of cached values
NOTE
- Reset is disabled for Reusable SGT
- Unlike other transformations, you cannot override SGT properties at session
level. This protects the
integrity of sequence values generated.
Aggregator Transformation
Difference between Aggregator and Expression Transformation
We can use Aggregator to perform calculations on groups. Where as the Expression
transformation permits
you to calculations on row-by-row basis only.
The server performs aggregate calculations as it reads and stores necessary data
group and row data in an
aggregator cache.
When Incremental aggregation occurs, the server passes new source data through the
mapping and uses historical
cache data to perform new calculation incrementally.
Components
- Aggregate Expression
- Group by port
- Aggregate cache
When a session is being run using aggregator transformation, the server creates
Index and data caches in memory
to process the transformation. If the server requires more space, it stores
overflow values in cache files.
NOTE
The performance of aggregator transformation can be improved by using “Sorted Input
option”. When this is
selected, the server assumes all data is sorted by group.
15
Incremental Aggregation
- Using this, you apply captured changes in the source to aggregate calculation in
a session. If the
source changes only incrementally and you can capture changes, you can configure
the session to
process only those changes
- This allows the sever to update the target incrementally, rather than forcing it
to process the entire
source and recalculate the same calculations each time you run the session.
Steps:
- The first time you run a session with incremental aggregation enabled, the server
process the entire
source.
- At the end of the session, the server stores aggregate data from that session ran
in two files, the index
file and data file. The server creates the file in local directory.
- The second time you run the session, use only changes in the source as source
data for the session.
The server then performs the following actions:
(1) For each input record, the session checks the historical information in the
index file for a
corresponding group, then:
If it finds a corresponding group –
The server performs the aggregate operation incrementally, using the aggregate data
for
that group, and saves the incremental changes.
Else
Server create a new group and saves the record data
(2) When writing to the target, the server applies the changes to the existing
target.
o Updates modified aggregate groups in the target
o Inserts new aggregate data
o Delete removed aggregate data
o Ignores unchanged aggregate data
o Saves modified aggregate data in Index/Data files to be used as historical data
the next time you
run the session.
Each Subsequent time you run the session with incremental aggregation, you use only
the incremental source
changes in the session.
If the source changes significantly, and you want the server to continue saving the
aggregate data for the future
incremental changes, configure the server to overwrite existing aggregate data with
new aggregate data.
Use Incremental Aggregator Transformation Only IF:
- Mapping includes an aggregate function
- Source changes only incrementally
- You can capture incremental changes. You might do this by filtering source data
by timestamp.
- When Informatica’s transformation does not provide the exact functionality we
need, we can develop
complex functions with in a dynamic link library or Unix shared library.
- To obtain this kind of extensibility, we can use Transformation Exchange (TX)
dynamic invocation
interface built into Power mart/Power Center.
- Using TX, you can create an External Procedure Transformation and bind it to an
External Procedure
that you have developed.
- Two types of External Procedures are available
COM External Procedure (Only for WIN NT/2000)
Informatica External Procedure ( available for WINNT, Solaris, HPUX etc)
Components of TX:
(a) External Procedure
16
This exists separately from Informatica Server. It consists of C++, VB code written
by developer. The code
is compiled and linked to a DLL or Shared memory, which is loaded by the
Informatica Server at runtime.
(b) External Procedure Transformation
This is created in Designer and it is an object that resides in the Informatica
Repository. This
serves in many ways
o This contains metadata describing External procedure
o This allows an External procedure to be references in a mappingby adding an
instance of an
External Procedure transformation.
All External Procedure Transformations must be defined as reusable transformations.
Therefore you cannot create External Procedure transformation in designer. You can
create only with in the
transformation developer of designer and add instances of the transformation to
mapping.
Difference Between Advanced External Procedure And External Procedure
Transformation
Advanced External Procedure Transformation
- The Input and Output functions occur separately
- The output function is a separate callback function provided by Informatica that
can be called from
Advanced External Procedure Library.
- The Output callback function is used to pass all the output port values from the
Advanced External
Procedure library to the informatica Server.
- Multiple Outputs (Multiple row Input and Multiple rows output)
- Supports Informatica procedure only
- Active Transformation
- Connected only
- In the External Procedure Transformation, an External Procedure function does
both input and output,
and it’s parameters consists of all the ports of the transformation.
- Single return value ( One row input and one row output )
- Supports COM and Informatica Procedures
- Passive transformation
- Connected or Unconnected
By Default, The Advanced External Procedure Transformation is an active
transformation. However, we can
configure this to be a passive by clearing “IS ACTIVE” option on the properties tab
LOOKUP Transformation
- We are using this for lookup data in a related table, view or synonym
- You can use multiple lookup transformations in a mapping
- The server queries the Lookup table based in the Lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares
lookup port values to lookup table column values, bases on lookup condition.
Types:
(a) Connected (or) unconnected.
(b) Cached (or) uncached .
If you cache the lkp table , you can choose to use a dynamic or static cache . by
default ,the LKP cache
remains static and doesn’t change during the session .with dynamic cache ,the
server inserts rows into the cache
during the session ,information recommends that you cache the target table as
Lookup .this enables you to lookup
values in the target and insert them if they don’t exist..
You can configure a connected LKP to receive input directly from the mapping
pipeline .(or) you can
configure an unconnected LKP to receive input from the result of an expression in
another transformation.
Differences Between Connected and Unconnected Lookup:
connected
17
o Receives input values directly from the pipeline.
o uses Dynamic or static cache
o Returns multiple values
o supports user defined default values.
Unconnected
o Recieves input values from the result of LKP expression in another transformation
o Use static cache only.
o Returns only one value.
o Doesn’t supports user-defined default values.
NOTES
o Common use of unconnected LKP is to update slowly changing dimension tables.
o Lookup components are
(a) Lookup table. B) Ports c) Properties d) condition.
Lookup tables: This can be a single table, or you can join multiple tables in the
same Database using a Lookup
query override.You can improve Lookup initialization time by adding an index to the
Lookup table.
Lookup ports: There are 3 ports in connected LKP transformation (I/P,O/P,LKP) and 4
ports unconnected
LKP(I/P,O/P,LKP and return ports).
o if you’ve certain that a mapping doesn’t use a Lookup ,port ,you delete it from
the transformation.
This reduces the amount of memory.
Lookup Properties: you can configure properties such as SQL override .for the
Lookup,the Lookup table name ,and
tracing level for the transformation.
Lookup condition: you can enter the conditions ,you want the server to use to
determine whether input data
qualifies values in the Lookup or cache .
when you configure a LKP condition for the transformation, you compare
transformation input values with
values in the Lookup table or cache ,which represented by LKP ports .when you run
session ,the server queries the
LKP table or cache for all incoming values based on the condition.
NOTE
- If you configure a LKP to use static cache ,you can following operators
=,>,<,>=,<=,!=.
but if you use an dynamic cache only =can be used .
- when you don’t configure the LKP for caching ,the server queries the LKP table
for each input row .the
result will be same, regardless of using cache
However using a Lookup cache can increase session performance, by Lookup table,
when the source table is large.
Performance tips:
- Add an index to the columns used in a Lookup condition.
- Place conditions with an equality opertor (=) first.
- Cache small Lookup tables .
- Don’t use an ORDER BY clause in SQL override.
- Call unconnected Lookups with :LKP reference qualifier.
Normalizer Transformation
Normalization is the process of organizing data.
In database terms ,this includes creating normalized tables and establishing
relationships between those tables.
According to rules designed to both protect the data, and make the database more
flexible by eliminating redundancy
and inconsistent dependencies.
NT normalizes records from COBOL and relational sources ,allowing you to organizet
the data according to you own
needs.
A NT can appear anywhere is a data flow when you normalize a relational source.
18
Use a normalizer transformation, instead of source qualifier transformation when
you normalize a COBOL source.
The occurs statement is a COBOL file nests multiple records of information in a
single record.
Using the NT ,you breakout repeated data with in a record is to separate record
into separate records.For each new
record it creates, the NT generates an unique identifier. You can use this key
value to join the normalized records.
19
Stored Procedure Transformation
- DBA creates stored procedures to automate time consuming tasks that are too
complicated for
standard SQL statements.
- A stored procedure is a precompiled collection of transact SQL statements and
optional flow control
statements, similar to an executable script.
- Stored procedures are stored and run with in the database. You can run a stored
procedure with
EXECUTE SQL statement in a database client tool, just as SQL statements. But unlike
standard
procedures allow user defined variables, conditional statements and programming
features.
Usages of Stored Procedure
- Drop and recreate indexes.
- Check the status of target database before moving records into it.
- Determine database space.
- Perform a specialized calculation.
NOTE
- The Stored Procedure must exist in the database before creating a Stored
Procedure Transformation,
and the Stored procedure can exist in a source, target or any database with a valid
connection to the
server.
TYPES
- Connected Stored Procedure Transformation (Connected directly to the mapping)
- Unconnected Stored Procedure Transformation (Not connected directly to the flow
of the mapping. Can
be called from an Expression Transformation or other transformations)
Running a Stored Procedure
The options for running a Stored Procedure Transformation:
- Normal , Pre load of the source, Post load of the source, Pre load of the target,
Post load of the target
You can run several stored procedure transformation in different modes in the same
mapping.
Stored Procedure Transformations are created as normal type by default, which means
that they run during the
mapping, not before or after the session. They are also not created as reusable
transformations.
If you want to: Use below mode
Run a SP before/after the session Unconnected
Run a SP once during a session Unconnected
Run a SP for each row in data flow Unconnected/Connected
Pass parameters to SP and receive a single return value Connected
A normal connected SP will have an I/P and O/P port and return port also an output
port, which is marked as ‘R’.
Error Handling
- This can be configured in server manager (Log & Error handling)
- By default, the server stops the session
20
Rank Transformation
- This allows you to select only the top or bottom rank of data. You can get
returned the largest or
smallest numeric value in a port or group.
- You can also use Rank Transformation to return the strings at the top or the
bottom of a session sort
order. During the session, the server caches input data until it can perform the
rank calculations.
- Rank Transformation differs from MAX and MIN functions, where they allows to
select a group of
top/bottom values, not just one value.
- As an active transformation, Rank transformation might change the number of rows
passed through it.
Rank Transformation Properties
- Cache directory
- Top or Bottom rank
- Input/Output ports that contain values used to determine the rank.
Different ports in Rank Transformation
I - Input
O - Output
V - Variable
R - Rank
Rank Index
The designer automatically creates a RANKINDEX port for each rank transformation.
The server uses this Index
port to store the ranking position for each row in a group.
The RANKINDEX is an output port only. You can pass the RANKINDEX to another
transformation in the
mapping or directly to a target.
21
Filter Transformation
- As an active transformation, the Filter Transformation may change the no of rows
passed through it.
- A filter condition returns TRUE/FALSE for each row that passes through the
transformation, depending
on whether a row meets the specified condition.
- Only rows that return TRUE pass through this filter and discarded rows do not
appear in the session
log/reject files.
- To maximize the session performance, include the Filter Transformation as close
to the source in the
mapping as possible.
- The filter transformation does not allow setting output default values.
- To filter out row with NULL values, use the ISNULL and IS_SPACES functions.
Joiner Transformation
Source Qualifier: can join data origination from a common source database
Joiner Transformation: Join tow related heterogeneous sources residing in different
locations or File systems.
To join more than two sources, we can add additional joiner transformations.
SESSION LOGS
Information that reside in a session log:
- Allocation of system shared memory
- Execution of Pre-session commands/ Post-session commands
- Session Initialization
- Creation of SQL commands for reader/writer threads
- Start/End timings for target loading
- Error encountered during session
- Load summary of Reader/Writer/ DTM statistics
Other Information
- By default, the server generates log files based on the server code page.
Thread Identifier
Ex: CMN_1039
Reader and Writer thread codes have 3 digit and Transformation codes have 4 digits.
The number following a thread name indicate the following:
(a) Target load order group number
(b) Source pipeline number
(c) Partition number
(d) Aggregate/ Rank boundary number
Log File Codes
Error Codes Description
BR - Related to reader process, including ERP, relational and flat file.
CMN - Related to database, memory allocation
DBGR - Related to debugger
EP- External Procedure
LM - Load Manager
TM - DTM
REP - Repository
WRT - Writer
22
Load Summary
(a) Inserted
(b) Updated
(c) Deleted
(d) Rejected
Statistics details
(a) Requested rows shows the no of rows the writer actually received for the
specified operation
(b) Applied rows shows the number of rows the writer successfully applied to the
target (Without Error)
(c) Rejected rows show the no of rows the writer could not apply to the target
(d) Affected rows shows the no of rows affected by the specified operation
Detailed transformation statistics
The server reports the following details for each transformation in the mapping
(a) Name of Transformation
(b) No of I/P rows and name of the Input source
(c) No of O/P rows and name of the output target
(d) No of rows dropped
Tracing Levels
Normal - Initialization and status information, Errors encountered, Transformation
errors, rows
skipped, summarize session details (Not at the level of individual rows)
Terse - Initialization information as well as error messages, and notification of
rejected data
Verbose Init - Addition to normal tracing, Names of Index, Data files used and
detailed transformation
statistics.
Verbose Data - Addition to Verbose Init, Each row that passes in to mapping
detailed transformation
statistics.
NOTE
When you enter tracing level in the session property sheet, you override tracing
levels configured for
transformations in the mapping.
23
MULTIPLE SERVERS
With Power Center, we can register and run multiple servers against a local or
global repository. Hence you can
distribute the repository session load across available servers to improve overall
performance. (You can use only
one Power Mart server in a local repository)
Issues in Server Organization
- Moving target database into the appropriate server machine may improve efficiency
- All Sessions/Batches using data from other sessions/batches need to use the same
server and be
incorporated into the same batch.
- Server with different speed/sizes can be used for handling most complicated
sessions.
Session/Batch Behavior
- By default, every session/batch run on its associated Informatica server. That is
selected in property
sheet.
- In batches, that contain sessions with various servers, the property goes to the
servers, that’s of outer
most batch.
Session Failures and Recovering Sessions
Two types of errors occurs in the server
- Non-Fatal
- Fatal
(a) Non-Fatal Errors
It is an error that does not force the session to stop on its first occurrence.
Establish the error threshold in
the session property sheet with the stop on option. When you enable this option,
the server counts Non-
Fatal errors that occur in the reader, writer and transformations.
Reader errors can include alignment errors while running a session in Unicode mode.
Writer errors can include key constraint violations, loading NULL into the NOT-NULL
field and database
errors.
Transformation errors can include conversion errors and any condition set up as an
ERROR,. Such as
NULL Input.
(b) Fatal Errors
This occurs when the server can not access the source, target or repository. This
can include loss of
connection or target database errors, such as lack of database space to load data.
If the session uses normalizer (or) sequence generator transformations, the server
can not update the
sequence values in the repository, and a fatal error occurs.
© Others
Usages of ABORT function in mapping logic, to abort a session when the server
encounters a
transformation error.
Stopping the server using pmcmd (or) Server Manager
Performing Recovery
- When the server starts a recovery session, it reads the OPB_SRVR_RECOVERY table
and notes the
rowid of the last row commited to the target database. The server then reads all
sources again and
starts processing from the next rowid.
- By default, perform recovery is disabled in setup. Hence it won’t make entries in
OPB_SRVR_RECOVERY table.
- The recovery session moves through the states of normal session schedule, waiting
to run, Initializing,
running, completed and failed. If the initial recovery fails, you can run recovery
as many times.
- The normal reject loading process can also be done in session recovery process.
- The performance of recovery might be low, if
o Mapping contain mapping variables
o Commit interval is high
Un recoverable Sessions
24
Under certain circumstances, when a session does not complete, you need to truncate
the target and run the
session from the beginning.
Commit Intervals
A commit interval is the interval at which the server commits data to relational
targets during a session.
(a) Target based commi t
- Server commits data based on the no of target rows and the key constraints on the
target table. The
commit point also depends on the buffer block size and the commit pinterval.
- During a session, the server continues to fill the writer buffer, after it
reaches the commit interval. When
the buffer block is full, the Informatica server issues a commit command. As a
result, the amount of
data committed at the commit point generally exceeds the commit interval.
- The server commits data to each target based on primary –foreign key constraints.
(b) Source based commi t
- Server commits data based on the number of source rows. The commit point is the
commit interval you
configure in the session properties.
- During a session, the server commits data to the target based on the number of
rows from an active
source in a single pipeline. The rows are referred to as source rows.
- A pipeline consists of a source qualifier and all the transformations and targets
that receive data from
source qualifier.
- Although the Filter, Router and Update Strategy transformations are active
transformations, the server
does not use them as active sources in a source based commit session.
- When a server runs a session, it identifies the active source for each pipeline
in the mapping. The
server generates a commit row from the active source at every commit interval.
- When each target in the pipeline receives the commit rows the server performs the
commit.
Reject Loading
During a session, the server creates a reject file for each target instance in the
mapping. If the writer of the
target rejects data, the server writers the rejected row into the reject file.
You can correct those rejected data and re-load them to relational targets, using
the reject loading utility. (You
cannot load rejected data into a flat file target)
Each time, you run a session, the server appends a rejected data to the reject
file.
Locating the BadFiles
$PMBadFileDir
Filename.bad
When you run a partitioned session, the server creates a separate reject file for
each partition.
Reading Rejected data
Ex: 3,D,1,D,D,0,D,1094345609,D,0,0.00
To help us in finding the reason for rejecting, there are two main things.
(a) Row indicator
Row indicator tells the writer, what to do with the row of wrong data.
Row indicator Meaning Rejected By
3 Reject Writer
If a row indicator is 3, the writer rejected the row because an update strategy
expression marked it for reject.
(b) Column indicator
Column indicator is followed by the first column of data, and another column
indicator. They appears after
every column of data and define the type of data preceding it
25
Column Indicator Meaning Writer Treats as
D Valid Data Good Data. The target
accepts
it unless a database error
occurs, such as finding
duplicate key.
O Overflow Bad Data.
N Null Bad Data.
T Truncated Bad Data
NOTE
NULL columns appear in the reject file with commas marking their column.
Correcting Reject File
Use the reject file and the session log to determine the cause for rejected data.
Keep in mind that correcting the reject file does not necessarily correct the
source of the reject.
Correct the mapping and target database to eliminate some of the rejected data when
you run the session
again.
Trying to correct target rejected rows before correcting writer rejected rows is
not recommended since they may
contain misleading column indicator.
For example, a series of “N” indicator might lead you to believe the target
database does not accept NULL
values, so you decide to change those NULL values to Zero.
However, if those rows also had a 3 in row indicator. Column, the row was rejected
b the writer because of an
update strategy expression, not because of a target database restriction.
If you try to load the corrected file to target, the writer will again reject those
rows, and they will contain
inaccurate 0 values, in place of NULL values.
Why writer can reject ?
- Data overflowed column constraints
- An update strategy expression
Why target database can Reject ?
- Data contains a NULL column
- Database errors, such as key violations
Steps for loading reject file:
- After correcting the rejected data, rename the rejected file to reject_file.in
- The rejloader used the data movement mode configured for the server. It also used
the code page of
server/OS. Hence do not change the above, in middle of the reject loading
- Use the reject loader utility
Pmrejldr pmserver.cfg [folder name] [session name]
26
Other points
The server does not perform the following option, when using reject loader
(a) Source base commit
(b) Constraint based loading
(c) Truncated target table
(d) FTP targets
(e) External Loading
Multiple reject loaders
You can run the session several times and correct rejected data from the several
session at once. You can
correct and load all of the reject files at once, or work on one or two reject
files, load then and work on the other
at a later time.
External Loading
You can configure a session to use Sybase IQ, Teradata and Oracle external loaders
to load session target files
into the respective databases.
The External Loader option can increase session performance since these databases
can load information
directly from files faster than they can the SQL commands to insert the same data
into the database.
Method:
When a session used External loader, the session creates a control file and target
flat file. The control file
contains information about the target flat file, such as data format and loading
instruction for the External Loader.
The control file has an extension of “*.ctl “ and you can view the file in
$PmtargetFilesDir.
For using an External Loader:
The following must be done:
- configure an external loader connection in the server manager
- Configure the session to write to a target flat file local to the server.
- Choose an external loader connection for each target file in session property
sheet.
Issues with External Loader:
- Disable constraints
- Performance issues
o Increase commit intervals
o Turn off database logging
- Code page requirements
- The server can use multiple External Loader within one session (Ex: you are
having a session with the
two target files. One with Oracle External Loader and another with Sybase External
Loader)
Other Information:
- The External Loader performance depends upon the platform of the server
- The server loads data at different stages of the session
- The serve writes External Loader initialization and completing messaging in the
session log. However,
details about EL performance, it is generated at EL log, which is getting stored as
same target
directory.
27
- If the session contains errors, the server continues the EL process. If the
session fails, the server loads
partial target data using EL.
- The EL creates a reject file for data rejected by the database. The reject file
has an extension of “*.ldr”
reject.
- The EL saves the reject file in the target file directory
- You can load corrected data from the file, using database reject loader, and not
through Informatica
reject load utility (For EL reject file only)
Configuring EL in session
- In the server manager, open the session property sheet
- Select File target, and then click flat file options
Caches
- server creates index and data caches in memory for aggregator ,rank ,joiner and
Lookup
transformation in a mapping.
- Server stores key values in index caches and output values in data caches : if
the server requires more
memory ,it stores overflow values in cache files .
- When the session completes, the server releases caches memory, and in most
circumstances, it
deletes the caches files .
- Caches Storage overflow :
- releases caches memory, and in most circumstances, it deletes the caches files .
Caches Storage overflow :
Transformation index cache data cache
Aggregator stores group values stores calculations
As configured in the based on Group-by ports
Group-by ports.
Rank stores group values as stores ranking information
Configured in the Group-by based on Group-by ports .
Joiner stores index values for stores master source rows .
The master source table
As configured in Joiner condition.
Lookup stores Lookup condition stores lookup data that’s
Information. Not stored in the index cache.
Determining cache requirements
To calculate the cache size, you need to consider column and row requirements as
well as processing
overhead.
- server requires processing overhead to cache data and index information.
Column overhead includes a null indicator, and row overhead can include row to key
information.
Steps:
- first, add the total column size in the cache to the row overhead.
- Multiply the result by the no of groups (or) rows in the cache this gives the
minimum cache
requirements .
- For maximum requirements, multiply min requirements by 2.
Location:
-by default , the server stores the index and data files in the directory
$PMCacheDir.
-the server names the index files PMAGG*.idx and data files PMAGG*.dat. if the size
exceeds 2GB,you may
find multiple index and data files in the directory .The server appends a number to
the end of
filename(PMAGG*.id*1,id*2,etc).
Aggregator Caches
28
- when server runs a session with an aggregator transformation, it stores data in
memory until it
completes the aggregation.
- when you partition a source, the server creates one memory cache and one disk
cache and one and disk
cache for each partition .It routes data from one partition to another based on
group key values of the
transformation.
- server uses memory to process an aggregator transformation with sort ports. It
doesn’t use cache memory
.you don’t need to configure the cache memory, that use sorted ports.
Index cache:
Aggregate data cache:
Rank Cache
- when the server runs a session with a Rank transformation, it compares an input
row with rows with
rows in data cache. If the input row out-ranks a stored row,the Informatica server
replaces the stored
row with the input row.
- If the rank transformation is configured to rank across multiple groups, the
server ranks incrementally
for each group it finds .
Index Cache :
Rank Data Cache:
#Group [(#Ranks * (å column size + 10)) + 20]
Joiner Cache:
- When server runs a session with joiner transformation, it reads all rows from the
master source and
builds memory caches based on the master rows.
- After building these caches, the server reads rows from the detail source and
performs the joins
- Server creates the Index cache as it reads the master source into the data cache.
The server uses the
Index cache to test the join condition. When it finds a match, it retrieves rows
values from the data
cache.
- To improve joiner performance, the server aligns all data for joiner cache or an
eight byte boundary.
Index Cache :
#Master rows [(å column size) + 16)
Joiner Data Cache:
#Master row [(å column size) + 8]
Lookup cache:
- When server runs a lookup transformation, the server builds a cache in memory,
when it process the
first row of data in the transformation.
- Server builds the cache and queries it for the each row that enters the
transformation.
- If you partition the source pipeline, the server allocates the configured amount
of memory for each
partition. If two lookup transformations share the cache, the server does not
allocate additional memory
for the second lookup transformation.
- The server creates index and data cache files in the lookup cache drectory and
used the server code
page to create the files.
Index Cache :
#Rows in lookup table [(å column size) + 16)
Lookup Data Cache:
#Rows in lookup table [(å column size) + 8]
29
Transformations
A transformation is a repository object that generates, modifies or passes data.
(a) Active Transformation :
a. Can change the number of rows, that passes through it (Filter, Normalizer,
Rank ..)
(b) Passive Transformation :
a. Does not change the no of rows that passes through it (Expression, lookup ..)
NOTE:
- Transformations can be connected to the data flow or they can be unconnected
- An unconnected transformation is not connected to other transformation in the
mapping. It is called with
in another transformation and returns a value to that transformation
Reusable Transformations:
When you are using reusable transformation to a mapping, the definition of
transformation exists outside the
mapping while an instance appears with mapping.
All the changes you are making in transformation will immediately reflect in
instances.
You can create reusable transformation by two methods:
(a) Designing in transformation developer
(b) Promoting a standard transformation
Change that reflects in mappings are like expressions. If port name etc. are
changes they won’t reflect.
Handling High-Precision Data:
- Server process decimal values as doubles or decimals.
- When you create a session, you choose to enable the decimal data type or let the
server process the
data as double (Precision of 15)
Example:
- You may have a mapping with decimal (20,0) that passes through. The value may be
40012030304957666903.
If you enable decimal arithmetic, the server passes the number as it is. If you do
not enable decimal
arithmetic, the server passes 4.00120303049577 X 1019.
If you want to process a decimal value with a precision greater than 28 digits, the
server automatically
treats as a double value.
30
Mapplets
When the server runs a session using a mapplets, it expands the mapplets. The
server then runs the session as it
would any other sessions, passing data through each transformations in the mapplet.
If you use a reusable transformation in a mapplet, changes to these can invalidate
the mapplet and every mapping
using the mapplet.
You can create a non-reusable instance of a reusable transformation.
Mapplet Objects:
(a) Input transformation
(b) Source qualifier
(c) Transformations, as you need
(d) Output transformation
Mapplet Won’t Support:
- Joiner
- Normalizer
- Pre/Post session stored procedure
- Target definitions
- XML source definitions
Types of Mapplets:
(a) Active Mapplets - Contains one or more active transformations
(b) Passive Mapplets - Contains only passive transformation
Copied mapplets are not an instance of original mapplets. If you make changes to
the original, the copy does not
inherit your changes
You can use a single mapplet, even more than once on a mapping.
Ports
Default value for I/P port - NULL
Default value for O/P port - ERROR
Default value for variables - Does not support default values
Session Parameters
This parameter represent values you might want to change between sessions, such as
DB Connection or source file.
We can use session parameter in a session property sheet, then define the
parameters in a session parameter file.
The user defined session parameter are:
(a) DB Connection
(b) Source File directory
(c) Target file directory
(d) Reject file directory
Description:
Use session parameter to make sessions more flexible. For example, you have the
same type of transactional data
written to two different databases, and you use the database connections TransDB1
and TransDB2 to connect to the
databases. You want to use the same mapping for both tables.
Instead of creating two sessions for the same mapping, you can create a database
connection parameter, like
$DBConnectionSource, and use it as the source database connection for the session.
When you create a parameter file for the session, you set $DBConnectionSource to
TransDB1 and run the session.
After it completes set the value to TransDB2 and run the session again.
NOTE:
You can use several parameter together to make session management easier.
31
Session parameters do not have default value, when the server can not find a value
for a session parameter, it fails
to initialize the session.
Session Parameter File
- A parameter file is created by text editor.
- In that, we can specify the folder and session name, then list the parameters and
variables used in the
session and assign each value.
- Save the parameter file in any directory, load to the server
- We can define following values in a parameter
o Mapping parameter
o Mapping variables
o Session parameters
- You can include parameter and variable information for more than one session in a
single parameter
file by creating separate sections, for each session with in the parameter file.
- You can override the parameter file for sessions contained in a batch by using a
batch parameter file. A
batch parameter file has the same format as a session parameter file
Locale
Informatica server can transform character data in two modes
(a) ASCII
a. Default one
b. Passes 7 byte, US-ASCII character data
(b) UNICODE
a. Passes 8 bytes, multi byte character data
b. It uses 2 bytes for each character to move data and performs additional checks
at session level, to
ensure data integrity.
Code pages contains the encoding to specify characters in a set of one or more
languages. We can select a code
page, based on the type of character data in the mappings.
Compatibility between code pages is essential for accurate data movement.
The various code page components are
- Operating system Locale settings
- Operating system code page
- Informatica server data movement mode
- Informatica server code page
- Informatica repository code page
Locale
(a) System Locale - System Default
(b) User locale - setting for date, time, display
© Input locale
Mapping Parameter and Variables
These represent values in mappings/mapplets.
If we declare mapping parameters and variables in a mapping, you can reuse a
mapping by altering the
parameter and variable values of the mappings in the session.
This can reduce the overhead of creating multiple mappings when only certain
attributes of mapping needs to be
changed.
When you want to use the same value for a mapping parameter each time you run the
session.
32
Unlike a mapping parameter, a mapping variable represent a value that can change
through the session. The
server saves the value of a mapping variable to the repository at the end of each
successful run and used that
value the next time you run the session.
Mapping objects:
Source, Target, Transformation, Cubes, Dimension
Debugger
We can run the Debugger in two situations
(a) Before Session: After saving mapping, we can run some initial tests.
(b) After Session: real Debugging process
MEadata Reporter:
- Web based application that allows to run reports against repository metadata
- Reports including executed sessions, lookup table dependencies, mappings and
source/target
schemas.
Repository
Types of Repository
(a) Global Repository
a. This is the hub of the domain use the GR to store common objects that multiple
developers can
use through shortcuts. These may include operational or application source
definitions, reusable
transformations, mapplets and mappings
(b) Local Repository
a. A Local Repository is with in a domain that is not the global repository. Use4
the Local Repository
for development.
© Standard Repository
a. A repository that functions individually, unrelated and unconnected to other
repository
NOTE:
- Once you create a global repository, you can not change it to a local repository
- However, you can promote the local to global repository
Batches
- Provide a way to group sessions for either serial or parallel execution by server
- Batches
o Sequential (Runs session one after another)
o Concurrent (Runs sessions at same time)
Nesting Batches
Each batch can contain any number of session/batches. We can nest batches several
levels deep, defining
batches within batches
Nested batches are useful when you want to control a complex series of sessions
that must run sequentially or
concurrently
Scheduling
When you place sessions in a batch, the batch schedule override that session
schedule by default. However, we
can configure a batched session to run on its own schedule by selecting the “Use
Absolute Time Session”
Option.
Server Behavior
Server configured to run a batch overrides the server configuration to run sessions
within the batch. If you have
multiple servers, all sessions within a batch run on the Informatica server that
runs the batch.
The server marks a batch as failed if one of its sessions is configured to run if
“Previous completes” and that
previous session fails.
Sequential Batch
33
If you have sessions with dependent source/target relationship, you can place them
in a sequential batch, so
that Informatica server can run them is consecutive order.
They are two ways of running sessions, under this category
(a) Run the session, only if the previous completes successfully
(b) Always run the session (this is default)
Concurrent Batch
In this mode, the server starts all of the sessions within the batch, at same time
Concurrent batches take advantage of the resource of the Informatica server,
reducing the time it takes to run
the session separately or in a sequential batch.
Concurrent batch in a Sequential batch
If you have concurrent batches with source-target dependencies that benefit from
running those batches in a
particular order, just like sessions, place them into a sequential batch.
34
Server Concepts
The Informatica server used three system resources
(a) CPU
(b) Shared Memory
(c) Buffer Memory
Informatica server uses shared memory, buffer memory and cache memory for session
information and to move
data between session threads.
LM Shared Memory
Load Manager uses both process and shared memory. The LM keeps the information
server list of sessions and
batches, and the schedule queue in process memory.
Once a session starts, the LM uses shared memory to store session details for the
duration of the session run or
session schedule. This shared memory appears as the configurable parameter
(LMSharedMemory) and the
server allots 2,000,000 bytes as default.
This allows you to schedule or run approximately 10 sessions at one time.
DTM Buffer Memory
The DTM process allocates buffer memory to the session based on the DTM buffer poll
size settings, in session
properties. By default, it allocates 12,000,000 bytes of memory to the session.
DTM divides memory into buffer blocks as configured in the buffer block size
settings. (Default: 64,000 bytes per
block)
Running a Session
The following tasks are being done during a session
1. LM locks the session and read session properties
2. LM reads parameter file
3. LM expands server/session variables and parameters
4. LM verifies permission and privileges
5. LM validates source and target code page
6. LM creates session log file
7. LM creates DTM process
8. DTM process allocates DTM process memory
9. DTM initializes the session and fetches mapping
10. DTM executes pre-session commands and procedures
11. DTM creates reader, writer, transformation threads for each pipeline
12. DTM executes post-session commands and procedures
13. DTM writes historical incremental aggregation/lookup to repository
14. LM sends post-session emails
35
Stopping and aborting a session
- If the session you want to stop is a part of batch, you must stop the batch
- If the batch is part of nested batch, stop the outermost batch
- When you issue the stop command, the server stops reading data. It continues
processing and writing
data and committing data to targets
- If the server cannot finish processing and committing data, you can issue the
ABORT command. It is
similar to stop command, except it has a 60 second timeout. If the server cannot
finish processing and
committing data within 60 seconds, it kills the DTM process and terminates the
session.
Recovery:
- After a session being stopped/aborted, the session results can be recovered. When
the recovery is
performed, the session continues from the point at which it stopped.
- If you do not recover the session, the server runs the entire session the next
time.
- Hence, after stopping/aborting, you may need to manually delete targets before
the session runs again.
NOTE:
ABORT command and ABORT function, both are different.
When can a Session Fail
- Server cannot allocate enough system resources
- Session exceeds the maximum no of sessions the server can run concurrently
- Server cannot obtain an execute lock for the session (the session is already
locked)
- Server unable to execute post-session shell commands or post-load stored
procedures
- Server encounters database errors
- Server encounter Transformation row errors (Ex: NULL value in non-null fields)
- Network related errors
When Pre/Post Shell Commands are useful
- To delete a reject file
- To archive target files before session begins
Session Performance
- Minimum log (Terse)
- Partitioning source data.
- Performing ETL for each partition, in parallel. (For this, multiple CPUs are
needed)
- Adding indexes.
- Changing commit Level.
- Using Filter trans to remove unwanted data movement.
- Increasing buffer memory, when large volume of data.
- Multiple lookups can reduce the performance. Verify the largest lookup table and
tune the expressions.
- In session level, the causes are small cache size, low buffer memory and small
commit interval.
- At system level,
o WIN NT/2000-U the task manager.
o UNIX: VMSTART, IOSTART.
Hierarchy of optimization
- Target.
- Source.
- Mapping
- Session.
- System.
36
Optimizing Target Databases:
- Drop indexes /constraints
- Increase checkpoint intervals.
- Use bulk loading /external loading.
- Turn off recovery.
- Increase database network packet size.
Source level
- Optimize the query (using group by, group by).
- Use conditional filters.
- Connect to RDBMS using IPC protocol.
Mapping
- Optimize data type conversions.
- Eliminate transformation errors.
- Optimize transformations/ expressions.
Session:
- concurrent batches.
- Partition sessions.
- Reduce error tracing.
- Remove staging area.
- Tune session parameters.
System:
- improve network speed.
- Use multiple preservers on separate systems.
- Reduce paging.
Session Process
Info server uses both process memory and system shared memory to perform ETL
process.
It runs as a daemon on UNIX and as a service on WIN NT.
The following processes are used to run a session:
(a) LOAD manager process: - starts a session
· creates DTM process, which creates the session.
(b) DTM process: - creates threads to initialize the session
- read, write and transform data.
- handle pre/post session opertions.
Load manager processes:
- manages session/batch scheduling.
- Locks session.
- Reads parameter file.
- Expands server/session variables, parameters .
- Verifies permissions/privileges.
- Creates session log file.
DTM process:
The primary purpose of the DTM is to create and manage threads that carry out the
session tasks.
37
The DTM allocates process memory for the session and divides it into buffers. This
is known as buffer
memory. The default memory allocation is 12,000,000 bytes .it creates the main
thread, which is called
master thread .this manages all other threads.
Various threads functions
Master thread- handles stop and abort requests from load manager.
Mapping thread- one thread for each session.
Fetches session and mapping information.
Compiles mapping.
Cleans up after execution.
Reader thread- one thread for each partition.
Relational sources uses relational threads and
Flat files use file threads.
Writer thread- one thread for each partition writes to target.
Transformation thread- One or more transformation for each partition.
Note:
When you run a session, the threads for a partitioned source execute concurrently.
The threads use
buffers to move/transform data.
1. Explain about your projects
- Architecture
- Dimension and Fact tables
- Sources and Targets
- Transformations used
- Frequency of populating data
- Database size
2. What is dimension modeling?
Unlike ER model the dimensional model is very asymmetric
with one large central table called as fact table connected to multiple
dimension tables .It is also called star schema.
3. What are mapplets?
Mapplets are reusable objects that represents collection of transformations
Transformations not to be included in mapplets are
Cobol source definitions
Joiner transformations
Normalizer Transformations
Non-reusable sequence generator transformations
Pre or post session procedures
Target definitions
XML Source definitions
IBM MQ source definitions
Power mart 3.5 style Lookup functions
4. What are the transformations that use cache for performance?
Aggregator, Lookups, Joiner and Ranker
5. What the active and passive transformations?
An active transformation changes the number of rows that pass through the
mapping.
1. Source Qualifier
4. Ranker
5. Update strategy
6. Aggregator
7. Advanced External procedure
8. Normalizer
9. Joiner
Passive transformations do not change the number of rows that pass through
38
the mapping.
1. Expressions
2. Lookup
3. Stored procedure
4. External procedure
5. Sequence generator
6. XML Source qualifier
6. What is a lookup transformation?
Used to look up data in a relational table, views, or synonym, The
informatica server queries the lookup table based on the lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares lookup transformation port values to lookup
table column values based on the lookup condition. The result is passed to
other transformations and the target.
Used to :
Get related value
Perform a calculation
Update slowly changing dimension tables.
Diff between connected and unconnected lookups. Which is better?
Connected :
Received input values directly from the pipeline
Can use Dynamic or static cache.
Cache includes all lookup columns used in the mapping
Can return multiple columns from the same row
If there is no match , can return default values
Default values can be specified.
Un connected :
Receive input values from the result of a LKP expression in another
transformation.
Only static cache can be used.
Cache includes all lookup/output ports in the lookup condition and lookup or
return port.
Can return only one column from each row.
If there is no match it returns null.
Default values cannot be specified.
Explain various caches :
Static:
Caches the lookup table before executing the transformation.
Rows are not added dynamically.
Dynamic:
Caches the rows as and when it is passed.
Unshared:
Within the mapping if the lookup table is used in more than
one transformation then the cache built for the first lookup can be used for
the others. It cannot be used across mappings.
Shared:
If the lookup table is used in more than one
transformation/mapping then the cache built for the first lookup can be used
for the others. It can be used across mappings.
Persistent :
If the cache generated for a Lookup needs to be preserved
for subsequent use then persistent cache is used. It will not delete the
index and data files. It is useful only if the lookup table remains
constant.
What are the uses of index and data caches?
The conditions are stored in index cache and records from
the lookup are stored in data cache
7. Explain aggregate transformation?
The aggregate transformation allows you to perform aggregate calculations,
such as averages, sum, max, min etc. The aggregate transformation is unlike
the Expression transformation, in that you can use the aggregator
transformation to perform calculations in groups. The expression
39
transformation permits you to perform calculations on a row-by-row basis
only.
Performance issues ?
The Informatica server performs calculations as it reads and stores
necessary data group and row data in an aggregate cache.
Create Sorted input ports and pass the input records to aggregator in
sorted forms by groups then by port
Incremental aggregation?
In the Session property tag there is an option for
performing incremental aggregation. When the Informatica server performs
incremental aggregation , it passes new source data through the mapping and
uses historical cache (index and data cache) data to perform new aggregation
calculations incrementally.
What are the uses of index and data cache?
The group data is stored in index files and Row data stored
in data files.
8. Explain update strategy?
Update strategy defines the sources to be flagged for insert, update,
delete, and reject at the targets.
What are update strategy constants?
DD_INSERT,0 DD_UPDATE,1 DD_DELETE,2
DD_REJECT,3
If DD_UPDATE is defined in update strategy and Treat source
rows as INSERT in Session . What happens?
Hints: If in Session anything other than DATA DRIVEN is
mentions then Update strategy in the mapping is ignored.
What are the three areas where the rows can be flagged for
particular treatment?
In mapping, In Session treat Source Rows and In Session
Target Options.
What is the use of Forward/Reject rows in Mapping?
9. Explain the expression transformation ?
Expression transformation is used to calculate values in a single row before
writing to the target.
What are the default values for variables?
Hints: Straing = Null, Number = 0, Date = 1/1/1753
10. Difference between Router and filter transformation?
In filter transformation the records are filtered based on the condition and
rejected rows are discarded. In Router the multiple conditions are placed
and the rejected rows can be assigned to a port.
How many ways you can filter the records?
1. Source Qualifier
4. Ranker
5. Update strategy
.
11. How do you call stored procedure and external procedure
transformation ?
External Procedure can be called in the Pre-session and post session tag in
the Session property sheet.
Store procedures are to be called in the mapping designer by three methods
1. Select the icon and add a Stored procedure transformation
2. Select transformation - Import Stored Procedure
3. Select Transformation - Create and then select stored procedure.
12. Explain Joiner transformation and where it is used?
While a Source qualifier transformation can join data originating from a
common source database, the joiner transformation joins two related
heterogeneous sources residing in different locations or file systems.
40
Two relational tables existing in separate databases
Two flat files in different file systems.
Two different ODBC sources
In one transformation how many sources can be coupled?
Two sources can be couples. If more than two is to be couples add another
Joiner in the hierarchy.
What are join options?
Normal (Default)
Master Outer
Detail Outer
Full Outer
13. Explain Normalizer transformation?
The normaliser transformation normalises records from COBOL and relational
sources, allowing you to organise the data according to your own needs. A
Normaliser transformation can appear anywhere in a data flow when you
normalize a relational source. Use a Normaliser transformation instead of
the Source Qualifier transformation when you normalize COBOL source. When
you drag a COBOL source into the Mapping Designer Workspace, the Normaliser
transformation appears, creating input and output ports for every columns in
the source.
14. What is Source qualifier transformation?
When you add relational or flat file source definition to a mapping , you
need to connect to a source Qualifier transformation. The source qualifier
represents the records that the informatica server reads when it runs a
session.
Join Data originating from the same source database.
Filter records when the Informatica server reads the source data.
Specify an outer join rather than the default inner join.
Specify sorted ports
Select only distinct values from the source
Create a custom query to issue a special SELECT statement for the
Informatica server to read the source data.
15. What is Ranker transformation?
Filters the required number of records from the top or from the bottom.
16. What is target load option?
It defines the order in which informatica server loads the data into the
targets.
This is to avoid integrity constraint violations
17. How do you identify the bottlenecks in Mappings?
Bottlenecks can occur in
1. Targets
The most common performance bottleneck occurs when the
informatica server writes to a target database. You can identify target bottleneck
by configuring the session to write
to a flat file target. If the session performance increases significantly when you
write to a flat file, you have a target
bottleneck.
Solution :
Drop or Disable index or constraints
Perform bulk load (Ignores Database log)
Increase commit interval (Recovery is compromised)
Tune the database for RBS, Dynamic Extension etc.,
2. Sources
Set a filter transformation after each SQ and see the records are not through. If
the time taken is same then there
is a problem.You can also identify the Source problem by Read Test Session - where
we copy the mapping with
sources, SQ and remove all transformations and connect to file target. If the
performance is same
then there is a Source bottleneck. Using database query - Copy the read query
directly from the log. Execute the
query against the source database with a query tool. If the time it takes to
execute the query and the time to fetch
the first row are significantly different, then the query can be modified using
optimizer hints.
Solutions:
Optimize Queries using hints.
Use indexes wherever possible.
41
3. Mapping
If both Source and target are OK then problem could be
in mapping.
Add a filter transformation before target and if the time is the same then there is
a problem.
(OR) Look for the performance monitor in the Sessions property sheet and view the
counters.
Solutions:
If High error rows and rows in lookup cache indicate a mapping bottleneck.
Optimize Single Pass Reading:
Optimize Lookup transformation :
1. Caching the lookup table:
When caching is enabled the Informatica server caches the lookup table and queries
the cache during the
session. When this option is not enabled the server queries the lookup table on a
row-by row basis. Static, Dynamic,
Shared, Un-shared and Persistent cache
2. Optimizing the lookup condition
Whenever multiple conditions are placed, the condition with equality sign should
take precedence.
3. Indexing the lookup table
The cached lookup table should be indexed on order by columns. The session log
contains the ORDER BY
statemen The un-cached lookup since the server issues a SELECT statement for each
row passing into lookup
transformation, it is better to index the lookup table on the columns in the
condition
Optimize Filter transformation:
You can improve the efficiency by filtering early in the data flow. Instead of
using a filter transformation halfway
through the mapping to remove a sizable amount of data. Use a source qualifier
filter to remove those same rows at
the source,If not possible to move the filter into SQ, move the filter
transformation as close to the source qualifier as
possible to remove unnecessary data early in the data flow.
Optimize Aggregate transformation:
1. Group by simpler columns. Preferably numeric columns.
2. Use Sorted input. The sorted input decreases the use of aggregate caches. The
server assumes all input
data are sorted and as it reads it performs aggregate calculations.
3. Use incremental aggregation in session property sheet. Optimize Seq. Generator
transformation:
1. Try creating a reusable Seq. Generator transformation and use it in multiple
mappings
2. The number of cached value property determines the number of values the
informatica server caches at one
time. Optimize Expression transformation:
1. Factoring out common logic
2. Minimize aggregate function calls.
3. Replace common sub-expressions with local variables.
4. Use operators instead of functions.
4. Sessions
If you do not have a source, target, or mapping bottleneck, you may have a session
bottleneck. You can identify a
session bottleneck by using the performance details. The informatica server creates
performance details when you
enable Collect Performance Data on the General Tab of the session
properties.Performance details display
information about each Source Qualifier, target definitions, and individual
transformation. All transformations have
some basic counters that indicate the Number of input rows, output rows, and error
rows. Any value other than zero
in the readfromdisk and writetodisk counters for Aggregate, Joiner, or Rank
transformations indicate a session
bottleneck. Low bufferInput_efficiency and BufferOutput_efficiency counter also
indicate a session bottleneck.
Small cache size, low buffer memory, and small commit intervals can cause session
bottlenecks.
5. System (Networks)
18. How to improve the Session performance?
1 Run concurrent sessions
2 Partition session (Power center)
3. Tune Parameter - DTM buffer pool, Buffer block size, Index cache size,data cache
size, Commit Interval, Tracing
level (Normal, Terse, Verbose Init, Verbose Data) The session has memory to hold 83
sources and targets. If it is
more, then DTM can be increased. The informatica server uses the index and data
caches for Aggregate, Rank,
Lookup and Joiner transformation. The server stores the transformed data from the
above transformation in the
data cache before returning it to the data flow. It stores group information for
those transformations in index cache.
If the allocated data or index cache is not large enough to store the date, the
server stores the data in a temporary
disk file as it processes the session data. Each time the server pages to the disk
the performance slows. This can be
seen from the counters . Since generally data cache is larger than the index cache,
it has to be more than the index.
4. Remove Staging area
5. Tune off Session recovery
6. Reduce error tracing
19. What are tracing levels?
Normal-default
Logs initialization and status information, errors
encountered, skipped rows due to transformation errors, summarizes session
results but not at the row level.
42
Terse
Log initialization, error messages, notification of rejected
data.
Verbose Init.
In addition to normal tracing levels, it also logs
additional initialization information, names of index and data files used
and detailed transformation statistics.
Verbose Data.
In addition to Verbose init, It records row level logs.
20. What is Slowly changing dimensions?
Slowly changing dimensions are dimension tables that have
slowly increasing data as well as updates to existing data.
21. What are mapping parameters and variables?
A mapping parameter is a user definable constant that takes up a value
before running a session. It can be used in SQ expressions, Expression
transformation etc.
Steps:
Define the parameter in the mapping designer - parameter & variables .
Use the parameter in the Expressions.
Define the values for the parameter in the parameter file.
A mapping variable is also defined similar to the parameter except that the
value of the variable is subjected to change.
It picks up the value in the following order.
1. From the Session parameter file
2. As stored in the repository object in the previous run.
3. As defined in the initial values in the designer.
4. Default values
43
Oracle
Q. How many types of Sql Statements are there in Oracle?
There are basically 6 types of sql statements. They are:
a) Data Definition Language (DDL) The DDL statements define and maintain objects
and drop objects.
b) Data Manipulation Language (DML) The DML statements manipulate database data.
c) Transaction Control Statements Manage change by DML
d) Session Control -Used to control the properties of current session enabling and
disabling roles and
changing. E.g. Alter Statements, Set Role
e) System Control Statements-Change Properties of Oracle Instance. E.g. Alter
System
f) Embedded Sql- Incorporate DDL, DML and TCS in Programming Language. E.g. Using
the Sql
Statements in languages such as 'C', Open, Fetch, execute and close
Q. What is a Join?
A join is a query that combines rows from two or more tables, views, or
materialized views ("snapshots"). Oracle
performs a join whenever multiple tables appear in the queries FROM clause. The
query’s select list can select any
columns from any of these tables. If any two of these tables have a column name in
common, you must qualify all
references to these columns throughout the query with table names to avoid
ambiguity.
Q. What are join conditions?
Most join queries contain WHERE clause conditions that compare two columns, each
from a different table. Such a
condition is called a join condition. To execute a join, Oracle combines pairs of
rows, each containing one row from
each table, for which the join condition evaluates to TRUE. The columns in the join
conditions need not also appear
in the select list.
Q. What is an equijoin?
An equijoin is a join with a join condition containing an equality operator. An
equijoin combines rows that have
equivalent values for the specified columns.
Eg:
Select ename, job, dept.deptno, dname From emp, dept Where emp.deptno = dept.deptno
;
Q. What are self joins?
A self join is a join of a table to itself. This table appears twice in the FROM
clause and is followed by table aliases
that qualify column names in the join condition.
Eg: SELECT e.ename || ‘ works for ‘ || e2.name “Employees and their Managers”
FROM emp e1, emp e2 WHERE e1.mgr = e2.empno;
ENAME EMPNO MGR
BLAKE 12345 67890
KING 67890 22446
Result: BLAKE works for KING
Q. What is an Outer Join?
An outer join extends the result of a simple join. An outer join returns all rows
that satisfy the join condition and those
rows from one table for which no rows from the other satisfy the join condition.
Such rows are not returned by a
simple join. To write a query that performs an outer join of tables A and B and
returns all rows from A, apply the outer
join operator (+) to all columns of B in the join condition.
For all rows in A that have no matching rows in B, Oracle returns null for any
select list expressions containing
columns of B.
Outer join queries are subject to the following rules and restrictions:
 The (+) operator can appear only in the WHERE clause or, in the context of left
correlation (that is, when
specifying the TABLE clause) in the FROM clause, and can be applied only to a
column of a table or view.
 If A and B are joined by multiple join conditions, you must use the (+) operator
in all of these conditions. If you do
not, Oracle will return only the rows resulting from a simple join, but without a
warning or error to advise you that
you do not have the results of an outer join.
 The (+) operator can be applied only to a column, not to an arbitrary expression.
However, an arbitrary
expression can contain a column marked with the (+) operator.
44
 A condition containing the (+) operator cannot be combined with another condition
using the OR logical
operator.
 A condition cannot use the IN comparison operator to compare a column marked with
the (+) operator with an
expression.
 A condition cannot compare any column marked with the (+) operator with a
subquery.
If the WHERE clause contains a condition that compares a column from table B with a
constant, the (+) operator
must be applied to the column so that Oracle returns the rows from table A for
which it has generated NULLs for this
column. Otherwise Oracle will return only the results of a simple join.
In a query that performs outer joins of more than two pairs of tables, a single
table can be the null-generated table for
only one other table. For this reason, you cannot apply the (+) operator to columns
of B in the join condition for A and
B and the join condition for B and C.
Set Operators: UNION [ALL], INTERSECT, MINUS
Set operators combine the results of two component queries into a single result.
Queries containing set operators are
called compound queries.
The number and datatypes of the columns selected by each component query must be
the same, but the column
lengths can be different.
If you combine more than two queries with set operators, Oracle evaluates adjacent
queries from left to right. You
can use parentheses to specify a different order of evaluation.
Restrictions:
 These set operators are not valid on columns of type BLOB, CLOB, BFILE, varray,
or nested table.
 The UNION, INTERSECT, and MINUS operators are not valid on LONG columns.
 To reference a column, you must use an alias to name the column.
 You cannot also specify the for_update_clause with these set operators.
 You cannot specify the order_by_clause in the subquery of these operators.
All set operators have equal precedence. If a SQL statement contains multiple set
operators, Oracle evaluates them
from the left to right if no parentheses explicitly specify another order.
The corresponding expressions in the select lists of the component queries of a
compound query must match in
number and datatype. If component queries select character data, the datatype of
the return values are determined
as follows:
 If both queries select values of datatype CHAR, the returned values have datatype
CHAR.
 If either or both of the queries select values of datatype VARCHAR2, the returned
values have datatype
VARCHAR2.
Q. What is a UNION?
The UNION operator eliminates duplicate records from the selected rows. We must
match datatype (using the
TO_DATE and TO_NUMBER functions) when columns do not exist in one or the other
table.
Q. What is UNION ALL?
The UNION ALL operator does not eliminate duplicate selected rows.
Note: The UNION operator returns only distinct rows that appear in either result,
while the UNION ALL operator
returns all rows.
Q. What is an INTERSECT?
The INTERSECT operator returns only those rows returned by both queries. It shows
only the distinct values from
the rows returned by both queries.
Q. What is MINUS?
The MINUS operator returns only rows returned by the first query but not by the
second. It also eliminates the
duplicates from the first query.
45
Note: For compound queries (containing set operators UNION, INTERSECT, MINUS, or
UNION ALL), the ORDER
BY clause must use positions, rather than explicit expressions. Also, the ORDER BY
clause can appear only in the
last component query. The ORDER BY clause orders all rows returned by the entire
compound query.
Q) What is a Transaction in Oracle?
A transaction is a Logical unit of work that compromises one or more SQL Statements
executed by a single User.
According to ANSI, a transaction begins with first executable statement and ends
when it is explicitly committed or
rolled back.
A transaction is an atomic unit.
Q. What are some of the Key Words Used in Oracle?
Some of the Key words that are used in Oracle are:
A) Committing: A transaction is said to be committed when the transaction makes
permanent changes resulting
from the SQL statements.
b) Rollback: A transaction that retracts any of the changes resulting from SQL
statements in Transaction.
c) SavePoint: For long transactions that contain many SQL statements, intermediate
markers or savepoints are
declared. Savepoints can be used to divide a transaction into smaller points.
We can declare intermediate markers called savepoints within the context of a
transaction. Savepoints divide a long
transaction into smaller parts. Using savepoints, we can arbitrarily mark our work
at any point within a long
transaction. We then have the option later of rolling back work performed before
the current point in the transaction
but after a declared savepoint within the transaction.
For example, we can use savepoints throughout a long complex series of updates so
that if we make an error, we do
not need to resubmit every statement.
d) Rolling Forward: Process of applying redo log during recovery is called rolling
forward.
e) Cursor: A cursor is a handle (name or a pointer) for the memory associated with
a specific statement. A cursor is
basically an area allocated by Oracle for executing the Sql Statement. Oracle uses
an implicit cursor statement for
Single row query and Uses Explicit cursor for a multi row query.
f) System Global Area (SGA): The SGA is a shared memory region allocated by the
Oracle that contains Data and
control information for one Oracle Instance. It consists of Database Buffer Cache
and Redo log Buffer. (KPIT
Infotech, Pune)
g) Program Global Area (PGA): The PGA is a memory buffer that contains data and
control information for server
process.
g) Database Buffer Cache: Database Buffer of SGA stores the most recently used
blocks of database data. The set
of database buffers in an instance is called Database Buffer Cache.
h) Redo log Buffer: Redo log Buffer of SGA stores all the redo log entries.
i) Redo Log Files: Redo log files are set of files that protect altered database
data in memory that has not been
written to Data Files. They are basically used for backup when a database crashes.
j) Process: A Process is a 'thread of control' or mechanism in Operating System
that executes series of steps.
Q. What are Procedure, functions and Packages?
Procedures and functions consist of set of PL/SQL statements that are grouped
together as a unit to solve a specific
problem or perform set of related tasks.
Procedures do not return values while Functions return one Value.
Packages: Packages provide a method of encapsulating and storing related
procedures, functions, variables and
other Package Contents
Q. What are Database Triggers and Stored Procedures?
Database Triggers: Database Triggers are Procedures that are automatically executed
as a result of insert in,
update to, or delete from table. Database triggers have the values old and new to
denote the old value in the table
before it is deleted and the new indicated the new value that will be used. DT is
useful for implementing complex
business rules which cannot be enforced using the integrity rules. We can have the
trigger as Before trigger or After
Trigger and at Statement or Row level.
e.g:: operations insert, update ,delete 3 before ,after 3*2 A total of 6
combinations
At statement level(once for the trigger) or row level( for every execution ) 6 * 2
A total of 12.
Thus a total of 12 combinations are there and the restriction of usage of 12
triggers has been lifted from Oracle 7.3
Onwards.
Stored Procedures: Stored Procedures are Procedures that are stored in Compiled
form in the database. The
advantage of using the stored procedures is that many users can use the same
procedure in compiled and ready to
use format.
Q. How many Integrity Rules are there and what are they?
There are Three Integrity Rules. They are as follows:
a) Entity Integrity Rule: The Entity Integrity Rule enforces that the Primary key
cannot be Null
b) Foreign Key Integrity Rule: The FKIR denotes that the relationship between the
foreign key and the
primary key has to be enforced. When there is data in Child Tables the Master
tables cannot be deleted.
46
c) Business Integrity Rules: The Third Integrity rule is about the complex business
processes which cannot
be implemented by the above 2 rules.
Q. What are the Various Master and Detail Relationships?
The various Master and Detail Relationship are
a) No Isolated : The Master cannot be deleted when a child is existing
b) Isolated : The Master can be deleted when the child is existing
c) Cascading : The child gets deleted when the Master is deleted.
Q. What are the Various Block Coordination Properties?
The various Block Coordination Properties are:
a) Immediate - Default Setting. The Detail records are shown when the Master Record
are shown.
b) Deferred with Auto Query- Oracle Forms defer fetching the detail records until
the operator navigates to the detail
block.
c) Deferred with No Auto Query- The operator must navigate to the detail block and
explicitly execute a query
Q. What are the Different Optimization Techniques?
The Various Optimization techniques are:
a) Execute Plan: we can see the plan of the query and change it accordingly based
on the indexes
b) Optimizer_hint: set_item_property ('DeptBlock',OPTIMIZER_HINT,'FIRST_ROWS');
Select /*+ First_Rows */ Deptno,Dname,Loc,Rowid from dept where (Deptno > 25)
c) Optimize_Sql: By setting the Optimize_Sql = No, Oracle Forms assigns a single
cursor for all SQL
statements. This slow downs the processing because for every time the SQL must be
parsed whenever
they are executed.
f45run module = my_firstform userid = scott/tiger optimize_sql = No
d) Optimize_Tp:
By setting the Optimize_Tp= No, Oracle Forms assigns seperate cursor only for each
query SELECT
statement. All other SQL statements reuse the cursor.
f45run module = my_firstform userid = scott/tiger optimize_Tp = No
Q. How do u implement the If statement in the Select Statement?
We can implement the if statement in the select statement by using the Decode
statement.
e.g select DECODE (EMP_CAT,'1','First','2','Second’, Null);
Q. How many types of Exceptions are there?
There are 2 types of exceptions. They are:
a) System Exceptions
e.g. When no_data_found, When too_many_rows
b) User Defined Exceptions
e.g. My_exception exception
When My_exception then
Q. What are the inline and the precompiler directives?
The inline and precompiler directives detect the values directly.
Q. How do you use the same lov for 2 columns?
We can use the same lov for 2 columns by passing the return values in global values
and using the global values in
the code.
Q. How many minimum groups are required for a matrix report?
The minimum number of groups in matrix report is 4.
Q. What is the difference between static and dynamic lov?
The static lov contains the predetermined values while the dynamic lov contains
values that come at run time.
Q. What are the OOPS concepts in Oracle?
Oracle does implement the OOPS concepts. The best example is the Property Classes.
We can categorize the
properties by setting the visual attributes and then attach the property classes
for the objects. OOPS supports the
concepts of objects and classes and we can consider the property classes as classes
and the items as objects
Q. What is the difference between candidate key, unique key and primary key?
Candidate keys are the columns in the table that could be the primary keys and the
primary key is the key that has
been selected to identify the rows. Unique key is also useful for identifying the
distinct rows in the table.
Q. What is concurrency?
47
Concurrency is allowing simultaneous access of same data by different users. Locks
useful for accessing the
database are:
a) Exclusive - The exclusive lock is useful for locking the row when an insert,
update or delete is being done. This
lock should not be applied when we do only select from the row.
b) Share lock - We can do the table as Share_Lock and as many share_locks can be
put on the same resource.
Q. What are Privileges and Grants?
Privileges are the right to execute a particular type of SQL statements.
E.g. Right to Connect, Right to create, Right to resource
Grants are given to the objects so that the object might be accessed accordingly.
The grant has to be given by the
owner of the object.
Q. What are Table Space, Data Files, Parameter File and Control Files?
Table Space: The table space is useful for storing the data in the database.
When a database is created two table spaces are created.
a) System Table space: This data file stores all the tables related to the system
and dba tables
b) User Table space: This data file stores all the user related tables
We should have separate table spaces for storing the tables and indexes so that the
access is fast.
Data Files: Every Oracle Data Base has one or more physical data files. They store
the data for the database. Every
data file is associated with only one database. Once the Data file is created the
size cannot change. To increase the
size of the database to store more data we have to add data file.
Parameter Files: Parameter file is needed to start an instance.A parameter file
contains the list of instance
configuration parameters.
e.g. db_block_buffers = 500 db_name = ORA7 db_domain = u.s.acme lang
Control Files: Control files record the physical structure of the data files and
redo log files
They contain the Db name, name and location of dbs, data files, redo log files and
time stamp.
Q. Some of the terms related to Physical Storage of the Data.
The finest level of granularity of the data base is the data blocks.
Data Block : One Data Block correspond to specific number of physical database
space
Extent : Extent is the number of specific number of contiguous data blocks.
Segments : Set of Extents allocated for Extents. There are three types of Segments.
a) Data Segment: Non Clustered Table has data segment data of every table is stored
in cluster data
segment
b) Index Segment: Each Index has index segment that stores data
c) Roll Back Segment: Temporarily store 'undo' information
Q. What are the Pct Free and Pct Used?
Pct Free is used to denote the percentage of the free space that is to be left when
creating a table. Similarly Pct
Used is used to denote the percentage of the used space that is to be used when
creating a table E.g. Pctfree 20,
Pctused 40
Q. What is Row Chaining?
The data of a row in a table may not be able to fit the same data block. Data for
row is stored in a chain of data
blocks.
Q. What is a 2 Phase Commit?
Two Phase commit is used in distributed data base systems. This is useful to
maintain the integrity of the database
so that all the users see the same values. It contains DML statements or Remote
Procedural calls that reference a
remote object.
There are basically 2 phases in a 2 phase commit.
a) Prepare Phase: Global coordinator asks participants to prepare
b) Commit Phase: Commit all participants to coordinator to Prepared, Read only or
abort Reply
A two-phase commit mechanism guarantees that all database servers participating in
a distributed transaction either
all commit or all roll back the statements in the transaction. A two-phase commit
mechanism also protects implicit
DML operations performed by integrity constraints, remote procedure calls, and
triggers.
Q. What is the difference between deleting and truncating of tables?
Deleting a table will not remove the rows from the table but entry is there in the
database dictionary and it can be
retrieved But truncating a table deletes it completely and it cannot be retrieved.
Q. What are mutating tables?
48
When a table is in state of transition it is said to be mutating. E.g. If a row has
been deleted then the table is said to
be mutating and no operations can be done on the table except select.
Q. What are Codd Rules?
Codd Rules describe the ideal nature of a RDBMS. No RDBMS satisfies all the 12 codd
rules and Oracle Satisfies 11
of the 12 rules and is the only RDBMS to satisfy the maximum number of rules.
Q. What is Normalization?
Normalization is the process of organizing the tables to remove the redundancy.
There are mainly 5 Normalization
rules.
1 Normal Form - A table is said to be in 1st Normal Form when the attributes are
atomic
2 Normal Form - A table is said to be in 2nd Normal Form when all the candidate
keys are dependant on the
primary key
3rd Normal Form - A table is said to be third Normal form when it is not dependant
transitively
Q. What is the Difference between a post query and a pre query?
A post query will fire for every row that is fetched but the pre query will fire
only once.
Q. How can we delete the duplicate rows in the table?
We can delete the duplicate rows in the table by using the Rowid.
Delete emp where rowid=(select max(rowid) from emp group by empno)
Delete emp a where rownum=(select max(rownum) from emp g where a.empno=b.empno)
Q. Can U disable database trigger? How?
Yes. With respect to table ALTER TABLE TABLE [ DISABLE all_trigger ]
Q. What are pseudocolumns? Name them?
A pseudocolumn behaves like a table column, but is not actually stored in the
table. You can select from pseudocolumns, but
you cannot insert, update, or delete their values. This section describes these
pseudocolumns:
* CURRVAL * NEXTVAL * LEVEL * ROWID * ROWNUM
Q. How many columns can table have?
The number of columns in a table can range from 1 to 254.
Q. Is space acquired in blocks or extents?
In extents.
Q. What is clustered index?
In an indexed cluster, rows are stored together based on their cluster key values.
Can not be applied for HASH.
Q. What are the datatypes supported By oracle (INTERNAL)?
varchar2, Number, Char, MLSLABEL.
Q. What are attributes of cursor?
%FOUND , %NOTFOUND , %ISOPEN,%ROWCOUNT
Q. Can you use select in FROM clause of SQL select ? Yes.
Q. Describe the difference between a procedure, function and anonymous pl/sql
block.
Candidate should mention use of DECLARE statement, a function must return a value
while a procedure doesn’t
have to.
Q. What is a mutating table error and how can you get around it?
This happens with triggers. It occurs because the trigger is trying to modify a row
it is currently using. The usual fix
involves either use of views or temporary tables so the database is selecting from
one while updating the other.
Q. Describe the use of %ROWTYPE and %TYPE in PL/SQL.
%ROWTYPE allows you to associate a variable with an entire table row. The %TYPE
associates a variable with a
single column type.
Q. What packages (if any) has Oracle provided for use by developers?
Oracle provides the DBMS_ series of packages. There are many which developers
should be aware of such as
DBMS_SQL, DBMS_PIPE, DBMS_TRANSACTION, DBMS_LOCK, DBMS_ALERT, DBMS_OUTPUT,
DBMS_JOB,
49
DBMS_UTILITY, DBMS_DDL, UTL_FILE. If they can mention a few of these and describe
how they used them, even
better. If they include the SQL routines provided by Oracle, great, but not really
what was asked.
Q. Describe the use of PL/SQL tables.
PL/SQL tables are scalar arrays that can be referenced by a binary integer. They
can be used to hold values for use
in later queries or calculations. In Oracle 8 they will be able to be of the
%ROWTYPE designation, or RECORD.
Q. When is a declare statement needed?
The DECLARE statement is used in PL/SQL anonymous blocks such as with stand alone,
non-stored PL/SQL
procedures. It must come first in a PL/SQL standalone file if it is used.
Q. In what order should a open/fetch/loop set of commands in a PL/SQL block be
implemented if you use the
%NOTFOUND cursor variable in the exit when statement? Why?
OPEN then FETCH then LOOP followed by the exit when. If not specified in this order
will result in the final return
being done twice because of the way the %NOTFOUND is handled by PL/SQL.
Q. What are SQLCODE and SQLERRM and why are they important for PL/SQL developers?
SQLCODE returns the value of the error number for the last error encountered. The
SQLERRM returns the actual
error message for the last error encountered. They can be used in exception
handling to report, or, store in an error
log table, the error that occurred in the code. These are especially useful for the
WHEN OTHERS exception.
Q. How can you find within a PL/SQL block, if a cursor is open?
Use the %ISOPEN cursor status variable.
Q. How can you generate debugging output from PL/SQL?
Use the DBMS_OUTPUT package. Another possible method is to just use the SHOW ERROR
command, but this
only shows errors. The DBMS_OUTPUT package can be used to show intermediate results
from loops and the
status of variables as the procedure is executed. The new package UTL_FILE can also
be used.
Q. What are the types of triggers?
There are 12 types of triggers in PL/SQL that consist of combinations of the
BEFORE, AFTER, ROW, TABLE,
INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE and ALL key words:
BEFORE ALL ROW INSERT
AFTER ALL ROW INSERT
BEFORE INSERT
AFTER INSERT
Q. How can variables be passed to a SQL routine?
By use of the & or double && symbol. For passing in variables numbers can be used
(&1, &2,...,&8) to pass the
values after the command into the SQLPLUS session. To be prompted for a specific
variable, place the
ampersanded variable in the code itself:
“select * from dba_tables where owner=&owner_name;” . Use of double ampersands
tells SQLPLUS to resubstitute
the value for each subsequent use of the variable, a single ampersand will cause a
reprompt for the value unless an
ACCEPT statement is used to get the value from the user.
Q. You want to include a carriage return/linefeed in your output from a SQL script,
how can you do this?
The best method is to use the CHR() function (CHR(10) is a return/linefeed) and the
concatenation function “||”.
Another method, although it is hard to document and isn’t always portable is to use
the return/linefeed as a part of a
quoted string.
Q. How can you call a PL/SQL procedure from SQL?
By use of the EXECUTE (short form EXEC) command. You can also wrap the call in a
BEGIN END block and treat it
as an anonymous PL/SQL block.
Q. How do you execute a host operating system command from within SQL?
By use of the exclamation point “!” (in UNIX and some other OS) or the HOST (HO)
command.
Q. You want to use SQL to build SQL, what is this called and give an example?
This is called dynamic SQL. An example would be:
set lines 90 pages 0 termout off feedback off verify off
spool drop_all.sql
50
select ‘drop user ‘||username||’ cascade;’ from dba_users
where username not in (“SYS’,’SYSTEM’);
spool off
Essentially you are looking to see that they know to include a command (in this
case DROP USER...CASCADE;) and
that you need to concatenate using the ‘||’ the values selected from the database.
Q. What SQLPlus command is used to format output from a select?
This is best done with the COLUMN command.
Q. You want to group the following set of select returns, what can you group on?
Max(sum_of_cost), min(sum_of_cost), count(item_no), item_no
The only column that can be grouped on is the “item_no” column, the rest have
aggregate functions associated with
them.
Q. What special Oracle feature allows you to specify how the cost based system
treats a SQL statement?
The COST based system allows the use of HINTs to control the optimizer path
selection. If they can give some
example hints such as FIRST ROWS, ALL ROWS, USING INDEX, STAR, even better.
Q. You want to determine the location of identical rows in a table before
attempting to place a unique index
on the table, how can this be done?
Oracle tables always have one guaranteed unique column, the rowid column. If you
use a min/max function against
your rowid and then select against the proposed primary key you can squeeze out the
rowids of the duplicate rows
pretty quick. For example:
select rowid from emp e where e.rowid > (select min(x.rowid)
from emp x where x.emp_no = e.emp_no);
In the situation where multiple columns make up the proposed key, they must all be
used in the where clause.
Q. What is a Cartesian product?
A Cartesian product is the result of an unrestricted join of two or more tables.
The result set of a three table
Cartesian product will have x * y * z number of rows where x, y, z correspond to
the number of rows in each table
involved in the join. This occurs if there are not at least n-1 joins where n is
the number of tables in a SELECT.
Q. You are joining a local and a remote table, the network manager complains about
the traffic involved, how
can you reduce the network traffic?
Push the processing of the remote data to the remote instance by using a view to
pre-select the information for the
join. This will result in only the data required for the join being sent across.
Q. What is the default ordering of an ORDER BY clause in a SELECT statement?
Ascending
Q. What is tkprof and how is it used?
The tkprof tool is a tuning tool used to determine cpu and execution times for SQL
statements. You use it by first
setting timed_statistics to true in the initialization file and then turning on
tracing for either the entire database via the
sql_trace parameter or for the session using the ALTER SESSION command. Once the
trace file is generated you
run the tkprof tool against the trace file and then look at the output from the
tkprof tool. This can also be used to
generate explain plan output.
Q. What is explain plan and how is it used?
The EXPLAIN PLAN command is a tool to tune SQL statements. To use it you must have
an explain_table
generated in the user you are running the explain plan for. This is created using
the utlxplan.sql script. Once the
explain plan table exists you run the explain plan command giving as its argument
the SQL statement to be
explained. The explain_plan table is then queried to see the execution plan of the
statement. Explain plans can also
be run using tkprof.
Q. How do you set the number of lines on a page of output? The width?
The SET command in SQLPLUS is used to control the number of lines generated per
page and the width of those
lines, for example SET PAGESIZE 60 LINESIZE 80 will generate reports that are 60
lines long with a line width of 80
characters. The PAGESIZE and LINESIZE options can be shortened to PAGES and LINES.
Q. How do you prevent output from coming to the screen?
51
The SET option TERMOUT controls output to the screen. Setting TERMOUT OFF turns off
screen output. This
option can be shortened to TERM.
Q. How do you prevent Oracle from giving you informational messages during and
after a SQL statement
execution?
The SET options FEEDBACK and VERIFY can be set to OFF.
Q. How do you generate file output from SQL? By use of the SPOOL command.
Data Modeler:
Q. Describe third normal form?
Expected answer: Something like: In third normal form all attributes in an entity
are related to the primary key and
only to the primary key
Q. Is the following statement true or false? Why or why not?
“All relational databases must be in third normal form”
False. While 3NF is good for logical design most databases, if they have more than
just a few tables, will not perform
well using full 3NF. Usually some entities will be denormalized in the logical to
physical transfer process.
Q. What is an ERD?
An ERD is an Entity-Relationship-Diagram. It is used to show the entities and
relationships for a database logical
model.
Q. Why are recursive relationships bad? How do you resolve them?
A recursive relationship (one where a table relates to itself) is bad when it is a
hard relationship (i.e. neither side is a
“may” both are “must”) as this can result in it not being possible to put in a top
or perhaps a bottom of the table (for
example in the EMPLOYEE table you couldn’t put in the PRESIDENT of the company
because he has no boss, or
the junior janitor because he has no subordinates). These type of relationships are
usually resolved by adding a
small intersection entity.
Q. What does a hard one-to-one relationship mean (one where the relationship on
both ends is “must”)?
This means the two entities should probably be made into one entity.
Q. How should a many-to-many relationship be handled? By adding an intersection
entity table
Q. What is an artificial (derived) primary key? When should an artificial (or
derived) primary key be used?
A derived key comes from a sequence. Usually it is used when a concatenated key
becomes too cumbersome to use
as a foreign key.
Q. When should you consider denormalization?
Whenever performance analysis indicates it would be beneficial to do so without
compromising data integrity.
Q. What is a Schema?
Associated with each database user is a schema. A schema is a collection of schema
objects. Schema objects
include tables, views, sequences, synonyms, indexes, clusters, database links,
snapshots, procedures, functions,
and packages.
Q. What do you mean by table?
Tables are the basic unit of data storage in an Oracle database. Data is stored in
rows and columns.
A row is a collection of column information corresponding to a single record.
Q. Is there an alternative of dropping a column from a table? If yes, what?
Dropping a column in a large table takes a considerable amount of time. A quicker
alternative is to mark a column as
unused with the SET UNUSED clause of the ALTER TABLE statement. This makes the
column data unavailable,
although the data remains in each row of the table. After marking a column as
unused, you can add another column
that has the same name to the table. The unused column can then be dropped at a
later time when you want to
reclaim the space occupied by the column data.
Q. What is a rowid?
The rowid identifies each row piece by its location or address. Once assigned, a
given row piece retains its rowid
until the corresponding row is deleted, or exported and imported using the Export
and Import utilities.
Q. What is a view? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
52
A view is a tailored presentation of the data contained in one or more tables or
other views. A view takes the output
of a query and treats it as a table. Therefore, a view can be thought of as a
stored query or a virtual table.
Unlike a table, a view is not allocated any storage space, nor does a view actually
contain data. Rather, a view is
defined by a query that extracts or derives data from the tables that the view
references. These tables are called
base tables. Base tables can in turn be actual tables or can be views themselves
(including snapshots). Because a
view is based on other objects, a view requires no storage other than storage for
the definition of the view (the stored
query) in the data dictionary.
Q. What are the advantages of having a view?
The advantages of having a view are:
 To provide an additional level of table security by restricting access to a
predetermined set of rows or columns of
a table
 To hide data complexity
 To simplify statements for the user
 To present the data in a different perspective from that of the base table
 To isolate applications from changes in definitions of base tables
 To save complex queries
For example, a query can perform extensive calculations with table information.
By saving this query as a view, you can perform the calculations each time the view
is queried.
Q. What is a Materialized View? (Honeywell, KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Materialized views, also called snapshots, are schema objects that can be used to
summarize, precompute,
replicate, and distribute data. They are suitable in various computing environments
especially for data warehousing.
From a physical design point of view, Materialized Views resembles tables or
partitioned tables and behave like
indexes.
Q. What is the significance of Materialized Views in data warehousing?
In data warehouses, materialized views are used to precompute and store aggregated
data such as sums and
averages. Materialized views in these environments are typically referred to as
summaries because they store
summarized data. They can also be used to precompute joins with or without
aggregations.
Cost-based optimization can use materialized views to improve query performance by
automatically recognizing
when a materialized view can and should be used to satisfy a request. The optimizer
transparently rewrites the
request to use the materialized view. Queries are then directed to the materialized
view and not to the underlying
detail tables or views.
Q. Differentiate between Views and Materialized Views? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Q. What is the major difference between an index and Materialized view?
Unlike indexes, materialized views can be accessed directly using a SELECT
statement.
Q. What are the procedures for refreshing Materialized views?
Oracle maintains the data in materialized views by refreshing them after changes
are made to their master tables.
The refresh method can be:
a) incremental (fast refresh) or
b) complete
For materialized views that use the fast refresh method, a materialized view log or
direct loader log keeps a record of
changes to the master tables.
Materialized views can be refreshed either on demand or at regular time intervals.
Alternatively, materialized views in the same database as their master tables can
be refreshed whenever a
transaction commits its changes to the master tables.
Q. What are materialized view logs?
A materialized view log is a schema object that records changes to a master table’s
data so that a materialized view
defined on the master table can be refreshed incrementally. Another name for
materialized view log is snapshot log.
Each materialized view log is associated with a single master table. The
materialized view log resides in the same
database and schema as its master table.
Q. What is a synonym?
A synonym is an alias for any table, view, snapshot, sequence, procedure, function,
or package. Because a synonym
is simply an alias, it requires no storage other than its definition in the data
dictionary.
Q. What are the advantages of having synonyms?
Synonyms are often used for security and convenience.
For example, they can do the following:
1. Mask the name and owner of an object
2. Provide location transparency for remote objects of a distributed database
53
3. Simplify SQL statements for database users
Q. What are the advantages of having an index? Or What is an index?
a given key value. In a regular
index, this is achieved by storing a list of rowids for each key corresponding to
the rows with that key value. Oracle
stores each key value repeatedly with each stored rowid.
Q. What are the different types of indexes supported by Oracle?
The different types of indexes are:
a. B-tree indexes
b. B-tree cluster indexes
c. Hash cluster indexes
d. Reverse key indexes
e. Bitmap indexes
Q. Can we have function based indexes?
Yes, we can create indexes on functions and expressions that involve one or more
columns in the table being
indexed. A function-based index precomputes the value of the function or expression
and stores it in the index.
You can create a function-based index as either a B-tree or a bitmap index.
Q. What are the restrictions on function based indexes?
The function used for building the index can be an arithmetic expression or an
expression that contains a PL/SQL
function, package function, C callout, or SQL function. The expression cannot
contain any aggregate functions, and it
must be DETERMINISTIC. For building an index on a column containing an object type,
the function can be a
method of that object, such as a map method. However, you cannot build a function-
based index on a LOB column,
REF, or nested table column, nor can you build a function-based index if the object
type contains a LOB, REF, or
nested table.
Q. What are the advantages of having a B-tree index?
The major advantages of having a B-tree index are:
1. B-trees provide excellent retrieval performance for a wide range of queries,
including exact match and
range searches.
2. Inserts, updates, and deletes are efficient, maintaining key order for fast
retrieval.
3. B-tree performance is good for both small and large tables, and does not degrade
as the size of a table
grows.
Q. What is a bitmap index? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
a given key value. In a regular
index, this is achieved by storing a list of rowids for each key corresponding to
the rows with that key value. Oracle
stores each key value repeatedly with each stored rowid. In a bitmap index, a
bitmap for each key value is used
instead of a list of rowids.
Each bit in the bitmap corresponds to a possible rowid. If the bit is set, then it
means that the row with the
corresponding rowid contains the key value. A mapping function converts the bit
position to an actual rowid, so the
bitmap index provides the same functionality as a regular index even though it uses
a different representation
internally. If the number of different key values is small, then bitmap indexes are
very space efficient.
Bitmap indexing efficiently merges indexes that correspond to several conditions in
a WHERE clause. Rows that
satisfy some, but not all, conditions are filtered out before the table itself is
accessed. This improves response time,
often dramatically.
Q. What are the advantages of having bitmap index for data warehousing
applications? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Bitmap indexing benefits data warehousing applications which have large amounts of
data and ad hoc queries but a
low level of concurrent transactions. For such applications, bitmap indexing
provides:
1. Reduced response time for large classes of ad hoc queries
2. A substantial reduction of space usage compared to other indexing techniques
3. Dramatic performance gains even on very low end hardware
4. Very efficient parallel DML and loads
Q. What is the advantage of bitmap index over B-tree index?
Fully indexing a large table with a traditional B-tree index can be prohibitively
expensive in terms of space since the
index can be several times larger than the data in the table. Bitmap indexes are
typically only a fraction of the size of
the indexed data in the table.
Q. What is the limitation/drawback of a bitmap index?
Bitmap indexes are not suitable for OLTP applications with large numbers of
concurrent transactions modifying the
data. These indexes are primarily intended for decision support in data warehousing
applications where users
typically query the data rather than update it.
Bitmap indexes are not suitable for high-cardinality data.
Q. How do you choose between B-tree index and bitmap index?
54
that is, columns in which the
number of distinct values is small compared to the number of rows in the table. If
the values in a column are
repeated more than a hundred times, then the column is a candidate for a bitmap
index. Even columns with a lower
number of repetitions and thus higher cardinality, can be candidates if they tend
to be involved in complex conditions
in the WHERE clauses of queries.
For example, on a table with one million rows, a column with 10,000 distinct values
is a candidate for a bitmap index.
A bitmap index on this column can out-perform a B-tree index, particularly when
this column is often queried in
conjunction with other columns.
B-tree indexes are most effective for high-cardinality data: that is, data with
many possible values, such as
CUSTOMER_NAME or PHONE_NUMBER. A regular Btree index can be several times larger
than the indexed data.
Used appropriately, bitmap indexes can be significantly smaller than a
corresponding B-tree index.
Q. What are clusters?
Clusters are an optional method of storing table data. A cluster is a group of
tables that share the same data blocks
because they share common columns and are often used together.
For example, the EMP and DEPT table share the DEPTNO column. When you cluster the
EMP and DEPT tables,
Oracle physically stores all rows for each department from both the EMP and DEPT
tables in the same data blocks.
Q. What is partitioning? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Partitioning addresses the key problem of supporting very large tables and indexes
by allowing you to decompose
them into smaller and more manageable pieces called partitions. Once partitions are
defined, SQL statements can
access and manipulate the partitions rather than entire tables or indexes.
Partitions are especially useful in data
warehouse applications, which commonly store and analyze large amounts of
historical data.
Q. What are the different partitioning methods?
Two primary methods of partitioning are available:
1. range partitioning, which partitions the data in a table or index according to a
range of values, and
2. hash partitioning, which partitions the data according to a hash function.
Another method, composite partitioning, partitions the data by range and further
subdivides the data into sub
partitions using a hash function.
Q. What is the necessity to have table partitions?
The need to partition large tables is driven by:
· Data Warehouse and Business Intelligence demands for ad hoc analysis on great
quantities of historical data
· Cheaper disk storage
· Application performance failure due to use of traditional techniques
Q. What are the advantages of storing each partition in a separate tablespace?
The major advantages are:
1. You can contain the impact of data corruption.
2. You can back up and recover each partition or subpartition independently.
3. You can map partitions or subpartitions to disk drives to balance the I/O load.
Q. What are the advantages of partitioning?
Partitioning is useful for:
1. Very Large Databases (VLDBs)
2. Reducing Downtime for Scheduled Maintenance
3. Reducing Downtime Due to Data Failures
4. DSS Performance
5. I/O Performance
6. Disk Striping: Performance versus Availability
7. Partition Transparency
Q. What is Range Partitioning? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Range partitioning maps rows to partitions based on ranges of column values. Range
partitioning is defined by the
partitioning specification for a table or index:
PARTITION BY RANGE ( column_list ) and by the partitioning specifications for each
individual partition:
VALUES LESS THAN ( value_list )
Q. What is Hash Partitioning?
Hash partitioning uses a hash function on the partitioning columns to stripe data
into partitions. Hash partitioning
allows data that does not lend itself to range partitioning to be easily
partitioned for performance reasons such as
parallel DML, partition pruning, and partition-wise joins.
Q. What are the advantages of Hash partitioning over Range Partitioning?
Hash partitioning is a better choice than range partitioning when:
55
a) You do not know beforehand how much data will map into a given range
b) Sizes of range partitions would differ quite substantially
c) Partition pruning and partition-wise joins on a partitioning key are important
Q. What are the rules for partitioning a table?
A table can be partitioned if:
– It is not part of a cluster
– It does not contain LONG or LONG RAW datatypes
Q. What is a global partitioned index?
In a global partitioned index, the keys in a particular index partition may refer
to rows stored in more than one
underlying table partition or subpartition. A global index can only be range-
partitioned, but it can be defined on any
type of partitioned table.
Q. What is a local index?
In a local index, all keys in a particular index partition refer only to rows
stored in a single underlying table partition. A
local index is created by specifying the LOCAL attribute.
Q. What are CLOB and NCLOB datatypes? (Mascot)
The CLOB and NCLOB datatypes store up to four gigabytes of character data in the
database. CLOBs store singlebyte
character set data and NCLOBs store fixed-width and varying-width multibyte
national character set data
(NCHAR data).
Q. What is PL/SQL?
PL/SQL is Oracle’s procedural language extension to SQL. PL/SQL enables you to mix
SQL statements with
procedural constructs. With PL/SQL, you can define and execute PL/SQL program units
such as procedures,
PL/SQL program units generally are categorized as anonymous blocks and stored
procedures.
Q. What is an anonymous block?
An anonymous block is a PL/SQL block that appears within your application and it is
not named or stored in the
database.
Q. What is a Stored Procedure?
A stored procedure is a PL/SQL block that Oracle stores in the database and can be
called by name from an
application. When you create a stored procedure, Oracle parses the procedure and
stores its parsed representation
in the database.
Q. What is a distributed transaction?
A distributed transaction is a transaction that includes one or more statements
that update data on two or more
distinct nodes of a distributed database.
Q. What are packages? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
A package is a group of related procedures and functions, together with the cursors
and variables they use, stored
together in the database for continued use as a unit.
While packages allow the administrator or application developer the ability to
organize such routines, they
also offer increased functionality (for example, global package variables can be
declared and used by any procedure
in the package) and performance (for example, all objects of the package are
parsed, compiled, and loaded into
memory once).
Q. What are procedures and functions? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
A procedure or function is a schema object that consists of a set of SQL statements
and other PL/SQL constructs,
grouped together, stored in the database, and executed as a unit to solve a
specific problem or perform a set of
related tasks. Procedures and functions permit the caller to provide parameters
that can be input only, output only, or
input and output values.
Q. What is the difference between Procedure and Function?
Procedures and functions are identical except that functions always return a single
value to the caller, while
procedures do not return values to the caller.
Q. What is a DML and what do they do?
Data manipulation language (DML) statements query or manipulate data in existing
schema objects. They enable
you to:
1. Retrieve data from one or more tables or views (SELECT)
2. Add new rows of data into a table or view (INSERT)
3. Change column values in existing rows of a table or view (UPDATE)
4. Remove rows from tables or views (DELETE)
5. See the execution plan for a SQL statement (EXPLAIN PLAN)
56
6. Lock a table or view, temporarily limiting other users’ access (LOCK TABLE)
Q. What is a DDL and what do they do?
Data definition language (DDL) statements define, alter the structure of, and drop
schema objects. DDL statements
enable you to:
1. Create, alter, and drop schema objects and other database structures, including
the database itself and
database users (CREATE, ALTER, DROP)
2. Change the names of schema objects (RENAME)
3. Delete all the data in schema objects without removing the objects’ structure
(TRUNCATE)
4. Gather statistics about schema objects, validate object structure, and list
chained rows within objects
(ANALYZE)
5. Grant and revoke privileges and roles (GRANT, REVOKE)
6. Turn auditing options on and off (AUDIT, NOAUDIT)
7. Add a comment to the data dictionary (COMMENT)
Q. What are shared sql’s?
Oracle automatically notices when applications send identical SQL statements to the
database. The SQL area used
to process the first occurrence of the statement is shared—that is, used for
processing subsequent occurrences of
that same statement. Therefore, only one shared SQL area exists for a unique
statement. Since shared SQL areas
are shared memory areas, any Oracle process can use a shared SQL area. The sharing
of SQL areas reduces
memory usage on the database server, thereby increasing system throughput.
Q. What are triggers?
Oracle allows to define procedures called triggers that execute implicitly when an
INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE
statement is issued against the associated table or, in some cases, against a view,
or when database system actions
occur. These procedures can be written in PL/SQL or Java and stored in the
database, or they can be written as C
callouts.
Q. What is Cost-based Optimization?
Using the cost-based approach, the optimizer determines which execution plan is
most efficient by considering
available access paths and factoring in information based on statistics for the
schema objects (tables or indexes)
accessed by the SQL statement.
Q. What is Rule-Based Optimization?
Using the rule-based approach, the optimizer chooses an execution plan based on the
access paths available and
the ranks of these access paths.
Q. What is meant by degree of parallelism?
The number of parallel execution servers associated with a single operation is
known as the degree of parallelism.
Q. What is meant by data consistency?
Data consistency means that each user sees a consistent view of the data, including
visible changes made by the
user’s own transactions and transactions of other users.
Q. What are Locks?
Locks are mechanisms that prevent destructive interaction between transactions
accessing the same resource—
either user objects such as tables and rows or system objects not visible to users,
such as shared data structures in
memory and data dictionary rows.
Q. What are the locking modes used in Oracle?
Oracle uses two modes of locking in a multiuser database:
Exclusive lock mode: Prevents the associates resource from being shared. This lock
mode is obtained to modify
data. The first transaction to lock a resource exclusively is the only transaction
that can alter the resource until the
exclusive lock is released.
Share lock mode: Allows the associated resource to be shared, depending on the
operations involved. Multiple users
reading data can share the data, holding share locks to prevent concurrent access
by a writer (who needs an
exclusive lock). Several transactions can acquire share locks on the same resource.
Q. What is a deadlock?
A deadlock can occur when two or more users are waiting for data locked by each
other.
Q. How can you avoid deadlocks?
Multitable deadlocks can usually be avoided if transactions accessing the same
tables lock those tables in the same
order, either through implicit or explicit locks.
For example, all application developers might follow the rule that when both a
master and detail table are updated,
the master table is locked first and then the detail table. If such rules are
properly designed and then followed in all
applications, deadlocks are very unlikely to occur.
Q. What is redo log?
The redo log, present for every Oracle database, records all changes made in an
Oracle database. The redo log of a
database consists of at least two redo log files that are separate from the
datafiles (which actually store a database’s
data). As part of database recovery from an instance or media failure, Oracle
applies the appropriate changes in the
database’s redo log to the datafiles, which updates database data to the instant
that the failure occurred.
57
A database’s redo log can consist of two parts: the online redo log and the
archived redo log.
Q. What are Rollback Segments?
Rollback segments are used for a number of functions in the operation of an Oracle
database. In general, the
rollback segments of a database store the old values of data changed by ongoing
transactions for uncommitted
transactions.
Among other things, the information in a rollback segment is used during database
recovery to undo any
uncommitted changes applied from the redo log to the datafiles. Therefore, if
database recovery is necessary, then
the data is in a consistent state after the rollback segments are used to remove
all uncommitted data from the
datafiles.
Q. What is SGA?
The System Global Area (SGA) is a shared memory region that contains data and
control information for one Oracle
instance. An SGA and the Oracle background processes constitute an Oracle instance.
Oracle allocates the system global area when an instance starts and deallocates it
when the instance shuts down.
Each instance has its own system global area.
Users currently connected to an Oracle server share the data in the system global
area. For optimal performance,
the entire system global area should be as large as possible (while still fitting
in real memory) to store as much data
in memory as possible and minimize disk I/O.
The information stored within the system global area is divided into several types
of memory structures, including the
database buffers, redo log buffer, and the shared pool. These areas have fixed
sizes and are created during instance
startup.
Q. What is PCTFREE?
The PCTFREE parameter sets the minimum percentage of a data block to be reserved as
free space for possible
updates to rows that already exist in that block.
Q. What is PCTUSED?
The PCTUSED parameter sets the minimum percentage of a block that can be used for
row data plus overhead
before new rows will be added to the block. After a data block is filled to the
limit determined by PCTFREE, Oracle
considers the block unavailable for the insertion of new rows until the percentage
of that block falls below the
parameter PCTUSED. Until this value is achieved, Oracle uses the free space of the
data block only for updates to
rows already contained in the data block.
Notes:
these cases they require one byte
to store the length of the column (zero).
the remaining columns in the
previous row are null. For example, if the last three columns of a table are null,
no information is stored for those
columns. In tables with many columns, the columns more likely to contain nulls
should be defined last to conserve
disk space.
Two rows can both contain all nulls without violating a unique index.
NULL values in indexes are considered to be distinct except when all the non-NULL
values in two or more rows of an
index are identical, in which case the rows are considered to be identical.
Therefore, UNIQUE indexes prevent rows
containing NULL values from being treated as identical.
Bitmap indexes include rows that have NULL values, unlike most other types of
indexes. Indexing of nulls can be
useful for some types of SQL statements, such as queries with the aggregate
function COUNT.
Bitmap indexes on partitioned tables must be local indexes.
PL/SQL is Oracle’s procedural language extension to SQL. PL/SQL combines the
ease and flexibility of SQL with the procedural functionality of a structured
programming language, such as IF ... THEN, WHILE, and LOOP.
When designing a database application, a developer should consider the
advantages of using stored PL/SQL:
Because PL/SQL code can be stored centrally in a database, network traffic
between applications and the database is reduced, so application and system
performance increases.
Data access can be controlled by stored PL/SQL code. In this case, the users of
PL/SQL can access data only as intended by the application developer (unless
another access route is granted).
PL/SQL blocks can be sent by an application to a database, executing complex
operations without excessive network traffic.
Even when PL/SQL is not stored in the database, applications can send blocks of
58
PL/SQL to the database rather than individual SQL statements, thereby again
reducing network traffic.
The following sections describe the different program units that can be defined and
stored centrally in a database.
Committing and Rolling Back Transactions
The changes made by the SQL statements that constitute a transaction can be either
committed or rolled back. After
a transaction is committed or rolled back, the next transaction begins with the
next SQL statement.
Committing a transaction makes permanent the changes resulting from all SQL
statements in the transaction. The
changes made by the SQL statements of a transaction become visible to other user
sessions’ transactions that start
only after the transaction is committed.
Rolling back a transaction retracts any of the changes resulting from the SQL
statements in the transaction. After a
transaction is rolled back, the affected data is left unchanged as if the SQL
statements in the transaction were never
executed.
Introduction to the Data Dictionary
One of the most important parts of an Oracle database is its data dictionary, which
is
a read-only set of tables that provides information about its associated database.
A
data dictionary contains:
The definitions of all schema objects in the database (tables, views, indexes,
clusters, synonyms, sequences, procedures, functions, packages, triggers,
and so on)
How much space has been allocated for, and is currently used by, the
schema objects
Default values for columns
Integrity constraint information
The names of Oracle users
Privileges and roles each user has been granted
Auditing information, such as who has accessed or updated various
schema objects
Other general database information
The data dictionary is structured in tables and views, just like other database
data.
All the data dictionary tables and views for a given database are stored in that
database’s SYSTEM tablespace.
Not only is the data dictionary central to every Oracle database, it is an
important
tool for all users, from end users to application designers and database
administrators. To access the data dictionary, you use SQL statements. Because the
data dictionary is read-only, you can issue only queries (SELECT statements)
against the tables and views of the data dictionary.
Q. What is the function of DUMMY table?
The table named DUAL is a small table in the data dictionary that Oracle and user
written programs can reference to
guarantee a known result. This table has one column called DUMMY and one row
containing the value "X".
Databases, tablespaces, and datafiels are closely related, but they have important
differences:
Databases and tablespaces: An Oracle database consists of one or more logical
storage units called tablespaces,
which collectively store all of the database’s data.
Tablespaces and datafiles: Each table in an Oracle database consists of one or more
files called datafiles, which are
physical structures that conform with the operating system in which Oracle is
running.
databases and datafiles:
A database’s data is collectively stored in the datafiles that
constitute each tablespace of the database. For example, the
simplest Oracle database would have one tablespace and one
datafile. Another database might have three tablespaces, each
consisting of two datafiles (for a total of six datafiles).
Nulls
A null is the absence of a value in a column of a row. Nulls indicate missing,
unknown, or inapplicable data. A null should not be used to imply any other value,
such as zero. A column allows nulls unless a NOT NULL or PRIMARY KEY
integrity constraint has been defined for the column, in which case no row can be
inserted without a value for that column.
59
these cases they require one byte to store the length of the column (zero).
the
remaining columns in the previous row are null. For example, if the last three
columns of a table are null, no information is stored for those columns. In tables
with many columns, the columns more likely to contain nulls should be defined last
to conserve disk space.
Most comparisons between nulls and other values are by definition neither true nor
false, but unknown. To identify nulls in SQL, use the IS NULL predicate. Use the
SQL function NVL to convert nulls to non-null values.
Nulls are not indexed, except when the cluster key column value is null or the
index
is a bitmap index.
What are different types of locks?
Q. Master table and Child table performances and comparisons in Oracle?
Q. What are the different types of Cursors? Explain. (Honeywell)
Q. What are the different types of Deletes?
Q. Can a View be updated?
Interview Questions from Honeywell
1. What is pragma?
2. Can you write commit in triggers?
3. Can you call user defined functions in select statements
4. Can you call insert/update/delete in select statements. If yes how? If no what
is the other way?
5. After update how do you know, how many records got updated
6. Select statement does not retrieve any records. What exception is raised?
Interview Questions from Shreesoft
1. How many columns can a PLSQL table have
Interview Questions from mascot
1. What is Load balancing & what u have used to do this? (SQL Loader )
2. What r Routers?
PL/SQL
1. What are different types of joins?
2. Difference between Packages and Procedures
3. Difference between Function and Procedures
4. How many types of triggers are there? When do you use Triggers
5. Can you write DDL statements in Triggers? (No)
6. What is Hint?
7. How do you tune a SQL query?
Interview Questions from KPIT Infotech, Pune
1. Package body
2. What is molar query?
3. What is row level security
General:
Why ORACLE is the best database for Datawarehousing
For data loading in Oracle, what are conventional loading and direct-path loading ?
7. If you use oracle SQL*Loader, how do you transform data with it during loading ?
Example.
Three ways SQL*Loader could doad data, what are those three types ?
What are the contents of "bad files" and "discard files" when using SQL*Loader ?
How do you use commit frequencies ? how does it affect loading performance ?
What are the other factors of the database on which the loading performance
depend ?
* WHAT IS PARALLELISM ?
* WHAT IS A PARALLEL QUERY ?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT WAYS OF LOADING DATA TO DATAWAREHOUSE USING ORACLE?
* WHAT IS TABLE PARTITIONING? HOW IT IS USEFUL TO WAREHOUSE DATABASE?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF PARTITIONING IN ORACLE?
* WHAT IS A MATERIALIZED VIEW? HOW IT IS DIFFERENT FROM NORMAL AND INLINE VIEWS?
* WHAT IS INDEXING? WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF INDEXES SUPPORTED BY ORACLE?
* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT STORAGE OPTIONS SUPPORTED BY ORACLE?
60
* WHAT IS QUERY OPTIMIZER? WHAT ARE DIFFERENT TYPES OF OPTIMIZERS SUPPORTED BY
ORACLE?
* EXPLAIN ROLLUP,CUBE,RANK AND DENSE_RANK FUNCTIONS OF ORACLE 8i.
that is, columns in which the
number of distinct values is small compared to the number of rows in the table. A
gender column, which only has two
distinct values (male and female), is ideal for a bitmap index. However, data
warehouse administrators will also
choose to build bitmap indexes on columns with much higher cardinalities.
Local vs global: A B-tree index on a partitioned table can be local or global.
Global indexes must be
fully rebuilt after a direct load, which can be very costly when loading a
relatively
small number of rows into a large table. For this reason, it is strongly
recommended
that indexes on partitioned tables should be defined as local indexes unless there
is
a well-justified performance requirement for a global index. Bitmap indexes on
partitioned tables are always local.
Why Constraints are Useful in a Data Warehouse
Constraints provide a mechanism for ensuring that data conforms to guidelines
specified by the database administrator. The most common types of constraints
include unique constraints (ensuring that a given column is unique), not-null
constraints, and foreign-key constraints (which ensure that two keys share a
primary key-foreign key relationship).
Materialized Views for Data Warehouses
In data warehouses, materialized views can be used to precompute and store
aggregated data such as the sum of sales. Materialized views in these environments
are typically referred to as summaries, because they store summarized data. They
can also be used to precompute joins with or without aggregations. A materialized
view eliminates the overhead associated with expensive joins or aggregations for a
large or important class of queries.
The Need for Materialized Views
Materialized views are used in data warehouses to increase the speed of queries on
very large databases. Queries to large databases often involve joins between tables
or aggregations such as SUM, or both. These operations are very expensive in terms
of time and processing power.
How does MV’s work?
The query optimizer can use materialized views by
automatically recognizing when an existing materialized view can and should be
used to satisfy a request. It then transparently rewrites the request to use the
materialized view. Queries are then directed to the materialized view and not to
the
underlying detail tables. In general, rewriting queries to use materialized views
rather than detail tables results in a significant performance gain.
If a materialized view is to be used by query rewrite, it must be stored in the
same
database as its fact or detail tables. A materialized view can be partitioned, and
you
can define a materialized view on a partitioned table and one or more indexes on
the materialized view.
The types of materialized views are:
Materialized Views with Joins and Aggregates
Single-Table Aggregate Materialized Views
Materialized Views Containing Only Joins
Some Useful system tables:
user_tab_partitions
user_tab_columns
Doc3
Repository related Questions
Q. What is the difference between PowerCenter and PowerMart?
With PowerCenter, you receive all product functionality, including the ability to
register multiple servers, share
metadata across repositories, and partition data.
61
A PowerCenter license lets you create a single repository that you can configure as
a global repository, the core
component of a data warehouse.
PowerMart includes all features except distributed metadata, multiple registered
servers, and data partitioning. Also,
the various options available with PowerCenter (such as PowerCenter Integration
Server for BW, PowerConnect for
IBM DB2, PowerConnect for IBM MQSeries, PowerConnect for SAP R/3, PowerConnect for
Siebel, and
PowerConnect for PeopleSoft) are not available with PowerMart.
Q. What are the new features and enhancements in PowerCenter 5.1?
The major features and enhancements to PowerCenter 5.1 are:
a) Performance Enhancements
· High precision decimal arithmetic. The Informatica Server optimizes data
throughput to increase
performance of sessions using the Enable Decimal Arithmetic option.
· To_Decimal and Aggregate functions. The Informatica Server uses improved
algorithms to increase
performance of To_Decimal and all aggregate functions such as percentile, median,
and average.
· Cache management. The Informatica Server uses better cache management to increase
performance of
Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank transformations.
· Partition sessions with sorted aggregation. You can partition sessions with
Aggregator transformation
that use sorted input. This improves memory usage and increases performance of
sessions that have
sorted data.
b) Relaxed Data Code Page Validation
When enabled, the Informatica Client and Informatica Server lift code page
selection and validation
restrictions. You can select any supported code page for source, target, lookup,
and stored procedure data.
c) Designer Features and Enhancements
· Debug mapplets. You can debug a mapplet within a mapping in the Mapping Designer.
You can set
breakpoints in transformations in the mapplet.
· Support for slash character (/) in table and field names. You can use the
Designer to import source and
target definitions with table and field names containing the slash character (/).
This allows you to import
SAP BW source definitions by connecting directly to the underlying database tables.
d) Server Manager Features and Enhancements
· Continuous sessions. You can schedule a session to run continuously. A continuous
session starts
automatically when the Load Manager starts. When the session stops, it restarts
immediately without
rescheduling. Use continuous sessions when reading real time sources, such as IBM
MQSeries.
· Partition sessions with sorted aggregators. You can partition sessions with
sorted aggregators in a
mapping.
· Register multiple servers against a local repository. You can register multiple
PowerCenter Servers
against a local repository.
Q. What is a repository?
The Informatica repository is a relational database that stores information, or
metadata, used by the Informatica
Server and Client tools. The repository also stores administrative information such
as usernames and passwords,
permissions and privileges, and product version.
We create and maintain the repository with the Repository Manager client tool. With
the Repository Manager, we can
also create folders to organize metadata and groups to organize users.
Q. What are different kinds of repository objects? And what it will contain?
Repository objects displayed in the Navigator can include sources, targets,
transformations, mappings, mapplets,
shortcuts, sessions, batches, and session logs.
Q. What is a metadata?
Designing a data mart involves writing and storing a complex set of instructions.
You need to know where to get data
(sources), how to change it, and where to write the information (targets).
PowerMart and PowerCenter call this set of
instructions metadata. Each piece of metadata (for example, the description of a
source table in an operational
database) can contain comments about it.
62
In summary, Metadata can include information such as mappings describing how to
transform source data, sessions
indicating when you want the Informatica Server to perform the transformations, and
connect strings for sources and
targets.
Q. What are folders?
Folders let you organize your work in the repository, providing a way to separate
different types of metadata or
different projects into easily identifiable areas.
Q. What is a Shared Folder?
A shared folder is one, whose contents are available to all other folders in the
same repository. If we plan on using
the same piece of metadata in several projects (for example, a description of the
CUSTOMERS table that provides
data for a variety of purposes), you might put that metadata in the shared folder.
Q. What are mappings?
A mapping specifies how to move and transform data from sources to targets.
Mappings include source and target
definitions and transformations. Transformations describe how the Informatica
Server transforms data. Mappings can
also include shortcuts, reusable transformations, and mapplets. Use the Mapping
Designer tool in the Designer to
create mappings.
Q. What are mapplets?
You can design a mapplet to contain sets of transformation logic to be reused in
multiple mappings within a folder, a
repository, or a domain. Rather than recreate the same set of transformations each
time, you can create a mapplet
containing the transformations, then add instances of the mapplet to individual
mappings. Use the Mapplet Designer
tool in the Designer to create mapplets.
Q. What are Transformations?
A transformation generates, modifies, or passes data through ports that you connect
in a mapping or mapplet. When
you build a mapping, you add transformations and configure them to handle data
according to your business
purpose. Use the Transformation Developer tool in the Designer to create
transformations.
Q. What are Reusable transformations?
You can design a transformation to be reused in multiple mappings within a folder,
a repository, or a domain. Rather
than recreate the same transformation each time, you can make the transformation
reusable, then add instances of
the transformation to individual mappings. Use the Transformation Developer tool in
the Designer to create reusable
transformations.
Q. What are Sessions and Batches?
Sessions and batches store information about how and when the Informatica Server
moves data through mappings.
You create a session for each mapping you want to run. You can group several
sessions together in a batch. Use the
Server Manager to create sessions and batches.
Q. What are Shortcuts?
We can create shortcuts to objects in shared folders. Shortcuts provide the easiest
way to reuse objects. We use a
shortcut as if it were the actual object, and when we make a change to the original
object, all shortcuts inherit the
change.
Shortcuts to folders in the same repository are known as local shortcuts. Shortcuts
to the global repository are called
global shortcuts.
We use the Designer to create shortcuts.
Q. What are Source definitions?
Detailed descriptions of database objects (tables, views, synonyms), flat files,
XML files, or Cobol files that provide
source data. For example, a source definition might be the complete structure of
the EMPLOYEES table, including
the table name, column names and datatypes, and any constraints applied to these
columns, such as NOT NULL or
PRIMARY KEY. Use the Source Analyzer tool in the Designer to import and create
source definitions.
Q. What are Target definitions?
63
Detailed descriptions for database objects, flat files, Cobol files, or XML files
to receive transformed data. During a
session, the Informatica Server writes the resulting data to session targets. Use
the Warehouse Designer tool in the
Designer to import or create target definitions.
Q. What is Dynamic Data Store?
The need to share data is just as pressing as the need to share metadata. Often,
several data marts in the same
organization need the same information. For example, several data marts may need to
read the same product data
from operational sources, perform the same profitability calculations, and format
this information to make it easy to
review.
If each data mart reads, transforms, and writes this product data separately, the
throughput for the entire
organization is lower than it could be. A more efficient approach would be to read,
transform, and write the data to
one central data store shared by all data marts. Transformation is a processing-
intensive task, so performing the
profitability calculations once saves time.
Therefore, this kind of dynamic data store (DDS) improves throughput at the level
of the entire organization, including
all data marts. To improve performance further, you might want to capture
incremental changes to sources. For
example, rather than reading all the product data each time you update the DDS, you
can improve performance by
capturing only the inserts, deletes, and updates that have occurred in the PRODUCTS
table since the last time you
updated the DDS.
The DDS has one additional advantage beyond performance: when you move data into
the DDS, you can format it in
a standard fashion. For example, you can prune sensitive employee data that should
not be stored in any data mart.
Or you can display date and time values in a standard format. You can perform these
and other data cleansing tasks
when you move data into the DDS instead of performing them repeatedly in separate
data marts.
Q. When should you create the dynamic data store? Do you need a DDS at all?
To decide whether you should create a dynamic data store (DDS), consider the
following issues:
· How much data do you need to store in the DDS? The one principal advantage of
data marts is the
selectivity of information included in it. Instead of a copy of everything
potentially relevant from the OLTP
database and flat files, data marts contain only the information needed to answer
specific questions for a
specific audience (for example, sales performance data used by the sales division).
A dynamic data store is
a hybrid of the galactic warehouse and the individual data mart, since it includes
all the data needed for all
the data marts it supplies. If the dynamic data store contains nearly as much
information as the OLTP
source, you might not need the intermediate step of the dynamic data store.
However, if the dynamic data
store includes substantially less than all the data in the source databases and
flat files, you should consider
creating a DDS staging area.
· What kind of standards do you need to enforce in your data marts? Creating a DDS
is an important
technique in enforcing standards. If data marts depend on the DDS for information,
you can provide that
data in the range and format you want everyone to use. For example, if you want all
data marts to include
the same information on customers, you can put all the data needed for this
standard customer profile in the
DDS. Any data mart that reads customer data from the DDS should include all the
information in this profile.
· How often do you update the contents of the DDS? If you plan to frequently update
data in data marts,
you need to update the contents of the DDS at least as often as you update the
individual data marts that
the DDS feeds. You may find it easier to read data directly from source databases
and flat file systems if it
becomes burdensome to update the DDS fast enough to keep up with the needs of
individual data marts.
Or, if particular data marts need updates significantly faster than others, you can
bypass the DDS for these
fast update data marts.
· Is the data in the DDS simply a copy of data from source systems, or do you plan
to reformat this
information before storing it in the DDS? One advantage of the dynamic data store
is that, if you plan on
reformatting information in the same fashion for several data marts, you only need
to format it once for the
dynamic data store. Part of this question is whether you keep the data normalized
when you copy it to the
DDS.
· How often do you need to join data from different systems? On occasion, you may
need to join records
queried from different databases or read from different flat file systems. The more
frequently you need to
perform this type of heterogeneous join, the more advantageous it would be to
perform all such joins within
the DDS, then make the results available to all data marts that use the DDS as a
source.
Q. What is a Global repository?
64
The centralized repository in a domain, a group of connected repositories. Each
domain can contain one global
repository. The global repository can contain common objects to be shared
throughout the domain through global
shortcuts. Once created, you cannot change a global repository to a local
repository. You can promote an existing
local repository to a global repository.
Q. What is Local Repository?
Each local repository in the domain can connect to the global repository and use
objects in its shared folders. A
folder in a local repository can be copied to other local repositories while
keeping all local and global shortcuts intact.
Q. What are the different types of locks?
There are five kinds of locks on repository objects:
· Read lock. Created when you open a repository object in a folder for which you do
not have write
permission. Also created when you open an object with an existing write lock.
· Write lock. Created when you create or edit a repository object in a folder for
which you have write
permission.
· Execute lock. Created when you start a session or batch, or when the Informatica
Server starts a
scheduled session or batch.
· Fetch lock. Created when the repository reads information about repository
objects from the database.
· Save lock. Created when you save information to the repository.
Q. After creating users and user groups, and granting different sets of privileges,
I find that none of the
repository users can perform certain tasks, even the Administrator.
Repository privileges are limited by the database privileges granted to the
database user who created the repository.
If the database user (one of the default users created in the Administrators group)
does not have full database
privileges in the repository database, you need to edit the database user to allow
all privileges in the database.
Q. I created a new group and removed the Browse Repository privilege from the
group. Why does every user
in the group still have that privilege?
Privileges granted to individual users take precedence over any group restrictions.
Browse Repository is a default
privilege granted to all new users and groups. Therefore, to remove the privilege
from users in a group, you must
remove the privilege from the group, and every user in the group.
Q. I do not want a user group to create or edit sessions and batches, but I need
them to access the Server
Manager to stop the Informatica Server.
To permit a user to access the Server Manager to stop the Informatica Server, you
must grant them both the Create
Sessions and Batches, and Administer Server privileges. To restrict the user from
creating or editing sessions and
batches, you must restrict the user's write permissions on a folder level.
Alternatively, the user can use pmcmd to stop the Informatica Server with the
Administer Server privilege alone.
Q. How does read permission affect the use of the command line program, pmcmd?
To use pmcmd, you do not need to view a folder before starting a session or batch
within the folder. Therefore, you
do not need read permission to start sessions or batches with pmcmd. You must,
however, know the exact name of
the session or batch and the folder in which it exists.
With pmcmd, you can start any session or batch in the repository if you have the
Session Operator privilege or
execute permission on the folder.
Q. My privileges indicate I should be able to edit objects in the repository, but I
cannot edit any metadata.
You may be working in a folder with restrictive permissions. Check the folder
permissions to see if you belong to a
group whose privileges are restricted by the folder owner.
Q. I have the Administer Repository Privilege, but I cannot access a repository
using the Repository
Manager.
65
To perform administration tasks in the Repository Manager with the Administer
Repository privilege, you must also
have the default privilege Browse Repository. You can assign Browse Repository
directly to a user login, or you can
inherit Browse Repository from a group.
Questions related to Server Manager
Q. What is Event-Based Scheduling?
When you use event-based scheduling, the Informatica Server starts a session when
it locates the specified indicator
file. To use event-based scheduling, you need a shell command, script, or batch
file to create an indicator file when
all sources are available. The file must be created or sent to a directory local to
the Informatica Server. The file can
be of any format recognized by the Informatica Server operating system. The
Informatica Server deletes the indicator
file once the session starts.
Use the following syntax to ping the Informatica Server on a UNIX system:
pmcmd ping [{user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}]
[hostname:]portno
Use the following syntax to start a session or batch on a UNIX system:
pmcmd start {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno [folder_name:]
{session_name | batch_name} [:pf=param_file] session_flag wait_flag
Use the following syntax to stop a session or batch on a UNIX system:
pmcmd stop {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno[folder_name:]
{session_name | batch_name} session_flag
Use the following syntax to stop the Informatica Server on a UNIX system:
pmcmd stopserver {user_name | %user_env_var} {password | %password_env_var}
[hostname:]portno
Q. What are the different types of Commit intervals?
The different commit intervals are:
· Target-based commit. The Informatica Server commits data based on the number of
target rows and the
key constraints on the target table. The commit point also depends on the buffer
block size and the commit
interval.
· Source-based commit. The Informatica Server commits data based on the number of
source rows. The
commit point is the commit interval you configure in the session properties.
Designer Questions
Q. What are the tools provided by Designer?
The Designer provides the following tools:
· Source Analyzer. Use to import or create source definitions for flat file, XML,
Cobol, ERP, and relational
sources.
· Warehouse Designer. Use to import or create target definitions.
· Transformation Developer. Use to create reusable transformations.
· Mapplet Designer. Use to create mapplets.
· Mapping Designer. Use to create mappings.
Q. What is a transformation?
A transformation is a repository object that generates, modifies, or passes data.
You configure logic in a
transformation that the Informatica Server uses to transform data. The Designer
provides a set of transformations
that perform specific functions. For example, an Aggregator transformation performs
calculations on groups of data.
66
Each transformation has rules for configuring and connecting in a mapping. For more
information about working with
a specific transformation, refer to the chapter in this book that discusses that
particular transformation.
You can create transformations to use once in a mapping, or you can create reusable
transformations to use in
multiple mappings.
Q. What are the different types of Transformations? (Mascot)
a) Aggregator transformation: The Aggregator transformation allows you to perform
aggregate calculations, such
as averages and sums. The Aggregator transformation is unlike the Expression
transformation, in that you can use
the Aggregator transformation to perform calculations on groups. The Expression
transformation permits you to
perform calculations on a row-by-row basis only. (Mascot)
b) Expression transformation: You can use the Expression transformations to
calculate values in a single row
before you write to the target. For example, you might need to adjust employee
salaries, concatenate first and last
names, or convert strings to numbers. You can use the Expression transformation to
perform any non-aggregate
calculations. You can also use the Expression transformation to test conditional
statements before you output the
results to target tables or other transformations.
c) Filter transformation: The Filter transformation provides the means for
filtering rows in a mapping. You pass all
the rows from a source transformation through the Filter transformation, and then
enter a filter condition for the
transformation. All ports in a Filter transformation are input/output, and only
rows that meet the condition pass
through the Filter transformation.
d) Joiner transformation: While a Source Qualifier transformation can join data
originating from a common source
database, the Joiner transformation joins two related heterogeneous sources
residing in different locations or file
systems.
e) Lookup transformation: Use a Lookup transformation in your mapping to look up
data in a relational table, view,
or synonym. Import a lookup definition from any relational database to which both
the Informatica Client and Server
can connect. You can use multiple Lookup transformations in a mapping.
The Informatica Server queries the lookup table based on the lookup ports in the
transformation. It compares Lookup
transformation port values to lookup table column values based on the lookup
condition. Use the result of the lookup
to pass to other transformations and the target.
Q. What is the difference between Aggregate and Expression Transformation? (Mascot)
Q. What is Update Strategy?
When we design our data warehouse, we need to decide what type of information to
store in targets. As part of our
target table design, we need to determine whether to maintain all the historic data
or just the most recent changes.
The model we choose constitutes our update strategy, how to handle changes to
existing records.
Update strategy flags a record for update, insert, delete, or reject. We use this
transformation when we want to exert
fine control over updates to a target, based on some condition we apply. For
example, we might use the Update
Strategy transformation to flag all customer records for update when the mailing
address has changed, or flag all
employee records for reject for people no longer working for the company.
Q. Where do you define update strategy?
We can set the Update strategy at two different levels:
· Within a session. When you configure a session, you can instruct the Informatica
Server to either treat all
records in the same way (for example, treat all records as inserts), or use
instructions coded into the
session mapping to flag records for different database operations.
· Within a mapping. Within a mapping, you use the Update Strategy transformation to
flag records for insert,
delete, update, or reject.
Q. What are the advantages of having the Update strategy at Session Level?
Q. What is a lookup table? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
The lookup table can be a single table, or we can join multiple tables in the same
database using a lookup query
override. The Informatica Server queries the lookup table or an in-memory cache of
the table for all incoming rows
into the Lookup transformation.
67
If your mapping includes heterogeneous joins, we can use any of the mapping sources
or mapping targets as the
lookup table.
Q. What is a Lookup transformation and what are its uses?
We use a Lookup transformation in our mapping to look up data in a relational
table, view or synonym.
We can use the Lookup transformation for the following purposes:
 Get a related value. For example, if our source table includes employee ID, but
we want to include
the employee name in our target table to make our summary data easier to read.
 Perform a calculation. Many normalized tables include values used in a
calculation, such as gross
sales per invoice or sales tax, but not the calculated value (such as net sales).
 Update slowly changing dimension tables. We can use a Lookup transformation to
determine
whether records already exist in the target.
Q. What are connected and unconnected Lookup transformations?
We can configure a connected Lookup transformation to receive input directly from
the mapping pipeline, or we can
configure an unconnected Lookup transformation to receive input from the result of
an expression in another
transformation.
An unconnected Lookup transformation exists separate from the pipeline in the
mapping. We write an expression
using the :LKP reference qualifier to call the lookup within another
transformation.
A common use for unconnected Lookup transformations is to update slowly changing
dimension tables.
Q. What is the difference between connected lookup and unconnected lookup?
Differences between Connected and Unconnected Lookups:
Receives input values directly from the
pipeline.
Receives input values from the result of a
:LKP expression in another transformation.
We can use a dynamic or static cache We can use a static cache
Supports user-defined default values Does not support user-defined default
values
Q. What is Sequence Generator Transformation? (Mascot)
The Sequence Generator transformation generates numeric values. We can use the
Sequence Generator to create
unique primary key values, replace missing primary keys, or cycle through a
sequential range of numbers.
The Sequence Generation transformation is a connected transformation. It contains
two output ports that we can
connect to one or more transformations.
Q. What are the uses of a Sequence Generator transformation?
We can perform the following tasks with a Sequence Generator transformation:
o Create keys
o Replace missing values
o Cycle through a sequential range of numbers
Q. What are the advantages of Sequence generator? Is it necessary, if so why?
We can make a Sequence Generator reusable, and use it in multiple mappings. We
might reuse a Sequence
Generator when we perform multiple loads to a single target.
For example, if we have a large input file that we separate into three sessions
running in parallel, we can use a
Sequence Generator to generate primary key values. If we use different Sequence
Generators, the Informatica
Server might accidentally generate duplicate key values. Instead, we can use the
same reusable Sequence
Generator for all three sessions to provide a unique value for each target row.
Q. How is the Sequence Generator transformation different from other
transformations?
The Sequence Generator is unique among all transformations because we cannot add,
edit, or delete its default
ports (NEXTVAL and CURRVAL).
68
Unlike other transformations we cannot override the Sequence Generator
transformation properties at the session
level. This protecxts the integrity of the sequence values generated.
Q. What does Informatica do? How it is useful?
Q. What is the difference between Informatica version 1.7.2 and 1.7.3?
Q. What are the complex filters used till now in your applications?
Q. Feartures of Informatica
Q. Have you used Informatica? which version?
Q. How do you set up a schedule for data loading from scratch? describe step-by-
step.
Q. How do you use mapplet?
Q. What are the different data source types you have used with Informatica?
Q. Is it possible to run one loading session with one particular target and
multiple types of data sources?
This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 6.0 and
PowerMart 6.0.
Designer
· Compare objects. The Designer allows you to compare two repository objects of the
same type to identify
differences between them. You can compare sources, targets, transformations,
mapplets, mappings,
instances, or mapping/mapplet dependencies in detail. You can compare objects
across open folders and
repositories.
· Copying objects. In each Designer tool, you can use the copy and paste functions
to copy objects from one
workspace to another. For example, you can select a group of transformations in a
mapping and copy them
to a new mapping.
· Custom tools. The Designer allows you to add custom tools to the Tools menu. This
allows you to start
programs you use frequently from within the Designer.
· Flat file targets. You can create flat file target definitions in the Designer to
output data to flat files. You can
create both fixed-width and delimited flat file target definitions.
· Heterogeneous targets. You can create a mapping that outputs data to multiple
database types and target
types. When you run a session with heterogeneous targets, you can specify a
database connection for each
relational target. You can also specify a file name for each flat file or XML
target.
· Link paths. When working with mappings and mapplets, you can view link paths.
Link paths display the flow
of data from a column in a source, through ports in transformations, to a column in
the target.
· Linking ports. You can now specify a prefix or suffix when automatically linking
ports between
transformations based on port names.
· Lookup cache. You can use a dynamic lookup cache in a Lookup transformation to
insert and update data
in the cache and target when you run a session.
· Mapping parameter and variable support in lookup SQL override. You can use
mapping parameters
and variables when you enter a lookup SQL override.
· Mapplet enhancements. Several mapplet restrictions are removed. You can now
include multiple Source
Qualifier transformations in a mapplet, as well as Joiner transformations and
Application Source Qualifier
transformations for IBM MQSeries. You can also include both source definitions and
Input transformations
in one mapplet. When you work with a mapplet in a mapping, you can expand the
mapplet to view all
transformations in the mapplet.
creating metadata
extensions for repository objects. The Designer allows you to create metadata
extensions for source
definitions, target definitions, transformations, mappings, and mapplets.
· Numeric and datetime formats. You can define formats for numeric and datetime
values in flat file sources
and targets. When you define a format for a numeric or datetime value, the
Informatica Server uses the
format to read from the file source or to write to the file target.
· Pre- and post-session SQL. You can specify pre- and post-session SQL in a Source
Qualifier
transformation and in a mapping target instance when you create a mapping in the
Designer. The
Informatica Server issues pre-SQL commands to the database once before it runs the
session. Use presession
SQL to issue commands to the database such as dropping indexes before extracting
data. The
Informatica Server issues post-session SQL commands to the database once after it
runs the session. Use
post-session SQL to issue commands to a database such as re-creating indexes.
· Renaming ports. If you rename a port in a connected transformation, the Designer
propagates the name
change to expressions in the transformation.
· Sorter transformation. The Sorter transformation is an active transformation that
allows you to sort data
from relational or file sources in ascending or descending order according to a
sort key. You can increase
session performance when you use the Sorter transformation to pass data to an
Aggregator transformation
configured for sorted input in a mapping.
· Tips. When you start the Designer, it displays a tip of the day. These tips help
you use the Designer more
69
· Tool tips for port names. Tool tips now display for port names. To view the full
contents of the column,
position the mouse over the cell until the tool tip appears.
· View dependencies. In each Designer tool, you can view a list of objects that
depend on a source, source
qualifier, transformation, or target. Right-click an object and select the View
Dependencies option.
· Working with multiple ports or columns. In each Designer tool, you can move
multiple ports or columns at
the same time.
Informatica Server
· Add timestamp to workflow logs. You can configure the Informatica Server to add a
timestamp to
messages written to the workflow log.
· Expanded pmcmd capability. You can use pmcmd to issue a number of commands to the
Informatica
Server. You can use pmcmd in either an interactive or command line mode. The
interactive mode prompts
you to enter information when you omit parameters or enter invalid commands. In
both modes, you can
enter a command followed by its command options in any order. In addition to
commands for starting and
stopping workflows and tasks, pmcmd now has new commands for working in the
interactive mode and
getting details on servers, sessions, and workflows.
· Error handling. The Informatica Server handles the abort command like the stop
command, except it has a
timeout period. You can specify when and how you want the Informatica Server to
stop or abort a workflow
by using the Control task in the workflow. After you start a workflow, you can stop
or abort it through the
Workflow Monitor or pmcmd.
· Export session log to external library. You can configure the Informatica Server
to write the session log
to an external library.
· Flat files. You can specify the precision and field length for columns when the
Informatica Server writes to a
flat file based on a flat file target definition, and when it reads from a flat
file source. You can also specify
the format for datetime columns that the Informatica Server reads from flat file
sources and writes to flat file
targets.
· Write Informatica Windows Server log to a file. You can now configure the
Informatica Server on
Windows to write the Informatica Server log to a file.
Metadata Reporter
· List reports for jobs, sessions, workflows, and worklets. You can run a list
report that lists all jobs,
sessions, workflows, or worklets in a selected repository.
· Details reports for sessions, workflows, and worklets. You can run a details
report to view details
about each session, workflow, or worklet in a selected repository.
· Completed session, workflow, or worklet detail reports. You can run a completion
details report, which
displays details about how and when a session, workflow, or worklet ran, and
whether it ran successfully.
· Installation on WebLogic. You can now install the Metadata Reporter on WebLogic
and run it as a web
application.
Repository Manager
creating metadata
extensions for repository objects. The Repository Manager allows you to create
metadata extensions for
source definitions, target definitions, transformations, mappings, mapplets,
sessions, workflows, and
worklets.
· pmrep security commands. You can use pmrep to create or delete repository users
and groups. You can
also use pmrep to modify repository privileges assigned to users and groups.
· Tips. When you start the Repository Manager, it displays a tip of the day. These
tips help you use the
Repository Manager more efficiently. You can display or hide the tips by choosing
Help-Tip of the Day.
Repository Server
The Informatica Client tools and the Informatica Server now connect to the
repository database over the network
through the Repository Server.
· Repository Server. The Repository Server manages the metadata in the repository
database. It accepts
and manages all repository client connections and ensures repository consistency by
employing object
locking. The Repository Server can manage multiple repositories on different
machines on the network.
· Repository connectivity changes. When you connect to the repository, you must
specify the host name of
the machine hosting the Repository Server and the port number the Repository Server
uses to listen for
connections. You no longer have to create an ODBC data source to connect a
repository client application
to the repository.
70
Transformation Language
· New functions. The transformation language includes two new functions, ReplaceChr
and ReplaceStr. You
can use these functions to replace or remove characters or strings in text data.
· SETVARIABLE. The SETVARIABLE function now executes for rows marked as insert or
update.
Workflow Manager
The Workflow Manager and Workflow Monitor replace the Server Manager. Instead of
creating a session, you now
create a process called a workflow in the Workflow Manager. A workflow is a set of
instructions on how to execute
tasks such as sessions, emails, and shell commands. A session is now one of the
many tasks you can execute in the
Workflow Manager.
The Workflow Manager provides other tasks such as Assignment, Decision, and Event-
Wait tasks. You can also
create branches with conditional links. In addition, you can batch workflows by
creating worklets in the Workflow
Manager.
· DB2 external loader. You can use the DB2 EE external loader to load data to a DB2
EE database. You
can use the DB2 EEE external loader to load data to a DB2 EEE database. The DB2
external loaders can
insert data, replace data, restart load operations, or terminate load operations.
· Environment SQL. For relational databases, you may need to execute some SQL
commands in the
database environment when you connect to the database. For example, you might want
to set isolation
levels on the source and target systems to avoid deadlocks. You configure
environment SQL in the
database connection. You can use environment SQL for source, target, lookup, and
stored procedure
connections.
· Email. You can create email tasks in the Workflow Manager to send emails when you
run a workflow. You
can configure a workflow to send an email anywhere in the workflow logic, including
after a session
completes or after a session fails. You can also configure a workflow to send an
email when the workflow
suspends on error.
· Flat file targets. In the Workflow Manager, you can output data to a flat file
from either a flat file target
definition or a relational target definition.
· Heterogeneous targets. You can output data to different database types and target
types in the same
session. When you run a session with heterogeneous targets, you can specify a
database connection for
each relational target. You can also specify a file name for each flat file or XML
target.
creating metadata
extensions for repository objects. The Workflow Manager allows you to create
metadata extensions for
sessions, workflows, and worklets.
· Oracle 8 direct path load support. You can load data directly to Oracle 8i in
bulk mode without using an
external loader. You can load data directly to an Oracle client database version
8.1.7.2 or higher.
· Partitioning enhancements. To improve session performance, you can set partition
points at multiple
transformations in a pipeline. You can also specify different partition types at
each partition point.
· Server variables. You can use new server variables to define the workflow log
directory and workflow log
count.
· Teradata TPump external loader. You can use the Teradata TPump external loader to
load data to a
Teradata database. You can use TPump in sessions that contain multiple partitions.
· Tips. When you start the Workflow Manager, it displays a tip of the day. These
tips help you use the
Workflow Manager more efficiently. You can display or hide the tips by choosing
Help-Tip of the Day.
· Workflow log. In addition to session logs, you can configure the Informatica
Server to create a workflow log
to record details about workflow runs.
· Workflow Monitor. You use a tool called the Workflow Monitor to monitor
workflows, worklets, and tasks.
The Workflow Monitor displays information about workflow runs in two views: Gantt
Chart view or Task
view. You can run, stop, abort, and resume workflows from the Workflow Monitor.
Q: How do I connect job streams/sessions or batches across folders? (30 October
2000)
For quite a while there's been a deceptive problem with sessions in the Informatica
repository. For management and
maintenance reasons, we've always wanted to separate mappings, sources, targets, in
to subject areas or functional
areas of the business. This makes sense until we try to run the entire Informatica
job stream. Understanding of
course that only the folder in which the map has been defined can house the
session. This makes it difficult to run
jobs / sessions across folders - particularly when there are necessary job
dependancies which must be defined. The
purpose of this article is to introduce an alternative solution to this problem. It
requires the use of shortcuts.
The basics are like this: Keep the map creations, sources, and targets subject
oriented. This allows maintenance to
be easier (by subect area). Then once the maps are done, change the folders to
allow shortcuts (done from the
71
repository manager). Create a folder called: "MY_JOBS" or something like that. Go
in to designer, open
"MY_JOBS", expand the source folders, and create shortcuts to the mappings in the
source folders.
Go to the session manager, and create sessions for each of the short-cut mappings
in MY_JOBS. Then
batch them as you see fit. This will allow a single folder for running jobs and
sessions housed anywhere in
any folder across your repository.
Q: How do I get maximum speed out of my database connection? (12 September 2000)
In Sybase or MS-SQL Server, go to the Database Connection in the Server Manager.
Increase the packet size.
Recommended sizing depends on distance traveled from PMServer to Database - 20k Is
usually acceptable on the
same subnet. Also, have the DBA increase the "maximum allowed" packet size setting
on the Database itself.
Following this change, the DBA will need to restart the DBMS. Changing the Packet
Size doesn't mean all
connections will connect at this size, it just means that anyone specifying a
larger packet size for their connection
may be able to use it. It should increase speed, and decrease network traffic.
Default IP Packets are between 1200
bytes and 1500 bytes.
In Oracle: there are two methods. For connection to a local database, setup the
protocol as IPC
(between PMServer and a DBMS Server that are hosted on the same machine). IPC is
not a
protocol that can be utilized across networks (apparently). IPC stands for Inter
Process
Communication, and utilizes memory piping (RAM) instead of client context, through
the IP listner.
For remote connections there is a better way: Listner.ORA and TNSNames.ORA need to
be
modified to include SDU and TDU settings. SDU = Service Layer Data Buffer, and TDU
=
Transport Layer Data Buffer. Both of which specify packet sizing in Oracle
connections over IP.
Default for Oracle is 1500 bytes. Also note: these settings can be used in IPC
connections as well,
to control the IPC Buffer sizes passed between two local programs (PMServer and
Oracle Server)
Both the Server and the Client need to be modified. The server will allow packets
up to the max
size set - but unless the client specifies a larger packet size, the server will
default to the smallest
setting (1500 bytes). Both SDU and TDU should be set the same. See the example
below:
TNSNAMES.ORA
LOC=(DESCRIPTION= (SDU = 20480) (TDU=20480)
LISTENER.ORA
LISTENER=....(SID_DESC= (SDU = 20480) (TDU=20480) (SID_NAME = beqlocal) ....
Q: How do I get a Sequence Generator to "pick up" where another "left off"? (8 June
2000)
· To perform this mighty trick, one can use an unconnected lookup on the Sequence
ID of the target table.
Set the properties to "LAST VALUE", input port is an ID. the condition is: SEQ_ID
>= input_ID. Then in an
expression set up a variable port: connect a NEW self-resetting sequence generator
to a new input port in
the expression. The variable port's expression should read: IIF( v_seq = 0 OR
ISNULL(v_seq) = true,
:LKP.lkp_sequence(1), v_seq). Then, set up an output port. Change the output port's
expression to read:
v_seq + input_seq (from the resetting sequence generator). Thus you have just
completed an "append"
without a break in sequence numbers.
Q: How do I query the repository to see which sessions are set in TEST MODE? (8
June 2000)
· Runthefollowing select:
select * from opb_load_session where bit_option = 13;
It's actually BIT # 2 in this bit_option setting, so if you have a mask, or a bit-
level function you can then AND
it with a mask of 2, if this is greater than zero, it's been set for test load.
Q: How do I "validate" all my mappings at once? (31 March 2000)
· Issue the following command WITH CARE.
UPDATE OPB_MAPPING SET IS_VALID = 1;
· Then disconnect from the database, and re-connect. In session manager, and
designer as well.
Q: How do I validate my entire repository? (12 September 2000)
· To add the menu option, change this registry entry on your client.
72
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Informatica/PowerMart Client Tools/4.7/Repository
Manager Options . Add
the following string Name: EnableCheckReposit Data.
Validate Repository forces Informatica to run through the repository, and check the
repo for errors
Q: How do I work around a bug in 4.7? I can't change the execution order of my
stored
procedures that I've imported? (31 March 2000)
· Issue the following statements WITH CARE:
select widget_id from OPB_WIDGET where WIDGET_NAME = <widget name>
(write down the WIDGET ID)
· select * from OPB_WIDGET_ATTR where WIDGET_ID = <widget_id>
· update OPB_WIDGET_ATTR set attr_value = <execution order> where WIDGET_ID =
<widget_id> and
attr_id = 5
· COMMIT;
The <execution order> is the number of the order in which you want the stored proc
to execute.
Again, disconnect from both designer and session manager repositories, and re-
connect to "reread"
the local cache.
Q: How do I keep the session manager from "Quitting" when I try to open a session?
(23 March 2000)
· Informatica Tech Support has said: if you are using a flat file as a source, and
your "file name" in the
"Source Options" dialog is longer than 80 characters, it will "kill" the Session
Manager tool when you try to
re-open it. You can fix the session by: logging in to the repository via SQLPLUS,
or ISQL, and finding the
table called: OPB_LOAD_SESSION, find the Session ID associated with the session
name - write it down.
Then select FNAME from OPB_LOAD_FILES where Session_ID = <session_id>. Change /
update
OPB_LOAD_FILES set FNAME= <new file name> column, change the length back to less
than 80
characters, and commit the changes. Now the session has been repaired. Try to keep
the directory to that
source file in the DIRECTORY entry box above the file name box. Try to keep all the
source files together
in the same source directory if possible.
Q: How do I repair a "damaged" repository? (16 March 2000)
· There really isn't a good repair tool, nor is there a "great" method for
repairing the repository. However, I
have some suggestions which might help. If you're running in to a session which
causes the session
manager to "quit" on you when you try to open it, or you have a map that appears to
have "bad sources",
there may be something you can do. There are varying degrees of damage to the
repository - mostly
caused because the sequence generator that PM/PC relies on is buried in a table in
the repository - and
they generate their own sequence numbers. If this table becomes "corrupted" or
generates the wrong
sequences, you can get repository errors all over the place. It can spread quickly.
Try the following steps
to repair a repository: (USE AT YOUR OWN RISK) The recommended path is to backup
the repository,
send it to Technical Support - and tell them it's damaged.
1. Delete the session, disconnect, re-connect, then re-create the session, then
attempt to edit the new session
again. If the new session won't open up (srvr mgr quits), then there are more
problems - PM/PC is not
successfully attaching sources and targets to the session (SEE: OPB_LOAD_SESSION
table (SRC_ID,
TARGET_ID) columns - they will be zero, when they should contain an ID.
2. Delete the session, then open the map. Delete the source and targets from the
MAP. Save the map and
invalidate it - forcing an update to the repository and it's links. Drag the
sources and targets back in to the
map and re-connect them. Validate and Save. Then try re-building the session (back
to step one). If there
is still a failure, then there are more problems.
3. Delete the session and the map entirely. Save the repository changes - thus
requesting a delete in the
repository. While the "delete" may occur - some of the tables in the repository may
not be "cleansed".
There may still be some sources, targets, and transformation objects (reusable)
left in the repository.
Rebuild the map from scratch - then save it again... This will create a new MAP ID
in the OPB_MAPPING
table, and force PM/PC to create new ID links to existing Source and Target objects
(as well as all the other
objects in the map).
4. If that didn't work - you may have to delete the sources, reusable objects, and
targets, as well as the
session and the map. Then save the repository - again, trying to "remove" the
objects from the repository
73
itself. Then re-create them. This forces PM/PC to assign new ID's to ALL the
objects in the map, the map,
and the session - hopefully creating a "good" picture of all that was rebuilt.
· Or try this method:
1. Create a NEW repository -> call it REPO_A (for reference only).
2. Copy any of the MAPPINGS that don't have "problems" opening in their respective
sessions, and copy the
mappings (using designer) from the old repository (REPO_B) to the new repository
(REPO_A). This will
create NEW ID's for all the mappings, CAUTION: You will lose your sessions.
3. DELETE the old repository (REPO_B).
4. Create a new repository in the OLD Repository Space (REPO_B)..
5. Copy the maps back in to the original repository (Recreated Repository) From
REPO_A to REPO_B.
6. Rebuild the sessions, then re-create all of the objects you originally had
trouble with.
· You can apply this to FOLDER level and Repository Manager Copying, but you need
to make sure that
none of the objects within a folder have any problems.
· What this does: creates new ID's, resets the sequence generator, re-establishes
all the links to the objects
in the tables, and drop's out (by process of elimination) any objects you've got
problems with.
· Bottom line: PM/PC client tools have trouble when the links between ID's get
broken. It's fairly rare that this
occurs, but when it does - it can cause heartburn.
Q: How do I clear the locks that are left in the repository? (3 March 2000)
Clearing locks is typically a task for the repository manager. Generally it's done
from within the Repository Manager:
Edit Menu -> Show Locks. Select the locks, then press "remove". Typically locks are
left on objects when a client is
rebooted without properly exiting Informatica. These locks can keep others from
editing the objects. They can also
keep scheduled executions from occurring. It's not uncommon to want to clear the
locks automatically - on a
prescheduled time table, or at a specified time. This can be done safely only if
no-one has an object out for editing at
the time of deletion of the lock. The suggested method is to log in to the database
from an automated script, and
issue a "delete from OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS" table.
Q: How do I turn on the option for Check Repository? (3 March 2000)
According to Technical Support, it's only available by adjusting the registry
entries on the client. PM/PC need to be
told it's in Admin mode to work. Below are the steps to turn on the Administration
Mode on the client. Be aware -
this may be a security risk, anyone using that terminal will have access to these
features.
1)start repository manager
2) repository menu go to check repository
3) if the option is not there you need to edit your registry using regedit
go to: HKEY_CURRENT_USER>>SOFTWARE>>INFORMATICA>>PowerMart Client Tools>>Repository
Manager
Options
go to your specific version 4.5 or 4.6 and then go to Repository Manager. In
there add two strings:
1) EnableAdminMode 1
2) EnableCheckReposit 1
· both should be spelled as shown the value for both is 1
Q: How do I generate an Audit Trail for my repository (ORACLE / Sybase) ?
Download one of two *USE AT YOUR OWN RISK* zip files. The first is available now
for PowerMart 4.6.x and
PowerCenter 1.6x. It's a 7k zip file: Informatica Audit Trail v0.1a The other file
(for 4.5.x is coming...). Please note:
this is FREE software that plugs in to ORACLE 7x, and ORACLE 8x, and Oracle 8i. It
has NOT been built for
74
Sybase, Informix, or DB2. If someone would care to adapt it, and send it back to
me, I'll be happy to post these
also. It has limited support - has not been fully tested in a multi-user
environment, any feedback would be
appreciated. NOTE: SYBASE VERSION IS ON IT'S WAY.
Q: How do I "tune" a repository? My repository is slowing down after a lot of use,
how can I make it faster?
In Oracle: Schedule a nightly job to ANALYZE TABLE for ALL INDEXES, creating
histograms for the tables - keep
the cost based optimizer up to date with the statistics. In SYBASE: schedule a
nightly job to UPDATE STATISTICS
against the tables and indexes. In Informix, DB2, and RDB, see your owners manuals
about maintaining SQL query
optimizer statistics.
Q: How do I achieve "best performance" from the Informatica tool set?
By balancing what Informatica is good at with what the databases are built for.
There are reasons for placing some
code at the database level - particularly views, and staging tables for data.
Informatica is extremely good at
reading/writing and manipulating data at very high rates of throughput. However -
to achieve optimum performance
(in the Gigabyte to Terabyte range) there needs to be a balance of Tuning in
Oracle, utilizing staging tables, views
for joining source to target data, and throughput of manipulation in Informatica.
For instance: Informatica will never
achieve the speeds of "append" or straight inserts that Oracle SQL*Loader, or
Sybase BCP achieve. This is
because these two tools are written internally - specifically for the purposes of
loading data (direct to tables / disk
structures). The API that Oracle / Sybase provide Informatica with is not nearly as
equipped to allow this kind of
direct access (to eliminate breakage when Oracle/Sybase upgrade internally). The
basics of Informatica are: 1)
Keep maps as simple as possible 2) break complexity up in to multiple maps if
possible 3) rule of thumb: one MAP
per TARGET table 4) Use staging tables for LARGE sets of data 5) utilize SQL for
it's power of sorts, aggregations,
parallel queries, temp spaces, etc... (setup views in the database, tune indexes on
staging tables) 6) Tune the
database - partition tables, move them to physical disk areas, etc... separate the
logic.
Q: How do I get an Oracle Sequence Generator to operate faster?
The first item is: use a function to call it, not a stored procedure. Then, make
sure the sequence generator and the
function are local to the SOURCE or TARGET database, DO NOT use synonyms to place
either the sequence or
function in a remote instance (synonyms to a separate schema/database on the same
instance may be only a slight
performance hit). This should help - possibly double the throughput of generating
sequences in your map. The other
item is: see slide presentations on performance tuning for your sessions / maps for
a "best" way to utilize an Oracle
sequence generator. Believe it or not - the write throughput shown in the session
manager per target table is directly
affected by calling an external function/procedure which is generating sequence
numbers. It does NOT appear to
affect the read throughput numbers. This is a difficult problem to solve when you
have low "write throughput" on any
or all of your targets. Start with the sequence number generator (if you can), and
try to optimize the map for this.
Q: I have a mapping that runs for hours, but it's not doing that much. It takes 5
input tables, uses 3 joiner
transformations, a few lookups, a couple expressions and a filter before writing to
the target. We're running
PowerMart 4.6 on an NT 4 box. What tuning options do I have?
Without knowing the complete environment, it's difficult to say what the problem
is, but here's a few solutions with
which you can experiment. If the NT box is not dedicated to PowerMart (PM) during
its operation, identify what it
contends with and try rescheduling things such that PM runs alone. PM needs all the
resources it can get. If it's a
dedicated box, it's a well known fact that PM consumes resources at a rapid clip,
so if you have room for more
memory, get it, particularly since you mentioned use of the joiner transformation.
Also toy with the caching
parameters, but remember that each joiner grabs the full complement of memory that
you allocate. So if you give it
50Mb, the 3 joiners will really want 150Mb. You can also try breaking up the
session into parallel sessions and put
them into a batch, but again, you'll have to manage memory carefully because of the
joiners. Parallel sessions is a
good option if you have a multiple-processor CPU, so if you have vacant CPU slots,
consider adding more CPU's. If
a lookup table is relatively big (more than a few thousand rows), try turning the
cache flag off in the session and see
what happens. So if you're trying to look up a "transaction ID" or something
similar out of a few million rows, don't
load the table into memory. Just look it up, but be sure the table has appropriate
indexes. And last, if the sources live
on a pretty powerful box, consider creating a view on the source system that
essentially does the same thing as the
joiner transformations and possibly some of the lookups. Take advantage of the
source system's hardware to do a lot
of the work before handing down the result to the resource constrained NT box.
Q: Is there a "best way" to load tables?
Yes - If all that is occurring is inserts (to a single target table) - then the
BEST method of loading that target is to
configure and utilize the bulk loading tools. For Sybase it's BCP, for Oracle it's
SQL*Loader. With multiple targets,
break the maps apart (see slides), one for INSERTS only, and remove the update
strategies from the insert only
maps (along with unnecessary lookups) - then watch the throughput fly. We've
achieved 400+ rows per second per
table in to 5 target Oracle tables (Sun Sparc E4500, 4 CPU's, Raid 5, 2 GIG RAM,
Oracle 8.1.5) without using
75
SQL*Loader. On an NT 366 mhz P3, 128 MB RAM, single disk, single target table,
using SQL*Loader we've loaded
1 million rows (150 MB) in 9 minutes total - all the map had was one expression to
left and right trim the ports (12
ports, each row was 150 bytes in length). 3 minutes for SQL*Loader to load the flat
file - DIRECT, Non-Recoverable.
Q: How do I guage that the performance of my map is acceptable?
If you have a small file (under 6MB) and you have pmserver on a Sun Sparc 4000,
Solaris 5.6, 2 cpu's, 2 gigs RAM,
(baseline configuration - if your's is similar you'll be ok). For NT: 450 MHZ PII
128 MB RAM (under 3 MB file size),
then it's nothing to worry about unless your write throughput is sitting at 1 to 5
rows per second. If you are in this
range, then your map is too complex, or your tables have not been optimized. On a
baseline defined machine (as
stated above), expected read throughput will vary - depending on the source, write
throughput for relational tables
(tables in the database) should be upwards of 150 to 450+ rows per second. To
calculate the total write throughput,
add all of the rows per second for each target together, run the map several times,
and average the throughput. If
your map is running "slow" by these standards, then see the slide presentations to
implement a different
methodology for tuning. The suggestion here is: break the map up - 1 map per target
table, place common logic in to
maplets.
Q: How do I create a “state variable”?
Create a variable port in an expression (v_MYVAR), set the data type to Integer
(for this example), set the
expression to: IIF( ( ISNULL(v_MYVAR) = true or v_MYVAR = 0 ) [ and <your
condition> ], 1, v_MYVAR).> What
happens here, is that upon initialization Informatica may set the v_MYVAR to NULL,
or zero.> The first time this
code is executed it is set to “1”.> Of course – you can set the variable to any
value you wish – and carry that through
the transformations.> Also – you can add your own AND condition (as indicated in
italics), and only set the variable
when a specific condition has been met.> The variable port will hold it’s value for
the rest of the transformations.>
This is a good technique to use for lookup values when a single lookup value is
necessary based on a condition
being met (such as a key for an “unknown” value).> You can change the data type to
character, and use the same
examination – simply remove the “or v_MYVAR = 0” from the expression – character
values will be first set to NULL.
Q: How do I pass a variable in to a session?
There is no direct method of passing variables in to maps or sessions.> In order to
get a map/session to respond to
data driven (variables) – a data source must be provided.> If working with flat
files – it can be another flat file, if
working with relational data sources it can be with another relational table.>
Typically a relational table works best,
because SQL joins can then be employed to filter the data sets, additional maps and
source qualifiers can utilize the
data to modify or alter the parameters during run-time.
Q: How can I create one map, one session, and utilize multiple source files of the
same format?
In UNIX it’s very easy: create a link to the source file desired, place the link in
the SrcFiles directory, run the
session.> Once the session has completed successfully, change the link in the
SrcFiles directory to point to the next
available source file.> Caution: the only downfall is that you cannot run multiple
source files (of the same structure)
in to the database simultaneously.> In other words – it forces the same session to
be run serially, but if that
outweighs the maintenance and speed is not a major issue, feel free to implement it
this way.> On NT you would
have to physically move the files in and out of the SrcFiles directory. Note: the
difference between creating a link to
an individual file, and changing SrcFiles directory to link to a specific directory
is this: changing a link to an individual
file allows multiple sessions to link to all different types of sources, changing
SrcFiles to be a link itself is restrictive –
also creates Unix Sys Admin pressures for directory rights to PowerCenter (one
level up).
Q: How can I move my Informatica Logs / BadFiles directories to other disks without
changing anything in
my sessions?
Use the UNIX Link command – ask the SA to create the link and grant read/write
permissions – have the “real”
directory placed on any other disk you wish to have it on.
Q: How do I handle duplicate rows coming in from a flat file?
If you don't care about "reporting" duplicates, use an aggregator. Set the Group By
Ports to group by the primary key
in the parent target table. Keep in mind that using an aggregator causes the
following: The last duplicate row in the
file is pushed through as the one and only row, loss of ability to detect which
rows are duplicates, caching of the data
before processing in the map continues. If you wish to report duplicates, then
follow the suggestions in the
presentation slides (available on this web site) to institute a staging table. See
the pro's and cons' of staging tables,
and what they can do for you.
76
Q: Where can I find a history / metrics of the load sessions that have occurred in
Informatica? (8 June 2000)
The tables which house this information are OPB_LOAD_SESSION, OPB_SESSION_LOG, and
OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG. OPB_LOAD_SESSION contains the single session entries,
OPB_SESSION_LOG
contains a historical log of all session runs that have taken place.
OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG keeps track of the
errors, and the target tables which have been loaded. Keep in mind these tables are
tied together by Session_ID.
If a session is deleted from OPB_LOAD_SESSION, it's history is not necessarily
deleted from OPB_SESSION_LOG,
nor from OPB_SESS_TARG_LOG. Unfortunately - this leaves un-identified session ID's
in these tables. However,
when you can join them together, you can get the start and complete times from each
session. I would suggest
using a view to get the data out (beyond the MX views) - and record it in another
metrics table for historical reasons.
It could even be done by putting a TRIGGER on these tables (possibly the best
solution)...
Q: Where can I find more information on what the Informatica Repository Tables are?
On this web-site. We have published an unsupported view of what we believe to be
housed in specific tables in the
Informatica Repository. Check it out - we'll be adding to this section as we go.
Right now it's just a belief of what we
see in the tables. Repository Table Meta-Data Definitions
Q: Where can I find / change the settings regarding font's, colors, and layouts for
the designer?
You can find all the font's, colors, layouts, and controls in the registry of the
individual client. All this information is
kept at: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Informatica\PowerMart Client Tools\<ver>. Below
here, you'll find the
different folders which allow changes to be made. Be careful, deleting items in the
registry could hamper the
software from working properly.
Q: Where can I find tuning help above and beyond the manuals?
Right here. There are slide presentations, either available now, or soon which will
cover tuning of Informatica maps
and sessions - it does mean that the architectural solution proposed here be put in
place.
Q: Where can I find the map's used in generating performance statistics?
A windows ZIP file will soon be posted, which houses a repository backup, as well
as a simple PERL program that
generates the source file, and a SQL script which creates the tables in Oracle.
You'll be able to download this, and
utilize this for your own benefit.
Q: Why doesn't constraint based load order work with a maplet? (08 May 2000)
If your maplet has a sequence generator (reusable) that's mapped with data straight
to an "OUTPUT" designation,
and then the map splits the output to two tables: parent/child - and your session
is marked with "Constraint Based
Load Ordering" you may have experienced a load problem - where the constraints do
not appear to be met?? Well -
the problem is in the perception of what an "OUTPUT" designation is. The OUTPUT
component is NOT an "object"
that collects a "row" as a row, before pushing it downstream. An OUTPUT component
is merely a pass-through
structural object - as indicated, there are no data types on the INPUT or OUTPUT
components of a maplet - thus
indicating merely structure. To make the constraint based load order work properly,
move all the ports through a
single expression, then through the OUTPUT component - this will force a single row
to be "put together" and passed
along to the receiving maplet. Otherwise - the sequence generator generates 1 new
sequence ID for each split
target on the other side of the OUTPUT component.
Q: Why doesn't 4.7 allow me to set the Stored Procedure connection information in
the Session Manager ->
Transformations Tab? (31 March 2000)
This functionality used to exist in an older version of PowerMart/PowerCenter. It
was a good feature - as we could
control when the procedure was executed (ie: source pre-load), but execute it in a
target database connection. It
appears to be a removed piece of functionality. We are asking Informatica to put it
back in.
Q: Why doesn't it work when I wrap a sequence generator in a view, with a lookup
object?
First - to wrap a sequence generator in a view, you must create an Oracle stored
function, then call the function in
the select statement in a view. Second, Oracle dis-allows an order by clause on a
column returned from a user
function (It will cut your connection - and report an oracle error). I think this
is a bug that needs to be reported to
Oracle. An Informatica lookup object automatically places an "order by" clause on
the return ports / output ports in
the order they appear in the object. This includes any "function" return. The
minute it executes a non-cached SQL
77
lookup statement with an order by clause on the function return (sequence number) -
Oracle cuts the connection.
Thus keeping this solution from working (which would be slightly faster than
binding an external procedure/function).
Q: Why doesn't a running session QUIT when Oracle or Sybase return fatal errors?
The session will only QUIT when it's threshold is set: "Stop on 1 errors".
Otherwise the session will continue to run.
Q: Why doesn't a running session return a non-successful error code to the command
line when Oracle or
Sybase return any error?
If the session is not bounded by it's threshold: set "Stop on 1 errors" the session
will run to completion - and the
server will consider the session to have completed successfully - even if Oracle
runs out of Rollback or Temp Log
space, even if Sybase has a similar error. To correct this - set the session to
stop on 1 error, then the command line:
pmcmd will return a non-zero (it failed) type of error code. - as will the session
manager see that the session failed.
Q: Why doesn't the session work when I pass a text date field in to the to_date
function?
In order to make to_date(xxxx,<format>) work properly, we suggest surrounding your
expression with the following:
IIF( is_date(<date>,<format>) = true, to_date(<date>,<format>), NULL) This will
prevent session errors with
"transformation error" in the port. If you pass a non-date to a to_date function it
will cause the session to bomb out.
By testing it first, you ensure 1) that you have a real date, and 2) your format
matches the date input. The format
should match the expected date input directly - spaces, no spaces, and everything
in between. For example, if your
date is: 1999103022:31:23 then you want a format to be: YYYYMMDDHH24:MI:SS with no
spaces.
Q: Why doesn't the session control an update to a table (I have no update strategy
in the map for this
target)?
In order to process ANY update to any target table, you must put an update strategy
in the map, process a
DD_UPDATE command, change the session to "data driven". There is a second method:
without utilizing an update
strategy, set the SESSION properties to "UPDATE" instead of "DATA DRIVEN", but be
warned ALL targets will be
updated in place - with failure if the rows don't exist. Then you can set the
update flags in the mapping's sessions to
control updates to the target. Simply setting the "update flags" in a session is
not enough to force the update to
complete - even though the log may show an update SQL statement, the log will also
show: cannot insert (duplicate
key) errors.
Q: Who is the Informatica Sales Team in the Denver Region?
Christine Connor (Sales), and Alan Schwab (Technical Engineer).
Q: Who is the contact for Informatica consulting across the country?
CORE Integration
Q: What happens when I don't connect input ports to a maplet? (14 June 2000)
Potentially Hazardous values are generated in the maplet itself. Particularly for
numerics. If you didn't connect ALL
the ports to an input on a maplet, chances are you'll see sporadic values inside
the maplet - thus sporadic results.
Such as ZERO in certain decimal cases where NULL is desired. This is because both
the INPUT and OUTPUT
objects of a maplet are nothing more than an interface, which defines the structure
of a data row - they are NOT like
an expression that actually "receives" or "puts together" a row image. This can
cause a misunderstanding of how the
maplet works - if you're not careful, you'll end up with unexpected results.
Q: What is the Local Object Cache? (3 March 2000)
The local object cache is a cache of the Informatica objects which are retrieved
from the repository when a
connection is established to a repository. The cache is not readily accessed
because it's housed within the PM/PC
client tool. When the client is shut-down, the cache is released. Apparently the
refresh cycle of this local cache
requires a full disconnect/reconnect to the repository which has been updated. This
cache will house two different
images of the same object. For instance: a shared object, or a shortcut to another
folder. If the actual source object
is updated (source shared, source shortcut), updates can only be seen in the
current open folder if a
disconnect/reconnect is performed against that repository. There is no apparent
command to refresh the cache from
the repository. This may cause some confusion when updating objects then switching
back to the mapping where
you'd expect to see the newly updated object appear.
78
Q: What is the best way to "version control"?
It seems the general developer community agrees on this one, the Informatica
Versioning leaves a lot to be desired.
We suggest not utilizing the versioning provided. For two reasons: one, it's
extremely unwieldy (you lose all your
sessions), and the repository grows exponentially because Informatica copies
objects to increase the version
number. We suggest two different approaches; 1) utilizing a backup of the
repository - synchronize Informatica
repository backups (as opposed to DBMS repo backups) with all the developers. Make
your backup consistently and
frequently. Then - if you need to back out a piece, restore the whole repository.
2) Build on this with a second
"scratch" repository, save and restore to the "scratch" repository ONE version of
the folders. Drag and drop the
folders to and from the "scratch" development repository. Then - if you need to
VIEW a much older version, restore
that backup to the scratch area, and view the folders. In this manner - you can
check in the whole repository backup
binary to an outside version control system like PVCS, CCS, SCM, etc... Then
restore the whole backup in to
acceptance - use the backup as a "VERSION" or snapshot of everything in the
repository - this way items don't get
lost, and disconnected versions do not get migrated up in to production.
Q: What is the best way to handle multiple developer environments?
The school of thought is still out on this one. As with any - there are many many
ways to handle this. One idea is
presented here (which seems to work well, and be comfortable to those who already
worked in shared Source Code
environments). The idea is this: All developers use shared folders, shared objects,
and global repositories. In
development - it's all about communication between team members - so that the items
being modified are assigned
to individuals for work. With this methodology - all maps can use common mapplets,
shared sources, targets, and
other items. The one problem with this is that the developers MUST communicate
about what they are working on.
This is a common and familiar method to working on shared source code - most
development teams feel comfortable
with this, as do managers. The problem with another commonly utilized method (one
folder per developer), is that
you end up with run-away development environments. Code re-use, and shared object
use nearly always drop to
zero percent (caveat: unless you are following SEI / CMM / KPA Level 5 - and you
have a dedicated CM (Change
Management) person in the works. Communication is still of utmost importance,
however now you have the added
problem of "checking in" what looks like different source tables from different
developers, but the objects are named
the same... Among other problems that arise.
Q: What is the web address to submit new enhancement requests?
· Informatica's enhancement request web address is:
mailto:featurerequest@informatica.com
Q: What is the execution order of the ports in an expression?
All ports are executed TOP TO BOTTOM in a serial fashion, but they are done in the
following groups: All input ports
are pushed values first. Then all variables are executed (top to bottom physical
ordering in the expression). Last -
all output expressions are executed to push values to output ports - again, top to
bottom in physical ordering. You
can utilize this to your advantage, by placing lookups in to variables, then using
the variables "later" in the execution
cycle.
Q: What is a suggested method for validating fields / marking them with errors?
One of the successful methods is to create an expression object, which contains
variables.> One variable per port
that is to be checked.> Set the error “flag” for that field, then at the bottom of
the expression trap each of the error
fields.> From this port you can choose to set flags based on each individual error
which occurred, or feed them out
as a combination of concatenated field names – to be inserted in to the database as
an error row in an error tracking
table.
Q: What does the error “Broken Pipe” mean in the PMSERVER.ERR log on Unix?
One of the known causes for this error message is: when someone in the client User
Interface queries the server,
then presses the “cancel” button that appears briefly in the lower left corner.> It
is harmless – and poses no threat.
Q: What is the best way to create a readable “DEBUG” log?
Create a table in a relational database which resembles your flat file source
(assuming you have a flat file source).>
Load the data in to the relational table.> Then – create your map from top to
bottom and turn on VERBOSE DATA
log at the session level.> Go back to the map, over-ride the SQL in the SQL
Qualifier to only pull one to three rows
through the map, then run the session.> In this manner, the DEBUG log will be
readable, errors will be much easier
to identify – and once the logic is fixed, the whole data set can be run through
the map with NORMAL logging.>
Otherwise you may end up with a huge (Megabyte) log.> The other two ways to create
debugging logs are: 1) switch
79
the session to TEST LOAD, set it to 3 rows, and run… The problem with this is that
the reader will read ALL of the
source data.> 2) change the output to a flat file…. The problem with this is that
your log ends up huge (depends on
the number of source rows you have).
Q: What is the best methodology for utilizing Informatica’s Strengths?
It depends on the purpose. However – there is a basic definition of how well the
tool will perform with throughput and
data handling, if followed in general principal – you will have a winning
situation.> 1) break all complex maps down
in to small manageable chunks.> Break up any logic you can in to steps.>
Informatica does much better with
smaller more maintainable maps. 2) Break up complex logic within an expression in
to several different
expressions.> Be wary though: the more expressions the slower the throughput – only
break up the logic if it’s too
difficult to maintain.> 3) Follow the guides for table structures and data
warehouse structures which are available on
this web site.> For reference: load flat files to staging tables, load staging
tables in to operational data stores /
reference stores / data warehousing sources, load data warehousing sources in to
star schemas or snowflakes, load
star schemas or snowflakes in to highly de-normalized reporting tables.> By
breaking apart the logic you will see the
fastest throughput.
Q: When is it right to use SQL*Loader / BCP as a piped session versus a tail
process?
SQL*Loader / BCP as a piped session should be used when no intermediate file is
necessary, or the source data is
too large to stage to an intermediate file, there is not enough disk or time to
place all the source data in to an
intermediate file.> The downfalls currently are this: as a piped process (for
PowerCenter 1.5.2 and 1.6 / PowerMart
v4.52. and 4.6)> the core does NOT stop when either BCP or SQL*Loader “quit” or
terminate.> The core will only
stop after reading all of the source data in to the data reader thread.> This is
dangerous if you have a huge file you
wish to process – and it’s scheduled as a monitored process.> Which means: a 5 hour
load (in which SQL*Loader /
BCP stopped within the first 5 minutes) will only stop and signal a page after 5
hours of reading source data.
Q: What happens when Informatica causes DR Watson's on NT? (30 October 2000)
This is just my theory for now, but here's the best explanation I can come up with.
Typically this occurs when there is
not enough physical RAM available to perform the operation. Usually this only
happens when SQLServer is installed
on the same machine as the PMServer - however if this is not your case, some of
this may still apply. PMServer
starts up child threads just like Unix. The threads share the global shared memory
area - and rely on NT's Thread
capabilities. The DR Watson seems to appear when a thread attempts to deallocate,
or allocate real memory.
There's none left (mostly because of SQLServer). The memory manager appears to
return an error, or asks the
thread to wait while it reorganizes virtual RAM to make way for the physical
request. Unfortunately the thread code
doesn't pay attention to this requrest, resulting in a memory violation. The other
theory is the thread attempts to free
memory that's been swapped to virtual, or has been "garbage collected" and cleared
already - thus resulting again in
a protected memory mode access violation - thus a DR Watson. Typically the DR
Watson can cause the session to
"freeze up". The only way to clear this is to stop and restart the PMSERVER service
- in some cases it requires a full
machine reboot. The only other possibility is when PMServer is attempting to free
or shut down a thread - maybe
there's an error in the code which causes the DR Watson. In any case, the only real
fix is to increase the physical
RAM on the machine, or to decrease the number of concurrent sessions running at any
given point, or to decrease
the amount of RAM that each concurrent session is using.
Q: What happens when Informatica CORE DUMPS on Unix? (12 April 2000)
Many things can cause a core dump, but the question is: how do you go about
"finding out" what cuased it, how do
you work to solve it, and is there a simple fix? This case was found to be frequent
(according to tech support) among
setups of New Unix Hardware - causing unnecessary core dumps. The IPC semaphore
settings were set too low -
causing X number of concurrent sessions to "die" with "writer process died" and
"reader process died" etc... We are
on a Unix Machine - Sun Solaris 5.7, anyone with this configuration might want to
check the settings if they
experience "Core Dumps" as well.
1. Run "sysdef", examine the IPC Semaphores section at the bottom of the output.
2. the folowing settings should be "increased"
3. SEMMNI - (semaphore identifiers), (7 x # of concurrent sessions to run in
Informatica) + 10 for growth +
DBMS setting (DBMS Setting: Oracle = 2 per user, Sybase = 40 (avg))
4. SEMMNU - (undo structures in system) = 0.80 x SEMMNI value
5. SEMUME - (max undo entries per process) = SEMMNU
80
6. SHMMNI - (shared memory identifiers) = SEMMNI + 10
· These settings must be changed by ROOT: etc/system file.
· About the CORE DUMP: To help Informatica figure out what's going wrong you can
run a unix utility: "truss"
in the following manner:
1. Shut down PMSERVER
2. login as "powermart" owner of pmserver - cd to the pmserver home directory.
3. Open Session Manager on another client - log in, and be ready to press "start"
for the sessions/batches
causing problems.
4. type: truss -f -o truss.out pmserver <hit return>
5. On the client, press "start" for the sessions/batches having trouble.
6. When all the batches have completed or failed, press "stop server" from the
Server Manager
· Your "truss.out" file will have been created - thus giving you a log of all the
forked processes, and memory
management /system calls that will help decipher what's happing. you can examine
the "truss.out" file -
look for: "killed" in the log.
· DONT FORGET: Following a CORE DUMP it's always a good idea to shut down the unix
server, and
bounce the box (restart the whole server).
Q: What happens when Oracle or Sybase goes down in the middle of a transformation?
It’s up to the database to recover up to the last commit point.> If you’re asking
this question, you should be thinking
about re-runnability of your processes.> Designing re-runability in to the
processing/maps up front is the best
preventative measure you can have.> Utilizing the recovery facility of PowerMart /
PowerCenter appears to be
sketchy at best – particularly in this area of recovery.> The transformation itself
will eventually error out – stating that
the database is no longer available (or something to that effect).
Q: What happens when Oracle (or Sybase) is taken down for routine backup, but
nothing is running in
PMServer at the time?
PMServer reports that the database is unavailable in the PMSERVER.err log.> When
Oracle/Sybase comes back on
line, PMServer will attempt to re-connect (if the repository is on the
Oracle/Sybase instance that went down), and
eventually it will succeed (when Oracle/Sybase becomes available again).> However –
it is recommended that
PMServer be scheduled to shutdown before Oracle/Sybase is taken off-line and
scheduled to re-start after
Oracle/Sybase is put back on-line.
Q: What happens in a database when a cached LOOKUP object is created (during a
session)?
The session generates a select statement with an Order By clause. Any time this is
issued, the databases like
Oracle and Sybase will select (read) all the data from the table, in to the
temporary database/space. Then the data
will be sorted, and read in chunks back to Informatica server. This means, that
hot-spot contention for a cached
lookup will NOT be the table it just read from. It will be the TEMP area in the
database, particularly if the TEMP area
is being utilized for other things. Also - once the cache is created, it is not re-
read until the next running session recreates
it.
Q: Can you explain how "constraint based load ordering" works? (27 Jan 2000)
Constraint based load ordering in PowerMart / PowerCenter works like this: it
controls the order in which the target
tables are committed to a relational database. It is of no use when sending
information to a flat file. To construct the
proper constraint order: links between the TARGET tables in Informatica need to be
constructed. Simply turning on
"constraint based load ordering" has no effect on the operation itself. Informatica
does NOT read constraints from
the database when this switch is turned on. Again, to take advantage of this
switch, you must construct primary /
foreign key relationships in the TARGET TABLES in the designer of Informatica.
Creating primary / foreign key
relationships is difficult - you are only allowed to link a single port (field) to
a single table as a primary / foreign key.
81
Q: It appears as if "constraint based load ordering" makes my session "hang" (it
never completes). How do
I fix this? (27 Jan 2000)
We have a suggested method. The best known method for fixing this "hang" bug is to
1) open the map, 2) delete the
target tables (parent / child pairs) 3) Save the map, 4) Drag in the targets again,
Parent's FIRST 5) relink the ports, 6)
Save the map, 7) refresh the session, and re-run it. What it does: Informatica
places the "target load order" as the
order in which the targets are created (in the map). It does this because the
repository is Seuqence ID Based and the
session derives it's "commit" order by the Sequence ID (unless constraint based
load ordering is ON), then it tries to
re-arrange the commit order based on the constraints in the Target Table
definitions (in PowerMart/PowerCenter).
Once done, this will solve the commit ordering problems, and the "constraint based"
load ordering can even be
turned off in the session. Informatica claims not to support this feature in a
session that is not INSERT ONLY.
However -we've gotten it to work successfully in DATA DRIVEN environments. The only
known cause (according to
Technical Support) is this: the writer is going to commit a child table (as defined
by the key links in the targets). It
checks to see if that particular parent row has been committed yet - but it finds
nothing (because the reader filled up
the memory cache with new rows). The memory that was holding the "committed" rows
has been "dumped" and no
longer exists. So - the writer waits, and waits, and waits - it never sees a
"commit" for the parents, so it never
"commits" the child rows. This only appears to happen with files larger than a
certain number of rows (depending on
your memory settings for the session). The only fix is this: Set
"ThrottleReader=20" in the PMSERVER.CFG file. It
apparently limits the Reader thread to a maximum of "20" blocks for each session -
thus leaving the writer more room
to cache the commit blocks. However - this too also hangs in certain situations. To
fix this, Tech Support
recommends moving to PowerMart 4.6.2 release (internal core apparently needs a
fix). 4.6.2 appears to be "better"
behaved but not perfect. The only other way to fix this is to turn off constraint
based load ordering, choose a different
architecture for your maps (see my presentations), and control one map/session per
target table and their order of
execution.
Q: Is there a way to copy a session with a map, when copying a map from repository
to repository? Say,
copying from Development to Acceptance?
Not that anyone is aware of. There is no direct straight forward method for copying
a session. This is the one
downside to attempting to version control by folder. You MUST re-create the session
in Acceptance (UNLESS) you
backup the Development repository, and RESTORE it in to acceptance. This is the
only way to take all contents
(and sessions) from one repository to another. In this fashion, you are versioning
all of the repository at once. With
the repository BINARY you can then check this whole binary in to PVCS or some other
outside version control
system. However, to recreate the session, the best method is to: bring up
Development folder/repo, side by side with
Acceptance folder/repo - then modify the settings in Acceptance as necessary.
Q: Can I set Informatica up for Target flat file, and target relational database?
Up through PowerMart 4.6.2, PowerCenter 1.6.2 this cannot be done in a single map.
The best method for this is to
stay relational with your first map, add a table to your database that looks
exactly like the flat file (1 for 1 with the flat
file), target the two relational tables. Then, construct another map which simply
reads this "staging" table and dumps
it to flat file. You can batch the maps together as sequential.
Q: How can you optimize use of an Oracle Sequence Generator?
In order to optimize the use of an Oracle Sequence Generator you must break up you
map. The generic method for
calling a sequence generator is to encapsulate it in a stored procedure. This is
typically slow - and kills the
performance. Your version of Informatica's tool should contain maplets to make this
easier. Break the map up in to
inserts only, and updates only. The suggested method is as follows: 1) Create a
staging table - bring the data in
straight from the flat file in to the staging table. 2) Create a maplet with the
current logic in it. 3) create one INSERT
map, and one Update map (separate inserts from updates) 4) create a SOURCE called:
DUAL, containing the fields:
DUMMY char(1), NEXTVAL NUMBER(15,0), CURRVAL number(15,0), 5) Copy the source in to
your INSERT map,
6) delete the Source Qualifier for "dummy" 7) copy the "nextval" port in to the
original source qualifier (the one that
pulls data from the staging table) 8) Over-ride the SQL in the original source
qualifier, (generate it, then change
DUAL.NEXTVAL to the sequence name: SQ_TEST.NEXTVAL. 9) Feed the "nextval" port
through the mapplet. 10)
Change the where clause on the SQL over-ride to select only the data from the
staging table that doesn't exist in the
parent target (to be inserted. This is extremely fast, and will allow your inserts
only map to operate at incredibly high
throughput while using an Oracle Sequence Generator. Be sure to tune your indexes
on the Oracle tables so that
there is a high read throughput.
Q: Why can't I over-ride the SQL in a lookup, and make the lookup non-cached?
· Apparently Informatica hasn't made this feature available yet in their tool. It's
a shame - it would simplify the
method for pulling Oracle Sequence numbers from the database. For now - it's simply
not implemented.
82
Q: Does it make a difference if I push all my ports (fields) through an expression,
or push only the ports
which are used in the expression?
· From the work that has been done - it doesn't make much of an impact on the
overall speed of the map. If
the paradigm is to push all ports through the expressions for readability then do
so, however if it's easier to
push the ports around the expression (not through it), then do so.
Q: What is the affect of having multiple expression objects vs one expression
object with all the
expressions?
· Less overall objects in the map make the map/session run faster. Consolodating
expressions in to a single
expression object is most helpful to throughput - but can increase the complexity
(maintenance). Read the
question/answer about execution cycles above for hints on how to setup a large
expression like this.
Q.Am using a SP that returns a resultset. ( ex : select * from cust where cust_id =
@cust_id )I am supposed to load
the contents of this into the target..As simple as it seems , I am not able to pass
the the mapping parameters for
cust_idAlso , I cannot have a mapping without SQ Tranf.
Ans: Here select * from cust where cust_id = @cust_id is wrong it should be like
this: select * from cust where
cust_id = ‘$$cust_id‘
Q.My requirement is like this: Target table structure. Col1, col2, col3, filename
The source file structure will have col1, col2 and col3. All the 10 files have the
same structure but different filenames.
when i run my mapping thro' file list, i am able to load all the 10 files but the
filename column is empty. Hence my
requirement is that while reading from the file list, is there any way i can
extract the filename and populate into my
target table.what u have said is that it will populate into a separate table. But
in no way i can find which record has
come from which file. Pls help?
Ans: Here PMCMD command can be used with shell script to run the same session by
changing the source file
name dynamically in the parameter file.
Q.Hi all,i am fighting with this problem for a quiet a bit of time now.I need your
help guys (plz)i am trying to load data
from DB2 to Oracle.the column in DB2 is of LONGVARCHAR and the column in Oracle
that i am mapping to is of
CLOB data type.for this it is giving 'parameter binding error,illegal parameter
value in LOB function'plz if anybody had
faced this kind of problem,guide me.
(log file give problem as follows:
WRITER_1_*_1> WRT_8167 Start loading table [SHR_ASSOCIATION] at: Mon Jan 03
17:21:17 2005
WRITER_1_*_1> Mon Jan 03 17:21:17 2005
WRITER_1_*_1> WRT_8229 Database errors occurred:
Database driver error...parameter binding failed
ORA-24801: illegal parameter value in OCI lob function Database driver error...)
Ans: Informatica Powercenter below 6.2.1 doesn’t supports CLOB/BLOB data types but
this is supported in 7.0
onwards. So please upgrade to this version or change the data type of u r column to
the suitable one.
Q.Hi We are doing production support, when I checked one mapping I found that for
that mapping Source is Sybase
and Target is Oracle table (in mapping) when I checked in the session for the same
maping I found that In session
properties they declared the target as Flat file Is it possible?? if so how....when
it’s possible?
Ans: I think they are loading the data from SYBASE source to Oracle Target using
the External Loader.
Q.Is there *any* way to use a SQL statement as a source rather than a table or
tables and join them in Informatica
via aggregator's, Join's, etc... ?
Ans: SQL Override is there in the Source Qualifier Transformation.
Q.I have a data file in which each record may contain variable number of fields. I
have to store these records in
oracle table with one to one relationship between record in data file and record in
table.
Ans: Question is not clear. But I think he should have the structure of all the
records depending on its type. Then use
a sequence transformation for getting an unique id for each record.

Answers 1

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Answers 1

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

47083816-2-Informatica-Developers-Handbook-Interfaces.

2 Detailed ETL Procedures

Code Object Naming Convention Description/Example

3.4 General Best Practices

3.5.4 Informatica Flat File Naming Standard

4 Build and Unit Test Activities

6.) Click Next>> and Finish to complete this wizard.

Screenshot 7.1.3.b – US_CORP_1UP_QTG1_INTFC_end_audit_parms.txt

4.4 Build Completion and Next Steps

12) Create a session using the mapping m_P1UP_SHARED_AUDIT_LOG_END_SUCCESS. To save

$$SERVICE_NAME=12345 (Note: This is actually the caliber ID)

Appendix B: Accessing CommonLE Logs

3) The Welcome screen appears. Click Logs & Errors

5) To view the details of a specific log click the Application link.

Appendix C: Implementing Record-Level Exception Logging into Core Processes

given failed transformation. This

source/target record count

Appendix D: Implementing Record-Level Audit Logging into Core Processes

Best Informatica Interview Questions & Answers

1. Some Important Question

SQL Transformation --Allows Power Center developers to execute SQL statements

17. What is a session and how to create it?

Data warehousing concepts

7. Why need data warehouse?

28. What are the constants used in update strategy?

Connected and unconnected stored procudure.

o This allows an External procedure to be references in a mappingby adding an

o Use static cache only.

Stored Procedure Transformation

N Null Bad Data.

#Groups ((å column size) + 7)

- A parameter file is created by text editor.

Stopping and aborting a session

Optimizing Target Databases:

Two different ODBC sources

Using database query - Copy the read query directly from

the number of values the informatica

and detailed transformation statistics.

Set Operators: UNION [ALL], INTERSECT, MINUS

We can declare intermediate markers called savepoints within the context of a

Q. What is clustered index?

Q. How can variables be passed to a SQL routine?

Q. What is the default ordering of an ORDER BY clause in a SELECT statement?

A row is a collection of column information corresponding to a single record.

Q. How do you choose between B-tree index and bitmap index?

b) Relaxed Data Code Page Validation

You can design a mapplet to contain sets of transformation logic to be reused in

We can make a Sequence Generator reusable, and use it in multiple mappings. We

· Sorter transformation. The Sorter transformation is an active transformation that

Q: How do I turn on the option for Check Repository? (3 March 2000)

Q: How do I handle duplicate rows coming in from a flat file?

oracle error). I think this is a bug that needs to be reported to Oracle. An

Growing Data Volume

Anda mungkin juga menyukai